JP7809396B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), slot machines, enclosed gaming machines, and medal-less slot machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the playing area of the game board is typically equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, as well as prize holes, starting holes, and variable prize holes into which the game ball can enter. When a game ball enters these holes, the player is given a special benefit, such as the payout of a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Among these gaming machines, there are some that are capable of predictive performance.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-200302

However, there is room for improvement in the predictive effects of conventional gaming machines.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with distinctive predictive effects.

The gaming machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
A gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading effects,
A player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes through his/her operation;
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of reach effects,
A hold display can be displayed in response to a hold,
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode,
The plurality of types of pre-reading effects include a first pre-reading effect and a second pre-reading effect,
The plurality of types of reach effects include a first reach effect and a second reach effect that suggests a higher possibility of a jackpot than the first reach effect,
The display mode of the reserved display includes a normal display mode and a suggestive display mode that suggests a higher possibility of a jackpot than the normal display mode,
The suggestion display mode includes a plurality of display modes,
The first pre-reading effect is an effect in which the pending display is displayed in any one of the suggestion display modes,
During the execution of the second reach effect, if a new hold occurs, the first read-ahead effect may not be executed for the new hold, while the second read-ahead effect may be executed.
The first look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance that can be executed in the first performance mode and can also be executed in the second performance mode,
The second look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that cannot be executed in the first effect mode but is executable in the second effect mode,
In the second performance mode, the first pre-reading performance may be executed for a certain hold, and the second pre-reading performance may also be executed.
The first pre-reading effect is an effect that may be executed at least at a first timing,
The second pre-reading effect is an effect to be executed at a second timing,
the first timing is later than the second timing,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the second presentation mode is configured to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the first presentation mode,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the second presentation mode is configured not to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the first presentation mode,
In the case where a winning hold occurs in the second performance mode and the first look-ahead performance and the second look-ahead performance are executed for the hold, when a new hold occurs, the first look-ahead performance may not be executed at the first timing for the new hold, while the second look-ahead performance may be executed at the second timing.
It is characterized by:

The gaming machine of the present invention can provide a gaming machine with unique predictive effects.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. 1 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (a) A diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a flat layout. (b) A diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of an initial setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a device monitoring process. (a) A diagram showing the control state of each button when power is turned on, (b) A diagram showing the control state of each button when power is turned on (error detection state), and (c) A diagram showing the control state of each button when power is turned on with a setting change. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing an example of control when valid buttons (second operating means) are simultaneously operated when the power is turned on (error detection state), respectively. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of control states of other buttons when each button is operated. (a) is a diagram showing the timeline of the flow from when a power outage occurs until power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 is pressed. (b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the flow from when a power outage occurs until power is restored while the start lever 135 is pressed. (a) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the flow from when a power outage occurs while the reel 112 is rotating to when power is restored by pressing the stop button 139. (b) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the flow from when a power outage occurs while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode to when power is restored by pressing the stop button 139. 10A is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the flow from when a power outage occurs in an error detection state until power is restored when the reset button 243 is pressed. 10B is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the flow of powering on with a transition to a setting changeable state when the reset button 243 is pressed. (a) A diagram showing the control state (modified example) of each button when the power is turned on, which corresponds to Fig. 10(a). (b) A diagram showing the control state (modified example) of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), which corresponds to Fig. 10(b). (c) A diagram showing the control state (modified example) of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change, which corresponds to Fig. 10(c). 10A to 10C are diagrams showing modified examples of the control states of other buttons when each button is operated. FIG. 10 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1100 and a lending machine 1700 according to a modified example, as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 11 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine 1100 according to a modified example. (a) is a diagram showing the control state of the count button and the game medal number clear button when the power is turned on. (b) is a diagram showing an example of control when the count button and the game medal number clear button are operated simultaneously. (c) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the game medal number clear button when the count button is operated. (d) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the count button when the game medal number clear button is operated. (a) is a diagram showing the maximum protruding height of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from the front view of the slot machine 100. (b) is a diagram showing the area of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from the front view of the slot machine 100. 1A is a diagram showing a flow of a normal setting change mode in chronological order, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a flow of a normal setting check mode in chronological order. (a) A diagram showing in chronological order an example of a state in which play is possible when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode. (b) A diagram showing in chronological order an example of maintaining the setting confirmation mode when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode. (c) A diagram showing an example of the control state of the game medal number clear button when the count button is operated. (d) A diagram showing an example of the control state of the count button when the game medal number clear button is operated. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of control in a time series when a setting change operation (Example 1) is performed with the door closed. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of control in a time series when a setting change operation (Example 2) is performed with the door closed. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing an example of control in time series when a setting change operation (Example 3) is performed with the door closed. 10 is a diagram showing an example of control in time series when a setting change operation (Example 4) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of control in time series when a setting change operation (Example 5) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control in time series when a setting change operation (Example 6) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a simplified front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side). 32A and 32B are enlarged views of a portion of the attacca unit 23, where (a) shows the internal state of the unit main body 23a, and (b) shows the back side of the unit cover body 23b that covers the unit main body 23a. FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. These are examples of display patterns for a pachinko machine, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a regular pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a special symbol has been won, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a non-time-saving play state, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a time-saving play state, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in a time-saving state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a non-time-shortened state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a time-shortened play state, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special chart determination table for when a small jackpot is won in a time-shortened play state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of a normal electric device. (a) is a diagram showing a table for determining whether a regular map is a winner or loser in a regular map lottery, (b) is a diagram showing a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of a regular map used in a non-time-saving game state, (c) is a diagram showing a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of a regular map used in a time-saving game state, and (d) is a diagram showing a table for determining the confirmed stop time of a regular map. (a-1) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the start time of a win (OP time) of a normal pattern trigger in a non-time-shortened game state, (a-2) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the start time of a win (OP time) of a normal pattern trigger in a time-shortened game state, (b-1) is a diagram showing an opening time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in a non-time-shortened game state, (b-2) is a diagram showing an opening time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in an a1 time-shortened game state and a c time-shortened game state, (b-3) is a diagram showing an opening time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in an a2 time-shortened game state, (c) is a diagram showing a closing time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger, (d-1) is a diagram showing a winning end time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in a non-time-shortened game state, and (d-2) is a diagram showing a winning end time judgment table for a normal pattern trigger in a time-shortened game state. (a) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the start time (OP time) of the normal power operation gate trigger, (b) is a diagram showing a judgment table for the operation time of the normal power operation gate trigger in various game states, (c) is a diagram showing how to handle when a game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g, (d) is a diagram showing how to handle special charts 1 and 2 when they are changing simultaneously, and (e) is a diagram showing how to handle when a game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal chart is changing. This is a timing chart that explains the timing for determining the opening time of the normal electric device (electric chute) triggered by the normal electric operation gate. This is a timing chart explaining the measures taken to ensure the fixed stop time of the normal pattern shown in Figure 40-2 (d). A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the transition of game states. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation related to the decorative pattern change display centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 45 in stages. This figure shows another example of the presentation following Figure 45(q) in stages. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation in stages during a jackpot game centered around a decorative pattern display device. A diagram showing another example of the presentation in a jackpot game centered on a decorative pattern display device in stages. This figure shows a step-by-step example of prioritizing the presentation of the pattern that is displayed first in a stopped state when different patterns are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. In this example, when both the variable display of the normal symbol, which indicates a win, and the variable display of the special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, are being executed in the normal game state, the effect of the symbol that stops and displays first takes priority. This figure shows a different example from the example shown in Figure 50 in stages when both the normal pattern change display and the special pattern 2 change display, which is a jackpot, are being executed in normal game mode. c) A diagram showing an example of a step-by-step transition from the final change in the time-shortened game state (RUSH state) to the normal game state (non-time-shortened game state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of a standby display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a game in which the presentation mode is changed in a time-saving game state (RUSH state) in stages. This figure shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode A is selected. This is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode C is selected. This is a diagram showing an example in stages of when power is interrupted for a moment in each performance mode and then immediately restored. This is a diagram showing an example of what happens in stages when a winning command is missed when the modified presentation mode C is selected. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the presentation mode. This is a diagram showing two examples in which a hold change effect and an advance notification effect are executed in stages. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). 1A and 1B are diagrams showing gaming machines according to modified examples of the present invention, in which (a) shows a casino machine 2000, (b) shows a mobile phone 3000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, (d) shows a portable gaming machine 4000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, (d) shows a home video game machine 5000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

First, we will explain the gaming machine (slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention using Figures 1 to 29.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 1. Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in Figure 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 (door body) attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 101. The front door 102 (door body) will be described later using Figure 2.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110-112 are rotated by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed in an appropriate number at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 110-112 (see Figure 4(a)). From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed in roughly three rows vertically through symbol display windows 113 located in front of each reel 110-112, allowing a total of nine symbols to be seen.

By spinning each of the reels 110-112, the combination of symbols visible to the player will change. In other words, each of the reels 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays a variety of symbol combinations. Note that in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable for the backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also known as an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 110-112, and a light-blocking piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection results of this sensor, the rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress (special game state). The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay combination, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

BET buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time BET button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "1-coin bet button") 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted, up to a maximum of three medals; when BET button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "2-coin bet button") 131 is pressed, two medals are inserted; and when BET button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "MAX bet button") 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, BET button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal slot 141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (by inserting) into the medal slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

To the left of the medal slot 141 are a cross key 193a (first operating means, consisting of four buttons: up, down, right, and left. hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "volume buttons"), an OK button 193b (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as the "cross key 193"), and an effect button (first operating means) 156 that accepts player input for various effects, and are used to select menus and adjust volume on the administrator screen SD, etc., which will be described later.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during bonus play) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing push order effects. In this example, the stored number display 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started spinning by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

Hereinafter, operations performed on stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the spinning reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order (or push order).

If the left stop button 137 is represented as "Left or R," the middle stop button 138 as "Middle or C," and the right stop button 139 as "Right or R," there are six possible operating sequences (press orders) for the stop buttons 137-139: (1) left-to-middle-to-right operating sequence (Left-to-Right or LCR), (2) left-to-right-to-middle operating sequence (Left-to-Right-Centre or LRC), (3) middle-to-left-to-right operating sequence (Middle-to-Left-Right or CLR), (4) middle-to-right-to-left operating sequence (Middle-to-Right-Left or CRL), (5) right-to-left-to-middle operating sequence (Right-to-Left-Centre or RLC), and (6) right-to-middle-to-left operating sequence (Right-to-Centre-Left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

In this example, the settlement button 134 is arranged to protrude forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 (the outer surface of the slot machine 100 that is approximately perpendicular to the player and faces the player; see Figure 21 (a)). However, like the effect button 156, it may also be arranged to protrude upward from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 (in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened).

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 162 are a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from the speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps that add excitement to the game. A performance device 160 is installed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is installed above the performance device 160.

This effect device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means; hereinafter also referred to as the "effect image display device") disposed behind this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

The display means does not have to be an LCD display device; it can be any display device capable of displaying various presentation images and various game information. For example, it can be a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. The display screen is rectangular and is configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it can also be square. Decorations (not shown) can be placed around the edges of the display screen, so that part of the edges of the display screen are hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it can also be curved.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 2. Figure 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by a top panel 261, left side panel 260, right side panel 260, bottom panel 264, and back panel 242, and is open at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is located in a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are located below this main control board storage case 210. In addition, a main control board display 190 consisting of multiple LEDs is disposed on the main control board. The main board display 190 will be described later using Figure 13, etc., and is one of the notification means that can notify information related to the game (such as errors and the operating status of the operating means).

A sub-control board storage case 220 housing a sub-control board is disposed to the side of the main control board storage case 210 and reels 110-112, i.e., on the left-hand side panel 260. Also, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the right-hand side panel 260, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information from the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Also provided inside the main body 101 is a setting key switch (operation means; hereinafter also referred to as the "setting key SW"; not shown) that can be turned on (second operating state; hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ON") and off (first operating state; hereinafter sometimes referred to as "OFF") by rotating it. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change or check the setting values (Settings 1 to 6 in this example), which will be described later.

Also provided inside the main body 101 is a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW" or "reset button") 243 that can be pressed to change settings (setting value change operation). This reset SW 243 is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can be operated to resolve various errors (error resolution operation) described below.

These setting key SW and reset SW 243 are operating means located in a position that allows them to be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. In other words, they are operating means that can only be operated by the gaming facility's manager (store staff, etc.) and cannot be operated by players.

The main body 101 also includes a setting value display device 101a (see Figure 15(b)) capable of displaying setting values. In this example, the setting value display device 101a is configured as a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value display device 101a displays the setting value (one of Settings 1 to 6), and when the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the setting value is no longer displayed. On the other hand, when a setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value.

A medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264. Above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110-112, is disposed a power supply device (power supply means) 252 having a power board. A power switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "power SW") 244 is disposed on the front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device (power supply means) 252 converts AC power supplied externally to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, described below. It also includes a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) that supplies power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

To the right of the medal payout device 180 is located the auxiliary medal storage 240, with an overflow terminal (not shown) located behind it. The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 264, which extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in a closed state, can be opened by inserting a key held by the gaming facility manager into the door key hole 140 (see Figure 1). Therefore, the manager can unlock the front door 102 (change it from a closed state to an open state), but anyone other than the manager (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102.

An optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter also referred to as the "open/close sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided on the right side panel 260 of the main body 101, and is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this open/close sensor.

The main control unit 300 monitors the status of various sensors 318, including this open/close sensor, during the device monitoring process of the main control timer interrupt process described below. When the front door 102 is closed and the light-blocking piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks light from the light-emitting part of the open/close sensor on the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a low-level signal) to the main control unit 300 indicating that it is in a closed state.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is opened and the light-blocking piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light-emitting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating that it is in an open detection state to the main control unit 300.

In other words, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is in a closed state (closed state), the detection state becomes a closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is in an open state (open state), the detection state becomes an open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, but may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, microswitches, Hall elements, etc. Furthermore, it is not limited to devices that always switch between open and closed detection states as the door is opened or closed; it may be capable of switching from an open detection state to a closed detection state even when the door is open, or conversely, capable of switching from an open detection state to a closed detection state even when the door is closed.

The open/close sensor in this example is configured so that, when a specific operation is performed, the detection state changes to a closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in an open state, a light-blocking piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting unit and light-receiving unit of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like to block the light from the light-emitting unit of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, forcibly changing the detection state of the open/close sensor to a closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in an open state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to a closed detection state, and the predetermined operation may be to operate this DIP switch. Furthermore, if the detection means is a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to a closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to it.

Above the symbol display window 113 are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 160, and a speaker 272. Below the symbol display window 113 are provided the medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals and the like into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided in a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 3. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit (main control means) 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery for winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500 described below.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits drive pulses in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data in the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 316 (which has two random number generation circuits built in) that derives a number in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 begins game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers to be used by the basic circuit 302. There are two main methods for generating random numbers in this random number generation circuit 316: counter mode and random number mode. In counter mode, a number that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and this number is derived as a random number. There are two further methods in random number mode. The first method in random number mode uses a random number seed to perform a calculation using a predetermined function (e.g., a modulus function) and derives the result as a random number. The second method reads a number from a random number table in which numbers ranging from 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read number as a random number. The random number generation circuit 316 acquires irregular values by utilizing white noise superimposed on the signals input to the sensor circuit 320 from the various sensors 318. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the value thus obtained as the initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the start position for reading from the random number table.

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, optical sensor for reel 110, optical sensor for reel 111, optical sensor for reel 112, open/close sensor, setting key SW sensor, reset SW 243 sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects that the start lever sensor is at an H level, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. Stop button 137 sensors, stop button 138 sensors, and stop button 139 sensors are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are installed on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors for reel 110, reel 111, and reel 112 are installed in predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each reel 110-112, and go low every time a light-shielding piece attached to the reel frame passes by. When CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation and resets the reel rotational position information to zero.

As described above, the open/close sensor is a sensor that can detect the open/close state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a low-level signal) indicating a closed detection state to the CPU 304. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is open, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating an open detection state to the CPU 304.

The setting key SW sensor and reset 243 SW sensor are installed on each SW and detect the operation of the SW by game parlor staff, etc.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored medal number indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127, and main board indicator 190).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 via this information output circuit 334 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply unit (power supply means) 252 (see Figure 2). If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a sound source IC 418, which is connected to speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel 162 lamps, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to commands from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a sensor circuit 426, which is connected via the input interface to various sensors 428 (cross button 193 sensor, effect button 156 sensor) that can detect pressing of the cross button 193 (cross key (volume button) 193a, OK button 193b) and effect button 156. The CPU 404 monitors the status of the cross button 193 (cross key (volume button) 193a, OK button 193b) and effect button 156 sensor at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 also has a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and other data stored in the ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

The second sub-control unit 500 also has a sensor circuit 532, which is connected to a shutter sensor 538 via an input interface, capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 at each interrupt time.

<Pattern arrangement>
4(a) will be used to explain the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112. Note that this figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar view.

Each reel 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of symbols (21 symbols numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of the types shown on the right side of the diagram (eight types in this embodiment). The numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of the diagram indicate the position of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the "replay" symbol is placed in the number 1 symbol on the left reel 110, the "bell" symbol is placed in the number 0 symbol on the center reel 111, and the "watermelon" symbol is placed in the number 2 symbol on the right reel 112.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 4(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the Big Bonus (BB1, BB2) and Regular Bonus (RB) are roles that transition to bonus play, and the Replay role allows for replay without inserting new medals. These roles are sometimes distinguished from winning roles and referred to as "activating roles." However, in this embodiment, "winning roles" include the activating roles of the Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, and Replay. Furthermore, in this embodiment, "winning" also includes the display of a symbol combination of an activating role that does not result in a medal payout (does not involve the payout of medals) on an active line, and includes, for example, winning the Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, and Replay.

The winning combinations on the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these and can be any combination.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "BB") is a special role (activating role) that, when won, initiates the special game, Big Bonus Game (BB Game). The corresponding symbol combinations are "White 7-White 7-White 7" for BB1 and "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" for BB2. Furthermore, flags are carried over for BB1 and BB2. That is, if BB1 or BB2 results in an internal win, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). However, even if BB1 or BB2 does not win in that game, the flag indicating the internal win remains set until a win occurs. Therefore, BB1 and BB2 remain internal wins in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, "White 7-White 7-White 7," and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7," are both in a position to win.

A "Regular Bonus (RB)" is a special role (activating role) that, when won, initiates a regular bonus game (RB game). The corresponding symbol combination is "bonus-bonus-bonus." Note that, like the BB described above, a flag is carried over for RB as well. However, (details will be explained later) in a big bonus game (BB game), the start condition is not necessarily an internal win in a regular bonus game (RB game) or a symbol combination appearing on a winning line. Instead, the regular bonus game can be set to start immediately after the start of a big bonus game, and the next regular bonus game can be started immediately after one regular bonus game has ended.

"Small winning combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "cherry," "watermelon," and "bell") are winning combinations that result in a predetermined number of medals being paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "cherry-any-any" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. The corresponding number of medals paid out is as shown in the diagram. In the case of "cherry-any-any," the symbol on the left reel 110 must be "cherry," and the symbols on the center reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

A "replay" is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media), and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay."

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the RT game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is the default RT-type game state (hereinafter also referred to as the "normal game state") that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is turned on, and is a game state that is relatively more disadvantageous to the player than other game states.

In this example, if replay role 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay role 3 (promotion replay 2) is won in this low replay probability state (RT1), the game will transition to the high replay probability state (RT2) described below. Also, if a special role is internally won in this low replay probability state (RT1), the game will transition to the special role internal win state (RT3) described below.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, if a special role is internally won in this high replay probability state (RT2), the game will transition to the special role internal win state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which an internal winning flag corresponding to a special role is set to ON, and a game state in which a player can display a symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag by performing a stop operation at a predetermined timing.

In this example, if a special role is won in this special role internal winning state (RT3), the game will transition to the special game state (RT4), which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all gaming states. In this example, when a specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) is paid out in the special gaming state (RT4), the game transitions to the low re-play probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, when a predetermined combination is internally won, when a predetermined number of wins (e.g., eight wins) occur, or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., six games) have been played.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 5. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this startup signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing in accordance with a control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Details will be described later, but this initial setting process involves processing related to initial settings, setting changes, recovery processing, etc.

In step S102, the medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, the sensor circuit 320 detects whether an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130-132 or a direct medal insertion operation through the medal insertion slot 141 has been performed, and if an insertion operation has been performed, the winning line indicator lamp 120 is illuminated according to the number of medals inserted. In addition, preparations are made to send a medal insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if a replay role was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals.

In addition, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated based on detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever has been operated, the number of medals inserted is confirmed and preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined and a win line determination process is performed to determine the valid win lines.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process is performed to acquire a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316, and in the next step S105, a winning role internal lottery process is performed. In this winning role internal lottery process, a winning role lottery table stored in ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating the result of this internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. If the result of the internal lottery is an internal win for any winning role (including an activated role), the flag for that winning role is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the results of the internal lottery process for winning combinations. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In step S106, preparations are also made to send a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S107, a reel rotation start process is performed, causing all reels 110 to 112 to start rotating.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In this reel stop control processing, stop buttons 137-139 can be accepted, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of reel stop data is referenced to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of reels 110-112 is stopped according to the number of reel pull-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In step S108, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command relating to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, a stop button acceptance 1 command for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command for the second stop operation, and a stop button acceptance 3 command for the third stop operation), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command relating to the reel stop position (more specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop 3 command for the third stop operation).

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed to determine whether a win has been made. In this winning determination process, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that a minor role (Bell) has been won. In addition, in step S109, preparations are made to send a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout processing, if a winning combination that results in a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. This game state control processing involves processing related to the transition of each RT-system game state, and transitions the game state when the start or end conditions are met. It also makes preparations to send a game state command containing information indicating the current RT-system game state.

This completes one game. From then on, the game will progress by returning to step S102 and repeating the above process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main process of the main control unit explained with reference to Fig. 5 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Note that Fig. 6 is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, startup initialization is performed. This startup initialization involves setting (temporarily setting) the stack initial value for the CPU 304 stack pointer (SP), disabling interrupts, initializing the I/O 310, initializing various variables stored in RAM 308, and enabling operation and setting initial values for the WDT 314.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to perform initialization processing; if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open), and if the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204; if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the reset process. Also, in step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the reset process.

The recovery process in step S205 restores the slot machine 100 to the state it was in before the power outage (for example, restoring the recovery data saved to RAM 308 during the power outage process in step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process), and then terminates the initial setting process.

In step S206, the settings change process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S207. Details will be described later, but this settings change process involves processing related to the settings change.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. This initialization processing involves initializing the data in RAM 308 (clearing the RAM), and then terminating the initial setting processing.

<Settings change process>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to Fig. 6 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Note that Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process.

The slot machine 100 can transition to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed (setting change) when the front door (door body) 102 is opened and the setting key SW located inside the main body 101 is turned on (second operating state) and the power is turned on (or when the setting key SW is turned on before a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the main control unit 300 checks the on/off state of the setting key SW)).

In step S301, the data in RAM 308 is initialized (RAM cleared), and in the next step S302, preparations are made to send a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that a setting change is to begin. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the administrator screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set to "settings being changed." As a result, various game processes in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing described below are executed according to the setting being changed.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In step S305, it is determined whether the reset SW243 has been operated. If it has been operated, the current setting value is changed. If it has not been operated, the processing of step S305 is repeated until operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in step S307.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time an operation of the reset SW 243 is detected, the currently set value 1 to 6 is incremented by 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is reset to 1, and this process is repeated to change the set value. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation to change the set value using the reset SW 243 is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S308.

Note that if the start lever 135 is operated without pressing the reset SW 243, or if the setting value cycles through one cycle (for example, setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → ... → setting 5) by repeatedly pressing the reset SW 243 and then the start lever 135 is operated, the setting will be the same as the previous setting.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in RAM 308 as a new setting value (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is no longer displayed.

In this example, the setting value is confirmed when operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, but it is also possible to add a process for determining whether the front door 102 is open, and to confirm the setting value only when the front door 102 is open. In this case, if the front door 102 is closed, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the administrator screen may continue to be displayed.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the processing of step S310 is repeated. If it is OFF, the processing proceeds to step S311 to end the setting change. In step S311, preparations are made to send a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the setting change is to be ended. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to end the display of the administrator screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing involves temporarily saving the values of each register of CPU 304 to a stack area, among other things. In step S402, WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT 314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality).

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update processing, detection signals from the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored, and the detection signals are stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processing according to the interrupt status is performed. In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S406, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 334 to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Details will be described later, but this device monitoring processing includes setting value confirmation processing, door open monitoring processing, and payment processing.

In step S409, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S411; if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. This timer interrupt end process involves processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 back into their original registers, and then returning to the main processing of the main control unit. Meanwhile, in step S411, specific variables and stack pointers used to return to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the main processing of the main control unit is returned to.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process explained with reference to Fig. 8 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Note that Fig. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, the setting value confirmation process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S502. This setting value confirmation process involves processing related to setting confirmation.

When the front door (door body) 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened, the power is turned on, and the setting key SW provided inside the main body 101 is turned on (second operating state), the slot machine 100 can transition to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Here, "checking the setting" refers to checking the setting value of the gaming machine. In this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the setting value can be checked by displaying the initially set value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of settings 1 to 6) on the payout number display 127.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting key SW is turned off (first operating state) (or the setting key SW is turned off and then removed) and the front door 102 is closed, the state in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) ends and the system transitions to a playable state (normal game state) in which gameplay can proceed.

In step S502, door open monitoring processing is performed. In the door open monitoring processing (determination means), the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating a closed state, it stores closed detection information in RAM 308 indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as closed (closed state), and prepares to send a door closed detection command indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as closed to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door closed detection command from the main control unit 300, it stores the closed detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as closed (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

Meanwhile, during the door open monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the status of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating an open detection state, it stores open detection information in RAM 308 indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as open (open state), and prepares to send a door open detection command indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as open to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, it stores the open detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as open (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) in RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and issues a door open notification.

The door open notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "Door is open"). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, the text "Door is open" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In step S503, the settlement process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the valid period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when play can begin until operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), and when it detects a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated, it performs a process to settle the medals that have been electronically stored, and makes preparations to send a settlement command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the process to settle the medals has been performed.

In step S504, other device monitoring processing is performed, and then the device monitoring processing is terminated. Other device monitoring processing includes error notification start processing, error notification end processing, etc.

Errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 according to this embodiment include a door open error, a hopper empty error, a medal insertion error 1 (a medal selector error), a medal insertion error 2-4, a medal payout error 1-3, an overflow error, a RAM malfunction, and a winning error.

A door open error is an error that notifies you that the door of the gaming machine has been opened. It occurs when the front door 102 is opened (an error is detected) and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed (an error is not detected).

As described above, during the door open monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the status of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating a closed detection state, it sends a door closed detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closed detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in chronological order in RAM 408 as history information. On the other hand, when it detects a signal indicating an open detection state, it sends a door open detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) in chronological order in RAM 408 as history information and issues a door open notification.

A hopper empty error is a dispensing error related to the dispensing of medals. It occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 falls below a specified number (an error is detected), and can be resolved by refilling the hopper with more medals than the specified number (an error is not detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when an inserted medal becomes stuck in the medal selector, etc. (error detection state occurs), and is resolved (error non-detection state occurs) when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (reset SW243 in this example) is operated. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds the specified number (error detection state occurs), and is resolved (error non-detection state occurs) by changing the setting value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 turns on other than during the medal insertion process (an error detection state occurs), and medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medal does not pass through insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 correctly (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved (an error non-detection state occurs) when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time while the medal payout device is in operation (an error detection state occurs), medal payout error 2 occurs when medals become trapped while the medal payout device is in operation (an error detection state occurs), and medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 turns on except during a medal payout process (an error detection state occurs).In either case, the error is resolved (an error non-detection state occurs) when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated.

An overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on (an error is detected), and is resolved (an error is not detected) when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected during RAM check (an error is detected), and is resolved (an error is not detected) when the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated. A winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by internal lottery is won after reels 110-112 have stopped (an error is detected), and is resolved (an error is not detected) when the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Examples of errors that can occur in pachinko machines include a lower tray full error, a payout device error, an overpayout error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic anomaly error, a magnetic field anomaly error, a frame open error, a RAM clear error, and an impact sensor error. These errors are also resolved by removing the cause of the error and then operating the error reset switch.

When the main control unit 300 detects any error, it sets the interrupt status to an error detection state, displays an error code corresponding to the error on the dispensed coin count display 127, and prepares to send an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start an error notification.

For example, if a selector error occurs, the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the text "Selector error occurred!!" and the text "Please call a gaming store attendant." The light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an error sound (such as "An error has occurred. Please call a gaming store attendant."). The manner in which the error is not notified is not particularly limited, and the error may be notified by, for example, the movement of the movable means (reels 110-112).

In addition, when the error notification termination condition is met (for example, when an operation to clear the error (in this example, an operation to turn on the reset SW243) is received), the main control unit 300 erases the error detection status stored in the interrupt status and then executes error notification termination processing. In this error notification termination processing, the main control unit 300 erases the error code displayed on the dispensed number display 127 and prepares to send an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to terminate the error notification that is currently being executed.

<Power restoration with button pressed>
Next, power restoration when the button is pressed will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 10(a) shows the control state of each button when the power is turned on, Figure 10(b) shows the control state of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), and Figure 10(c) shows the control state of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change.

In slot machine 100, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while a first operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the first operating means is being operated, thereby enabling operation of the first operating means, control over operation of the first operating means is not executed. However, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while a second operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the second operating means is being operated, thereby enabling operation of the second operating means, control over operation of the second operating means is executed.

Hereinafter, "not executing control over operation of the first operating means" may be referred to as "invalid," and the "first operating means" may be referred to as the "invalid button." Furthermore, "executing control over operation of the second operating means" may be referred to as "valid," and the "second operating means" may be referred to as the "valid button."

<Power recovery while button is pressed/MAX BET button>
The MAX BET button 132 described using Figure 1 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) that, as shown in Figure 10 (a), becomes valid (control is executed for the operation) when an operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is not operated, and when the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is being operated and operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 executes control over operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to insert three medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

On the other hand, if the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the MAX bet button 132 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on (error detection state) shown in Figure 10(b) and does not execute control over that operation. Also, if the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to setting change in progress (when power is turned on with a setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the MAX bet button 132 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on with a setting change shown in Figure 10(c) and does not execute control over that operation.

<Power recovery when button is pressed/1 bet button>
The one-coin bet button 130 described using Figure 1 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) that, as shown in Figure 10(a), enables an operation (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) (in this example, the process of inserting one electronically stored medal (credit)).

On the other hand, when the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the 1 bet button 130 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on (error detection state) shown in Figure 10(b) and does not execute control over the operation. Also, when the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to setting change in progress (when power is turned on with a setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the 1 bet button 130 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on with a setting change shown in Figure 10(c) and does not execute control over the operation.

<Power recovery while button is pressed/2-coin bet button>
In this example, of the three types of bet buttons 130 to 132, the MAX bet button 132 and the 1-coin bet button 130 are set as valid buttons (second operating means), but the 2-coin bet button 131 may also be added as a valid button (second operating means).

In this case, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the two-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the two-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the two-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 131 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the interrupt status is neither an error detected state nor a setting being changed), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the two-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to insert two electronically stored medals (credits)).

On the other hand, if the detection signal from the bet button 131 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, or if the detection signal from the bet button 131 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to a setting change in progress (when the power is turned on with a setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the two-coin bet button 131 is invalid and does not execute control over that operation.

Furthermore, at least one of the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, and the 2 BET button 131 may be an invalid button (first operating means).

<Power recovery/settlement button when pressed>
The settlement button 134 described using Figure 1 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) that makes the operation valid (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 10 (a), and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is not operated, and when the power is restored while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to settle (pay out) the electronically stored medals (credits)).

On the other hand, when the detection signal from the settlement button 134 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the settlement button 134 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on (error detection state) shown in Figure 10(b) and does not execute control over that operation. Also, when the detection signal from the settlement button 134 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to setting change in progress (when power is turned on with setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the settlement button 134 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on with setting change shown in Figure 10(c) and does not execute control over that operation.

<Power recovery when button is pressed/start lever>
The start lever 135 described using Figure 1 is one of the disable buttons (first operating means) that disables the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if it is operated when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figures 10(a) to 10(c), and in this example, it is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the start lever 135 (first operating means) is not being operated, and the power is restored while the start lever 135 (first operating means) is being operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the main control unit 300 does not execute control over operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112).

<Power recovery/stop button when pressed>
The stop buttons 137 to 139 described using Figure 1 are one of the valid/invalid buttons (first operating means or second operating means) that, depending on the situation, can become valid buttons (second operating means) that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) when operated when power is restored after a power outage, or invalid buttons (first operating means) that disable the operation (control is not executed for the operation) when operated when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figures 10(a) to 10(b), and in this example, are controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, multiple stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 are operated to stop multiple reels 110-112 in a first stop mode, and a power outage occurs in which power to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the last stop button (stop operation means) of the multiple stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 is being operated. Even if the power is restored while the last stop button (stop operation means) is still being operated, the presentation means does not execute a winning presentation corresponding to the first stop mode. However, when the last stop button (stop operation means) is no longer being operated, the stop buttons 137-139 function as active buttons (second operation means), and the presentation means executes a winning presentation corresponding to the first stop mode.

On the other hand, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while at least one of the multiple reels 110-112 is spinning and none of the multiple stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 are operated, and the power is restored while the stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 are operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the stop operation means is enabled, the stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 function as invalid buttons (first operation means) and do not execute control over operation of the stop buttons 137-139 (first operation means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 110-112 corresponding to the operated stop button 137-139).

In this example, control over the operation of the stop operation means can be changed depending on the operation status of the stop operation means. Reel stop control, which could cause a player to suffer a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation, is disabled when power is restored, preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation. On the other hand, by enabling the hold control for the winning effect when power is restored and not executing the winning effect while the operation of the last operated stop operation means is continuing, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being missed and increase player satisfaction.

<Power recovery/reset button when pressed>
The reset button (reset SW) 243 described using Figure 2 is one of the enable/disable buttons (first or second operating means) that, depending on the situation, can become an enable button (second operating means) that enables the operation (control is executed for the operation) when operated when power is restored after a power outage, or an disable button (first operating means) that disables the operation (control is not executed for the operation) when operated when power is restored after a power outage, and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the reset button 243 is enabled (in this example, a state in which operation is restored from power outage due to power-on with a setting change and the detection signal from the reset SW 243 sensor is turned on), the reset button 243 functions as an inactive button (first operating means), and the main control unit 300 does not execute control over operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to a setting value change operation or an error resolution operation).

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not operated, and then the power is restored while the reset button 243 is operated, enabling operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, the power is restored from the power outage in an error detection state and the detection signal from the reset SW 243 sensor is turned on), the reset button 243 functions as an enable button (second operating means), and the main control unit 300 executes control over operation of the reset button 243 (second operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation).

In this example, the control for the reset button operation can be changed depending on the status of that operation. For example, when changing a setting value, if the setting value is changed when power is restored, there is a risk that the setting value that was set up until then will become unknown, so control based on the setting value change operation is not performed. On the other hand, when it comes to clearing an error, since an error cannot be cleared unless the cause of the error has been resolved, if the cause of the error has been resolved when power is restored, control based on the error resolution operation is performed, thereby increasing convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

<Power recovery/effect button when button is pressed>
The effect button 156 described using Figure 1 is one of the invalid buttons (first operating means) that disables the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if it is operated when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figures 10(a) to 10(c), and in this example, is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the effect button 156 (first operating means) is not being operated, and the power is restored while the effect button 156 (first operating means) is being operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the effect button 156 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the effect button 156 sensor of the first sub-controller 400 is on), the first sub-controller 400 does not execute control over the operation of the effect button 156 (first operating means) (in this example, processing to perform effects in response to player operation for various effects).

<Power recovery when a button is pressed/Volume button>
The volume button (directional key) 193a described using Figure 1 is one of the invalid buttons (first operating means) that disables the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if it is operated when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figures 10(a) to 10(c), and in this example, is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the volume button 193a (first operating means) is not being operated, and the power is restored while the volume button 193a (first operating means) is being operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the volume button 193a (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the cross button 193 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400 is on), the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute control over operation of the volume button 193a (first operating means) (in this example, a process to adjust the volume).

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when powering on>
Next, simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a).

Figure 11(a) shows an example of control when valid buttons (second operating means) are simultaneously operated when the power is turned on.

As described above, the slot machine 100 has at least the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 as valid buttons (second operating means).

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), the power outage is restored and operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signals from the BET button 132 sensor and BET button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 are on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detected state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 prioritizes control of operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, the process of inserting three electronically stored medals (credits)) and does not execute control of the 1 BET button 130 (MAX BET button priority).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), and the power is restored and the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signals from the bet button 132 sensor and the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 are on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detected state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 will prioritize control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, the process of inserting three electronically stored medals (credits)) and will not execute control over the settlement button 134 (MAX BET button priority).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), and the power is restored and the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signals from the bet button 130 sensor and the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 are on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detected state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 will prioritize control over the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) (in this example, the process of inserting one electronically stored medal (credit)) and will not execute control over the settlement button 134 (1-coin bet button priority).

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when power is turned on (error detection state)>
Next, simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when the power is turned on (error detection state) will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b).

Figure 11(b) shows an example of control when valid buttons (second operating means) are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on (error detection state).

As described above, the slot machine 100 has at least the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 as valid buttons (second operating means), and at least the RESET button (RESET SW) 243 as invalid buttons (first operating means).

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously). However, if the interrupt status is in an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of both the MAX BET button 132 and the 1 BET button 130 is invalid and does not execute control over those operations.

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status is in an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of both the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is invalid and does not execute control over those operations.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the RESET button 243 (first operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the RESET button 243 (first operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status indicates an error has been detected, priority is given to control over operation of the RESET button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation), and control over the MAX BET button 132 is not executed (RESET button priority).

Also, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status is in an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that both the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are invalid, and does not execute control over those operations.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status is in an error detection state, priority is given to control over operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation), and control over the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is not executed (reset button priority).

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status indicates an error has been detected, priority is given to control over the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation), and control over the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is not executed (reset button priority).

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means>
Next, the operation of each button in the operating state of a certain operating means will be described with reference to FIG.

<Operation of each button when the MAX BET button is in operation>
FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the MAX BET button 132 is operated.

In this example, when the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is operated (in this example, the detection signal from the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), if operation of any of the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), settlement button 134 (second operating means), or stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be invalid and no control is performed for that operation.

On the other hand, when the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is in an operating state (in this example, the detection signal from the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an ON state), if operation of any of the start lever 135 (first operating means), reset button 243 (first operating means), effect button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is in an ON state), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the 1 coin bet button is in operation>
FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the 1-coin bet button 130 is operated.

In this example, when the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operating means) (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on) is detected, if the operation of either the settlement button 134 (second operating means) or the stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be invalid and no control is performed for that operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is in progress (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), if operation of any of the MAX bet button 132 (second operating means), start lever 135 (first operating means), reset button 243 (first operating means), effect button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the checkout button is in operation>
FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In this example, when the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is operated (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), if operation of any of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means), 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), start lever 135 (first operating means), or stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be invalid and no control is performed for that operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) (in this example, the detection signal of the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on) is detected, if operation of any of the reset button 243 (first operating means), effect button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the start lever is in operation>
FIG. 12D is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the start lever 135 is operated.

In this example, when operation of one of the stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is turned on) while the start lever 135 (first operating means) is in an operating state (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an on state), the operation is determined to be invalid, and no control is performed for that operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected (in this example, the detection signal of the start lever 135 of the main control unit 300 is in the ON state), and operation of any of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means), 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), settlement button 134 (second operating means), reset button 243 (first operating means), effect button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is in the ON state), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the stop button is in operation state>
FIG. 12(e) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 when they are operated.

In this example, when operation of either the settlement button 134 (second operating means) or the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is turned on) while the stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) are in an operating state (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, or stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an on state), the operation is determined to be invalid, and no control is performed for that operation.

On the other hand, when operation of any of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means), 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), RESET button 243 (first operating means), EFFECT button 156 (first operating means), or VOLUME button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is ON) while the stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) are being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the corresponding sensor is ON), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the reset button, effect button, and volume button are in operation>
FIG. 12(f) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the reset button 243, the effect button 156, and the volume button 193a are operated.

In this example, when the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means), effect button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, the detection signal of the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300, the effect button 156 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400, or the cross button 193 sensor is on), and operation of any of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means), 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), start lever 135 (first operating means), stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means), effect button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Example of power restoration when button is pressed>
Next, a specific example of power restoration when the button is pressed will be described using Figures 13 to 15, but prior to this description, the function of the main board display 190 described using Figure 2 will be described.

The main board display 190 shown in Figures 13 to 15 is a display consisting of multiple LEDs (eight in this example), and can notify predetermined game information by lighting one, several, or all of the eight LEDs a-h.

Note that the main board display 190 is not limited to LEDs, and other display means such as a seven-segment display or LCD display device may also be used. It goes without saying that the number of types of game information that can be reported is not limited to eight.

In this example, LEDa on the main board display 190 is lit when the MAX BET button 132 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDb is lit when the 1 BET button 130 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the 1 BET button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDc is lit when the settlement button 134 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), and LEDd is lit when the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

LEDe is lit when the stop button 137 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the stop button 137 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDf is lit when the stop button 138 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the stop button 138 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDg is lit when the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), and LEDh is lit when the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

In this example, if an operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED can be made to light up even for operating means that do not perform control based on that operation. This makes it possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not being performed because the control is disabled, or because the operating means has malfunctioned.

Note that the notification method used by each LEDa-h is not limited to lighting the LED, and each status may be notified by flashing or turning off the LED. Furthermore, the main board display 190 may be capable of notifying information related to the game, and may also notify the operation status of operation means other than those exemplified, various errors, and information other than the operation information exemplified (for example, game status, winning combinations, winning combinations).

In addition, in this example, the main control board (main control unit 300) is provided with a main board indicator 190, but for example, the sub-control board may be provided with a board (LED) that indicates the status of the buttons controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500.

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/MAX BET button>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13(a), the restoration of power when the MAX BET button 132 is pressed will be described.

Figure 13(a) is a diagram showing the timeline of what happens from when a power outage occurs until power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 is pressed.

In Figure 13(a), the state indicated by the symbol T1 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed), there are 10 credits, and the bet status is 0.

In this state, as shown in Figure 13 (a-1), since there are 10 credits, the segment corresponding to the number 10 is lit in the reserved coin count indicator 125, and since the MAX BET button 132, 2 BET button 131, and 1 BET button 130 are all not operated (not pressed), and the bet status is 0 coins, the game medal insertion lamp 129 is turned off. Also, since the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), LEDa on the main board indicator 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T2, is when the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed), there are 10 credits, the bet status is 0, and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252. This stops the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400 and 500, and the displays on the number of medals stored indicator 125, medal insertion lamp 129, main board indicator 190, etc. are hidden.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T3, is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, there are 10 credits, the bet status is 0, and the MAX BET button 132 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the MAX BET button 132 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400 and 500, and each device is stopped, operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is not enabled, and the displays of the reserved medal count indicator 125, medal insertion lamp 129, main board indicator 190, etc. are not displayed, as shown in Figure 13 (a-2).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T4, is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON when there are 10 credits, the bet status is 0, and the MAX BET button 132 has been operated (pressed).

In this state, the power is restored from a power outage while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is being operated (pressed), and operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), so the main control unit 300 executes control over operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to insert three medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

In this state, by executing control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to insert three electronically stored medals (credits)), the credits are reduced from 10 to 7, as shown in Figure 13 (a-3), so the segment corresponding to the number 7 is lit in the stored medal count indicator 125, and because the MAX BET button 132 was operated (pressed) and the bet status became three medals, the LED corresponding to a bet of three medals is lit in the gaming medal insertion lamp 129. Also, because the MAX BET button 132 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDa in the main board indicator 190 is lit.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T5, is when the power supply device 252 is ON, there are 7 credits, and the bet status is 3, and the pressing of the MAX BET button 132 is released, causing the MAX BET button 132 to change to an unpressed (non-pressed) state.

In this state, the MAX BET button 132 is not being operated (not pressed), so although not shown in the figure, LEDa on the main board display 190 is turned off and the gaming medal insertion lamp 129 remains lit.

<Example of power restoration when button is pressed/start lever>
Next, power restoration when the start lever 135 is pressed down will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 13(b) is a timeline showing the process from when a power outage occurs until power is restored while the start lever 135 is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 13(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the bet status is 3 coins, the start lever 135 is not operated (not pressed), and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In this state, as shown in Figure 13 (b-1), the bet status is 3 coins, and the start lever 135 is not being operated (not pressed), so all reels 110-112 are stopped. Also, because the start lever 135 is not being operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), LEDd on the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by symbol T2, is when the bet status is 3 coins, the start lever 135 is not being operated (not pressed), the reels 110-112 are stopped, and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the start lever 135 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252. This stops the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, and so on, and the displays on the main board display 190 and other units are hidden.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T3, is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, the bet status is three coins, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the start lever 135 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the start lever 135 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is not enabled, and the displays on the main board display 190, etc. are not displayed, as shown in Figure 13 (b-2).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T4, is when the bet status is three coins, the start lever 135 is operated (pressed), the reels 110-112 are stopped, and the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON.

In this state, the start lever 135 (first operating means) is operated (pressed) and power is restored, enabling operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), but the main control unit 300 does not execute control over operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, the reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112).

In this state, control over operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, the reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112) is not executed, and as a result, the reels 110-112 do not rotate and remain stopped, as shown in Figure 13 (b-3). Note that although control over operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, the reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112) is not executed, the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), so LED d on the main board display 190 is lit.

In this example, if an operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED can be made to light up even for operating means that do not perform control based on that operation. This makes it possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not being performed because the control is disabled, or because the operating means has malfunctioned.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T5, is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the bet status is three coins, and the reels 110-112 are stopped, and the start lever 135 is released from depression, changing to a state where the start lever 135 is not being operated (not depressed).

In this state, the start lever 135 is not operated (not pressed), and therefore, although not shown, the LED a of the main board display 190 is turned off.
The next state indicated by the symbol T6 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the bet status is three coins, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the start lever 135 is operated (depressed).

In this state, the start lever 135 is operated (pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), so the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112), and spins all reels 110-112, as shown in Figure 13 (b-4). Also, because the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LED d on the main board display 190 is illuminated.

<Example of power restoration when a button is pressed/Stop button functioning as a disable button>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, the restoration of power when the stop buttons 137 to 139 functioning as disable buttons are pressed will be described.

Figure 14(a) is a diagram showing the timeline of the events that occur from when a power outage occurs while the reel 112 is spinning until power is restored when the stop button 139 is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 14(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), reels 110-111 are stopped, and reel 112 is spinning.

In this state, as shown in Figure 14 (a-1), reels 110-111 are stopped, and the stop button 139 corresponding to reel 112 is not operated (not pressed), so only reel 112 is spinning. Also, because stop buttons 137-139 are not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signals from the stop button 137-139 sensors of the main control unit 300 are off), LEDg on the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by symbol T2, is when the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110-111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning, and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252. This stops the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., causing the reel 112 to stop spinning and the display on the main board display 190, etc. to go dark.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T3, is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, the reels 110-112 are stopped, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) is not enabled, and the displays on the main board display 190, etc. are not displayed, as shown in Figure 14 (a-2).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T4, is when the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), the reels 110-112 are stopped, and the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON.

In this state, the power is restored from a power outage while the stop button 139 (first operating means) is being operated (pressed), and the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 137-139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detected state nor a setting change in progress), but the main control unit 300 does not execute control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139).

In this state, control over operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139) is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 14(a-3), the reel 112 corresponding to the stop button 139 is not stopped and continues to spin. Note that although control over operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139) is not executed, the LEDg of the main board indicator 190 is lit because the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

In this example, if an operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED can be made to light up even for operating means that do not perform control based on that operation. This makes it possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not being performed because the control is disabled, or because the operating means has malfunctioned.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T5, is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, reels 110-111 are stopped, and reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is released from being pressed, changing to a state in which the stop button 139 is not being pressed (not pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), and therefore, although not shown in the figure, the LEDg on the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T6, is when the power supply device 252 is ON, reels 110-111 are stopped, reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), so the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139), and stops the reel 112 as shown in Figure 14 (a-4). Also, because the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg on the main board indicator 190 is lit.

<Example of power restoration when a button is pressed/Stop button functioning as an active button>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, power restoration when the stop buttons 137 to 139 functioning as valid buttons are pressed will be described.

Figure 14(b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the events that occur from when a power outage occurs while the reels 110-112 are stopped in the first stop mode until power is restored when the stop button 139 is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 14(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), reels 110-111 are stopped, and reel 112 is spinning.

In this state, as shown in Figure 14 (b-1), reels 110-111 are stopped, and the stop button 139 corresponding to reel 112 is not operated (not pressed), so only reel 112 is spinning. Also, because stop buttons 137-139 are not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signals from the stop button 137-139 sensors of the main control unit 300 are off), LEDg on the main board display 190 is turned off.

In addition, in this state, part of the symbol combination corresponding to the small win (bell) (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") is aligned on the pay line of reels 110 and 111, creating a reach state for the small win (bell).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T2, is when the power supply device 252 is ON, reels 110-111 are stopped, reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), so the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139), and stops the reel 112 as shown in Figure 14 (b-2). Also, because the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg on the main board indicator 190 is lit.

Also, in this state, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win (bell) (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") is aligned on the pay line of reels 110 to 112, and the small win (bell) has been won, but the winning effect corresponding to the small win (bell) has not been executed.

The next state indicated by symbol T3 is when the power supply device 252 changes from ON to OFF while the reels 110-112 are stopped, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), and the winning effect corresponding to the small win (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, when the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. As a result, although not shown in the figure, the displays on the main board display 190 and other devices are hidden.

The next state indicated by symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON while the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), the reels 110-112 are stopped, and the winning effect corresponding to the minor winning combination (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to the minor win (bell) is aligned on the pay line of reels 110-112, and the stop button 139 (first operating means) is operated (pressed) when power is restored from the power outage, but the winning effect corresponding to the minor win (bell) is not executed and is put on hold. Although the winning effect corresponding to the minor win (bell) is not executed, the LEDg on the main board display 190 is lit because the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal from the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

The next state indicated by symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the reels 110-112 are stopped, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), and the winning effect corresponding to the small win (bell) is not being executed. Then, the stop button 139 is released and the stop button 139 is no longer operated (not pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 has been released, and the winning effect corresponding to the small win (bell) has begun (in this example, the backlights of the reels 110-112 are turned on and a winning sound is output from the speakers 272, 277). Also, because the stop button 139 is not being operated (not pressed), the LEDg on the main board display 190 is turned off.

As explained using Figures 14(a) and (b), this example allows the control of the stop operation means to be changed depending on the operation status of that operation. Reel stop control, which may cause a player to suffer a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation, is disabled when power is restored, preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation. On the other hand, by enabling the hold control for the winning effect when power is restored and not executing the winning effect while the operation of the last operated stop operation means is continuing, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being missed and increase player satisfaction.

<Example of power restoration when the button is pressed/Reset button when an error is detected>
Next, power restoration when the reset button 243 is pressed in an error detection state will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 15(a) is a timeline showing the process from when a power outage occurs during error detection to when power is restored while the reset button 243 is pressed.

In Figure 15(a), the state indicated by the symbol T1 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, an error is detected, and the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in Figure 15 (a-1), an error (in this example, a selector error) has occurred, and therefore the LCD display device 157 displays an error notification (in this example, a display including the text "Selector error") to notify of the error (in this example, a selector error). Also, because the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), the LEDh on the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T2, is a state in which an error is detected, the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed), and the power supply of the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252. This stops the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., and the displays on the LCD display unit 157, main board display 190, etc. are hidden.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T3, is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, an error is detected, and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, operation of the reset button 243 is not enabled, and the displays on the LCD display device 157, main board display 190, etc. are not displayed, as shown in Figure 15 (a-2).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T4, is a state in which the reset button 243 is operated (pressed) and the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON in an error detection state.

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed) and power is restored, enabling operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, the power is restored from power outage in an error detection state, and the detection signal from the reset SW 243 sensor is turned on), so the reset button 243 functions as an enabled button (second operating means), and the main control unit 300 executes control over operation of the reset button 243 (second operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation).

In this state, by executing control (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation) for the operation of the reset button 243 (second operating means), the selector error is resolved, as shown in Figure 15 (a-3), and an error notification (in this example, a display including the text "Door is open") is executed on the LCD display device 157 to notify of another error (in this example, a door open error). Also, because the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDh on the main board display 190 is lit.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T5, is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, no error is detected, the reset button 243 is released from its pressed state, and the reset button 243 is no longer being pressed (depressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), and therefore, although not shown in the figure, LEDh on the main board display 190 is turned off.

<Example of power restoration when a button is pressed/Reset button when settings can be changed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 15B, power restoration when the reset button 243 is pressed in the setting changeable state will be described.

Figure 15(b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the power-on process that involves transitioning to a setting changeable state when the reset button 243 is pressed.

In Figure 15(b), the state indicated by the symbol T1 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the settings can be changed, and the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in Figure 15 (b-1), since the setting is being confirmed, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (2 in this example) indicating the current setting value. Also, since the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), LEDh on the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T2, is a setting confirmation state in which the setting key SW changes from ON to OFF while the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, since the setting key SW is turned OFF, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting confirmation state is terminated, as shown in Figure 15 (b-2).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T3, is when the setting key SW is OFF and the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252. This stops the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., and the display on the setting value display unit 101a, main board display 190, etc. is hidden.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T4, is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, the setting key SW is OFF, the setting key SW changes from OFF to ON, and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed), but because power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, operation of the reset button 243 is not enabled, and the display of the setting value display device 101a, main board display 190, etc. is not displayed, as shown in Figure 15 (b-3).

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T5, is when the setting key SW is ON and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed), causing the power supply device 252 to change from OFF to ON.

In this state, the setting key SW is in the ON state when power is restored from a power outage, making it possible to change the settings, and the reset button 243 is operated when power is restored from a power outage, making operation of the reset button 243 valid (in this example, the detection signal from the reset SW sensor is ON and the interrupt status does not correspond to an error detection state). However, the reset button 243 functions as an invalid button (first operating means), and the main control unit 300 does not execute control (in this example, processing corresponding to the setting value change operation) in response to operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means).

In this state, control (in this example, processing corresponding to the setting value change operation) for the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) is not executed, so the setting value is not changed (in this example, changing from setting 2 to setting 3), and the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current setting value (in this example, 2), as shown in Figure 15 (b-4). Also, because the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDh on the main board display 190 is lit.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T6, is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the settings can be changed, and the reset button 243 is released from the pressed state, changing to a state in which the reset button 243 is not being pressed (not pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), and therefore, although not shown in the figure, LEDh on the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by reference symbol T7, is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the settings can be changed, and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed) when the power is not on, and control is performed in response to the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, processing corresponding to a setting change operation). After the setting value is changed (in this example, from setting 2 to setting 3), a number indicating the current setting value (in this example, 3) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, as shown in Figure 15 (b-5).

As explained above, the main board display 190 is a display in which an LED lights up when each button is operated. Even if operation is disabled, the LED on this main board display 190 will light up if a button is operated.

In this example, if an operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED on the main board indicator 190 can be made to light up even if the operating means does not perform control based on that operation. This makes it possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not being performed because the control is disabled, or because the operating means has malfunctioned.

<Power restoration while button is pressed (variant)>
Next, power restoration when the button is pressed (variant example) will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Note that to avoid redundant explanation, only the content different from the content described with reference to Fig. 10 will be described here.

<Power restoration with button pressed (variant) / When power is turned on>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the control state of each button (modification) when the power is turned on, and corresponds to FIG. 10A.

In the example described using Figure 10(a), the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, and settlement button 134 are valid buttons (second operating means) that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage, but they may also be invalid buttons (first operating means) that disable the operation (control is not executed for the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In the example described using FIG. 10(a), the effect button 156 and the volume button 193a are invalid buttons (first operating means) that disable the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage, but they may also be valid buttons (second operating means) that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In this example, the operation means controlled by the main control unit 300 and having a relatively high level of importance (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, the settlement button 134, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137-139) are not controlled based on their operation when power is restored, thereby preventing serious operational errors.

On the other hand, for operation means that are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and are relatively less important (e.g., the performance button 156, the volume button 193b), convenience can be improved by controlling them based on the operation when power is restored.

In addition, by standardizing (commonizing) the control content for each main control board (main control unit 300) and sub-control board (first sub-control unit 400), control does not become complicated and the control burden can be reduced.

<Power restoration while button is pressed (variant) / When power is turned on (error detected)>
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the control state (modification) of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), and corresponds to FIG. 10B.

In the example described using Figure 10(b), the reset button 243 functions as an enabled button (second operating means) when power is restored from an error detection state and the detection signal from the reset SW sensor is turned on. However, it may also function as an disabled button (first operating means) and not execute control over the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation).

<Power recovery while button is pressed (variant) / Power-on with setting change>
FIG. 16C is a diagram showing the control state of each button (modification) when the power is turned on with a setting change, and corresponds to FIG. 10C.

In the example described using Figure 10(c), the reset button 243 functions as a disable button (first operating means) when power is turned on with a setting change, and the power is restored from a power outage, causing the detection signal from the reset SW sensor to turn on. However, it may also function as an enable button (second operating means) and execute control over the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, processing corresponding to the setting value change operation).

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)>
Next, the operation of each button in the operating state of a certain operating means (variation) will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Note that in order to avoid redundant explanation, only the content different from the content described with reference to Fig. 12 will be described here.

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)/MAX BET button>
FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the MAX BET button 132 is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 12(a).

In the example described using Figure 12(a), when operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operation means) is detected while the MAX bet button 132 (second operation means) is in an operation state (the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an on state), the operation is determined to be invalid and no control is performed for the operation. However, the operation may also be determined to be valid and control is performed for the operation.

In the example described using Figure 12(a), when operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is in an operating state (the detection signal from the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an ON state), the operation is determined to be valid and control is executed for that operation; however, the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for that operation may not be executed.

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)/1 coin bet button>
FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the 1-coin bet button 130 is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 12(b).

In the example described using Figure 12(b), if operation of the settlement button 134 (second operation means) is detected while the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operation means) is in an operation state (the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an on state), the operation is determined to be invalid and no control is performed for the operation. However, the operation may also be determined to be valid and control for the operation is performed.

In the example described using Figure 12(b), if operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is in an operating state (the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an on state), the operation is determined to be valid and control is executed for that operation; however, the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for that operation may not be executed.

<Operation of each button in the operating state of a certain operating means (variant example)/start lever>
FIG. 17(d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the start lever is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 12(d).

In the example described using Figure 12 (d), when operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) or the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) is detected while the start lever 135 (second operating means) is in an operating state (the detection signal from the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an ON state), the operation is determined to be valid and control is executed for that operation; however, the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for that operation may not be executed.

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)/Stop button>
FIG. 17(e) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the stop button is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 12(e).

In the example described using Figure 12(e), when operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operation means) or the 1 BET button 130 (second operation means) is detected while the stop buttons 137-139 (second operation means) are in an operation state (the detection signal from the stop button 137-139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is in an ON state), the operation is determined to be valid and control is executed for the operation; however, the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed.

<Gaming machine (variant)>
Next, the basic configuration of a slot machine 1100 according to a modified example and the basic configuration of a lending machine 1700 will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1100 according to a modified example and the lending machine 1700 as seen from the front side (player side).

In order to avoid redundant explanation, only the configuration that differs from the slot machine 100 described using Figure 1 will be explained here.

The game medal count display device 1170 is a five-digit seven-segment (SEG) display that displays the game medal count recorded by the medal count control unit 1350 shown in Figure 19.

The count button 1171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 1350 shown in Figure 19 to the lending machine 1700.

The lending machine 1700 shown in Figure 18 is sometimes referred to as a card unit and corresponds to an example of the gaming media management device of the present invention. This lending machine 1700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 1100.

The lending machine 1700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" referred to here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a gaming storage medium issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a member card, which is a gaming storage medium issued to member players who have registered as members at the gaming center. An IC card is used as the card.

The card stores a value. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "money balance," which is the remaining balance of prepaid money. The lending machine 1700 that accepts the card has the function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of gaming medals (number of credits)."

The "number of gaming medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can also be converted into the "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" can be obtained by debiting the card's "money balance" or "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" also includes the number of medals won by winning. This "number of gaming medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 1350 shown in FIG. 19, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic gaming value). The "number of gaming medals" is decremented by inserting coins using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals in possession" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)" into a count. This "number of medals in possession" is stored in a manner that allows it to be identified by the player's card. In other words, by operating the count button 1171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals in possession" and can be stored on the card. The "number of medals in possession" may also be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals in possession installed in the gaming facility.

The front side of the lending machine 1700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 1701 at the top for inserting bills and a card insertion slot 1702 at the bottom for inserting cards. A membership card or visitor card inserted into this card insertion slot 1702 is accepted by a card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. Bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 1701 are identified for authenticity and type, and the face value of the bill is stored as the "money balance" on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 1702.

An information display 1703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 1701. This information display 1703 is a display that provides operation guidance for the lending machine 1700 and the status of the slot machine 1100 using text and images. The surface may be configured as a touch panel, allowing various operations to be input by touching the various displayed items with a finger. Below the information display 1703, a cash balance display 1705 and a medal count balance display 1706 are arranged in two rows, one above the other. The cash balance display 1705 displays the "cash balance" stored on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702 as an amount. Meanwhile, the medal count balance display 1706 displays the "held medal count" stored on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702 as the number of medals. A lending button 1707 and a card return button 1708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 1700. The loan button 1707 is an operating means for withdrawing the "money balance" stored on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 1702 to obtain the "number of game medals." Specifically, if the card inserted into the card insertion slot 1702 has a "money balance," the LED lamp built into the loan button 1707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the loan button 1707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is increased according to the amount of money withdrawn.

For example, a predetermined amount of 1,000 yen worth of "game medals" is added. Also, if the card's "money balance" is less than the predetermined amount (for example, less than 1,000 yen), only the "game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate are added. Note that even if the card's "money balance" is less than the predetermined amount, medals may be replenished from the "number of medals held" stored on the card, and the predetermined amount of "game medals" may be added.

The card return button 1708 is operated when the player ends play, and is an operating means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of play onto the card inserted into the card insertion slot 1702 and ejecting it. The "number of medals held" determined at the end of play is the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted to the "number of game medals" from the "number of medals held" stored on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 1702, and then adding the number of game medals counted by the counting operation. The data for "cash balance," "number of medals held," and "number of game medals" explained above are converted in the following order: "cash balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held." In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of gaming medals," and in this example, the slot machine 1100 can use this "number of gaming medals" to set the number of bets. This makes it possible to provide a new slot machine (controlled gaming machine) that does not use real medals for gaming, without causing confusion to players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines where real medals are loaned out, credits are secured by inserting those real medals, and the number of bets is set using those credits.

Note that while this specification does not refer to the "number of saved medals," this "number of saved medals" is not stored on the card, but rather refers to the number of medals that are deposited at the amusement facility. At the amusement facility, the number of medals that a player has acquired through play may be managed as "points" by the hall management terminal or other management computer for the day, and as "number of saved medals" from the day after the acquisition. If both the "number of saved medals" and the "number of owned medals" are stored, priority is given to deducting from the "number of owned medals." Furthermore, both the "number of owned medals" and the "number of saved medals" may be stored in a host server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of owned medals" is stored directly on the visitor card, but the "number of owned medals" may also be stored in a host server in association with the card number.

When storing the card number in the upper server, data that can identify the time the card was stored in the upper server may be written to the card (membership card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "money balance" is written directly to the card (membership card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "number of medals held" is stored on the card (membership card, visitor card) or the upper server, for example, when the counting button 1171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from the lending machine 1700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 1700 is temporarily saved as medals. When the player inserts the card into the hall management terminal or another lending machine 1700, only the "number of medals held" for that day that was temporarily stored as saved medals is stored again in that lending machine 1700, and the "number of medals played" is added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the player can continue playing.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 according to the modified example will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 according to the modified example.

In order to avoid redundant explanation, only the components that differ from the control unit of the slot machine 100 described using Figure 3 (mainly the components belonging to the rectangular area indicated by the symbol A in Figure 19) will be described here.

The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 1350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of game control means, and the medal count control unit 1350 corresponds to an example of game value number control means.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 1350 is equipped with a CPU 1354, ROM 1356, RAM 1358, I/O 1360 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 1362 for measuring time, number of times, etc.

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 1350 is connected to a game medal count display device 1170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 1171, and a game medal count clear button 1172.

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 1350 is also connected to the lending machine 1700 via the lending machine connection terminal board 1790. The medal count control unit 1350 communicates bidirectionally with the lending machine 1700.

The medal count control unit 1350 sends various commands to the game control unit 302. The game control unit 302 also sends various commands to the medal count control unit 1350. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 1350 and the game control unit 302 is also two-way communication. The medal count control unit 1350 also stores the "game medal count" in a predetermined area of RAM 1358. Specifically, the "game medal count" is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the "game medal count" stored in a predetermined area of RAM 1358 by adding or subtracting. Examples of adding processes include processes based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, processes based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and processes based on a loan notification sent from the loaner machine 1700. On the other hand, subtraction processing includes counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171, and processing based on an input command sent from the game control unit 302.

The medal count clear button 1172 shown in Figure 19 is located in a position that cannot be operated by the player (for example, a position that cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened), and is an operating means for clearing the "medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358.

For example, if a player leaves with two remaining medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player with two medals intends to continue playing, preventing another player from starting play. However, if the medal count can be cleared by a store clerk, another player can be welcomed sooner. Note that the medal count does not necessarily have to be cleared when the medal count clear button 1172 is operated. For example, it may be cleared if the medal count is two or less, and if the medal count is three or more, the medals may be counted in the same way as if the count button 1171 had been operated. If the count button 1171 malfunctions or is unable to recognize that it has been operated, the medal count cannot be converted to the medal count, potentially causing a disadvantage to the player. However, if the medal count can be performed by a store clerk, this will prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, there is no need to provide a new counting button for store clerks, so there is no increase in costs. Note that instead of distinguishing between clearing and counting by determining the number of game medals played, clearing and counting can also be distinguished by the method of operating the game medal count clear button 1172. For example, clearing occurs when the button is pressed briefly, and counting occurs when the button is pressed long. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals played. Furthermore, clearing occurs when only the game medal count clear button 1172 is operated, and counting occurs when the game medal count clear button 1172 and another button are operated simultaneously. There is little chance of making an incorrect operation, and either clearing or counting can be easily selected.

<Power recovery when a button is pressed/Count button, medal count clear button>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20(a), the restoration of power when the count button 1171 and the game medal number clear button 1172 are pressed will be described.

Figure 20(a) shows the control state of the count button and game medal count clear button when the power is turned on.

<Power recovery/count button when pressed>
The counting button 1171 described using Figure 18 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) that, as shown in Figure 20 (a), becomes valid (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, and in this example, is controlled by the medal count control unit 1350.

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the count button 1171 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the medal count control unit 1350 executes control over the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171).

In addition, in the same way, if the power is turned on while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is being operated in an error detection state and the machine recovers from a power outage, or if the power is turned on with a setting change while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is being operated and the machine recovers from a power outage, the medal count control unit 1350 will execute control over the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171).

<Power recovery while button is pressed/game medal count clear button>
The game medal count clear button 1172 described using Figure 19 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) that becomes valid (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 20 (a), and in this example, is controlled by the medal count control unit 1350.

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal from the medal count clear button 1172 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the medal count control unit 1350 executes control over the operation of the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to clear the "medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358).

In addition, in the same way, if the power is turned on while the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is operated in an error detection state and the power is restored from a power outage, or if the power is turned on with a setting change while the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is operated and the power is restored from a power outage, the medal count control unit 1350 executes control over the operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to clear the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358).

<Simultaneous operation of the count button and the medal count clear button>
Next, the simultaneous operation of the count button and the game medal number clear button will be described with reference to FIG. 20(b).

Figure 20(b) shows an example of control when the count button and the game medal count clear button are operated simultaneously.

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the count button 1171 (second operating means) and the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) are not being operated. When the count button 1171 (second operating means) and the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), the power outage is restored and the count button 1171 (second operating means) and medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) are enabled (in this example, the detection signals from the count button 1171 sensor and the medal count clear button 1172 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 are on). The medal count control unit 1350 prioritizes control of the count button 1171 (second operating means) (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171) and does not execute control of the medal count clear button 1172 (count button priority).

In this example, when the count button and medal count clear button are operated simultaneously, the count button takes priority, preventing the medal count from being cleared by mistake and preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

<Operation of the medal count clear button while the count button is being operated>
Next, the operation of the medal count clear button when the count button is operated will be described with reference to Fig. 20(c), which is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the medal count clear button when the count button is operated.

In this example, if operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 is detected while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is in an operating state (in this example, the detection signal from the count button 1171 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is in an on state), the operation is determined to be invalid, and control over the operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 (in this example, the process of clearing the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358) is not executed.

In this example, when the medal count clear button is operated while the count button is being operated, no processing is executed in response to the operation of the medal count clear button, so the medal count will not be cleared by mistake, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

<Operation of the count button when the game medal count clear button is operated>
Next, the operation of the count button when the medal count clear button is operated will be described with reference to Fig. 20(d). Fig. 20(d) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the count button when the medal count clear button is operated.

In this example, if operation of the count button 1171 is detected while the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is in an operating state (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the game medal count clear button 1172 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the operation is determined to be invalid, and control over the operation of the count button 1171 (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171) is not executed.

In this example, when the counting button is operated while the medal count clear button is in operation, no processing is executed in response to the operation of the medal count clear button. This prevents the medal count from being cleared by mistake, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

<Maximum protruding height of each button operation surface>
Next, the maximum protruding height of the operation surface of each button will be described with reference to Figure 21(a). Figure 21(a) is a diagram showing the maximum protruding height of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from a front view of the slot machine 100.

The 1-coin bet button 130 is positioned to protrude upward (perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 (the outer surface of the slot machine 100 that is approximately horizontal to the player and does not face the player), and the 1-coin bet button 130 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operating surface of the 1-coin bet button 130 downward toward the horizontal surface 102a.

The height indicated by the symbol h1 in Figure 21(a) is the maximum distance from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the 1-coin bet button 130 (the maximum protruding height when the 1-coin bet button 130 is not operated).

The MAX BET button 132 is arranged to protrude upward (perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102, and the MAX BET button 132 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operating surface of the MAX BET button 132 downward toward the horizontal surface 102a.

The height indicated by the symbol h2 in Figure 21(a) is the maximum distance from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the MAX BET button 132 (the maximum protruding height when the MAX BET button 132 is not operated).

The start lever 135 is positioned so that it protrudes forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 (the outer surface of the slot machine 100 that is approximately perpendicular to the player and faces the player), and the start lever 135 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operating surface of the start lever 135 downward.

The height indicated by the symbol h3 in Figure 21(a) is the maximum distance from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the start lever 135 (the maximum protruding height when the start lever 135 is not operated).

The stop buttons 137-139 are arranged to protrude forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102, and the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operating surfaces of the stop buttons 137-139 backward toward the vertical surface 102b.

The height indicated by the symbol h4 in Figure 21(a) is the maximum distance from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the stop buttons 137-139 (the maximum protruding height when the stop buttons 137-139 are not operated).

The effect button 156 is arranged to protrude upward (perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102, and the effect button 156 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operating surface of the effect button 156 downward toward the horizontal surface 102a.

The height indicated by the symbol h5 in Figure 21(a) is the maximum distance from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the effect button 156 (the maximum protruding height when the effect button 156 is not operated).

The settlement button 134 is positioned so that it protrudes forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102, and the settlement button 134 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operation surface of the settlement button 134 backward toward the vertical surface 102b.

The height indicated by the symbol h6 in Figure 21(a) is the maximum distance from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the checkout button 134 (the maximum protruding height when the checkout button 134 is not operated).

In this example, the maximum protruding height h1 when the 1-coin bet button 130 is not operated and the maximum protruding height h6 when the settlement button 134 is not operated are approximately the same height (h1 ≒ h6), and the maximum protruding height h2 when the MAX bet button 132 is not operated and the maximum protruding height h4 when the stop buttons 137-139 are not operated are approximately the same height (h2 ≒ h4).

Furthermore, the maximum protruding height h2 of the MAX BET button 132 when not operated and the maximum protruding height h4 of the STOP buttons 137-139 when not operated are higher than the maximum protruding height h1 of the 1-coin BET button 130 when not operated and the maximum protruding height h6 of the SETTLER button 134 when not operated (h1 ≒ h6 < h2 ≒ h4). The maximum protruding height h5 of the effect button 156 when not operated is higher than these buttons (h1 ≒ h6 < h2 ≒ h4 < h5). The maximum protruding height h3 of the start lever 135 when not operated is higher than this button (h1 ≒ h6 < h2 ≒ h4 < h5 < h3).

In this example, operating means with a relatively high protruding operating surface (for example, the start lever 135) are more likely to hit the player or other components, and may be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, even if the operating means is in operation when power is restored, no control is exercised over the operation, thereby preventing erroneous operation and the resulting increase in control load.

On the other hand, operation means with a relatively low protruding height of the operation surface (for example, the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, and the settlement button 134) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation will allow the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

In addition, operating means (e.g., start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139) that are installed in a position facing the player or whose operating surface faces in the direction of opening the front door 102 may be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, by not controlling such operations even if they are being operated when power is restored, it is possible to prevent incorrect operations and the resulting increase in control burden.

On the other hand, operating means that are installed in a position that does not face the player or whose operating surface does not face the direction in which the front door 102 is opened (for example, the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, and settlement button 134) are unlikely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation will allow the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

Although not shown in the figure, the maximum protruding height of the counting button 1171 of the slot machine 1100 is approximately the same as the maximum protruding height h1 when the 1-coin bet button 130 is not operated and the maximum protruding height h6 when the settlement button 134 is not operated.

In this example, operating means with a relatively low protruding height from the operating surface (for example, the counting button 1171) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time. Therefore, if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation allows the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

Furthermore, the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, and settlement button 134 are operating means that can be restored to the state before they were operated (the operation can be canceled), but the start lever 135 and stop buttons 137-139 are operating means that cannot be restored to the state before they were operated (the operation cannot be canceled).

For example, even if the MAX BET button 132 or the 1 BET button 130 is operated and medals are bet, the bet can be cancelled by operating the settlement button 134, and the state before the MAX BET button 132 or the 1 BET button 130 was operated can be restored. Also, even if the settlement button 134 is operated and medals are returned, the state before the settlement button 134 was operated can be restored by inserting medals again.

In this example, operating means that can return to the state before operation (operations can be canceled) can improve convenience by performing control based on the operation when power is restored, while operating means that cannot return to the state before operation (operations cannot be canceled) can prevent serious operational errors by not performing control based on the operation when power is restored.

Furthermore, in terms of distance from the player, the operation surface for the 1-coin bet button 130, the operation surface for the MAX bet button 132, the operation surface for the effect button 156, the operation surface for the settlement button 134, the operation surfaces for the stop buttons 137-139, and the operation surface for the start lever 135 have the shortest maximum distance from the player and are positioned closer to the player in this order.

In this example, since there is a risk that operating means that are relatively close to the player from the operating surface (for example, the start lever 135 and stop buttons 137-139) may be operated at unexpected times, even if they are being operated when power is restored, by not controlling such operations, it is possible to prevent incorrect operations and the resulting increase in control burden.

On the other hand, operating means that are relatively far from the player from the operating surface (for example, the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling that operation will allow the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

<Area of each button operation surface>
Next, the area of the operation surface of each button will be described with reference to Figure 21(b). Figure 21(b) is a diagram showing the area of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from a front view of the slot machine 100.

In Figure 21(b), the area designated by reference symbol s1 is the operation surface for the 1-coin bet button 130, and the area designated by reference symbol s2 is the operation surface for the MAX bet button 132. Furthermore, the area designated by reference symbol s3 is the operation surface for the start lever 135, and the area designated by reference symbol s4 is the operation surface for the stop buttons 137-139.

In addition, the area indicated by reference symbol s5 in Figure 21(b) is the operation surface for the effect button 156, and the area indicated by reference symbol s6 in the same figure is the operation surface for the settlement button 134. In addition, the area indicated by reference symbol s7 in the same figure is the operation surface for the volume button 193b, and the area indicated by reference symbol s8 in the same figure is the operation surface for the reset button 243.

In this example, the area s1 of the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130, the area s6 of the operation surface of the settlement button 134, the area s7 of the operation surface of the volume button 193b, and the area s8 of the operation surface of the reset button 243 are all approximately the same size (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8), and the area s2 of the operation surface of the MAX bet button 132 and the area s4 of the operation surfaces of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are all approximately the same size (s2 ≒ s4). Furthermore, the area s1 of the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130, the area s6 of the operation surface of the settlement button 134, and the area s7 of the volume button 193b are all approximately the same size (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8). The area s2 of the operation surface of the MAX BET button 132 and the area s4 of the operation surface of the stop buttons 137-139 are larger than the area s7 of the operation surface of the MAX BET button 132 and the area s8 of the operation surface of the RESET button 243 (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8 < s2 ≒ s4), the area s5 of the operation surface of the effect button 156 is larger than these buttons (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8 < s2 ≒ s4 < s5), and the area s3 of the operation surface of the start lever 135 is larger than this button (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8 < s2 ≒ s4 < s5 < s3).

In this example, operating means with a relatively large operating surface (for example, the effect button 156) are more likely to be hit by the player or other components, and may be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, even if the operating state is such that it is being operated when power is restored, by not controlling the operation, it is possible to prevent incorrect operation and the resulting increase in control burden.

On the other hand, operation means with a relatively small operating surface area (for example, the 1-coin bet button 130, the settlement button 134) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling that operation will allow the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

Although not shown in the figure, the area of the operation surface of the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 of the slot machine 1100 is the same size as the area s1 of the operation surface of the 1 coin bet button 130, etc.

In this example, operating means with a relatively small operating surface area (for example, the counting button 1171) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time. Therefore, if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation allows the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

<Power recovery when button is pressed/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 2) that supplies power, first operating means (for example, the start lever 135 and the effect button 156 shown in FIG. 1), and second operating means (for example, the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1). Even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the first operating means is being operated, and the operation of the first operating means is enabled, the gaming machine does not execute control over the operation of the first operating means. However, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the second operating means is being operated, and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, the gaming machine executes control over the operation of the second operating means. The operating surface of the first operating means protrudes from the outer surface of the gaming machine further than the operating surface of the second operating means.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, operating means with a relatively high protruding operating surface are more likely to hit the player or other components and may be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, even if they are being operated when power is restored, by not controlling the operation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations and the associated increase in control burden. Furthermore, operating means with a relatively low protruding operating surface are less likely to be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, by controlling the operation if they are being operated when power is restored, it is possible to resume play as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 2) that supplies power, a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, effect button 156, volume button 193a, and reset button 243 shown in FIG. 1), and a second operating means (for example, the MAX bet button 132, 1 coin bet button 130, and settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1), and when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, This gaming machine is characterized in that, even if a power outage occurs while the first operating means is being operated and the operation of the first operating means is enabled, the machine does not execute control over the operation of the first operating means; however, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the power outage occurs while the second operating means is being operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, the machine executes control over the operation of the second operating means, and the operating surface of the first operating means has a larger area than the operating surface of the second operating means.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, operating means with a relatively large operating surface area are more likely to hit the player or other components and may be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, even if they are being operated when power is restored, by not controlling the operation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations and the associated increase in control burden. Furthermore, operating means with a relatively small operating surface area are less likely to be operated at unexpected times. Therefore, by controlling the operation if they are being operated when power is restored, it is possible to resume play as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for players.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 2) that supplies power, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 1) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and that are driven to rotate, a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137-139 shown in FIG. 1) for stopping the reels that are driven to rotate, and presentation means (for example, LCD display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2, various lamps), and is configured such that when the plurality of stop operation means are operated, the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop operation means are no longer operated, the presentation means executes a winning presentation corresponding to the first stop mode, and when the plurality of reels are stopped, This gaming machine is characterized in that when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while at least one of the reels is spinning and none of the multiple stop operation means are operated, the spinning reel will not be stopped even if the power outage is restored while the stop operation means is operated; however, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the multiple stop operation means are operated to stop the multiple reels in the first stop mode and the last stop operation means among the multiple stop operation means is operated, and the power outage is restored while the last stop operation means is still being operated, the winning effect by the effect means corresponding to the first stop mode will not be executed while the last stop operation means is still being operated.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the control over the operation of the stop operation means can be changed depending on the operation status of that operation. Reel stop control, which could cause a player to suffer a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation, is disabled when power is restored, preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation. On the other hand, by enabling the control to suspend the winning effect when power is restored and not executing the winning effect while the operation of the last operated stop operation means is continuing, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being missed and increase player satisfaction.

In this example, no light intensity button is provided to allow the light intensity of various lamps, LEDs, etc. to be set, but a light intensity button may be provided. If a light intensity button is provided, the control of the light intensity button when powered on and simultaneous operation, as described in Figures 10 to 17, can be controlled in the same way as the volume button described above.

<Changing settings with the door closed>
Next, the setting change operation when the door is closed will be explained. Prior to this explanation, the administrator screen, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode will be explained.

<Administrator screen>
The administrator screen is a screen used by an administrator, such as a store clerk at a gaming facility, to make various settings related to the slot machine 100. There are no particular limitations on the content displayed on the administrator screen, but in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 can be used to display, for example, an administrator screen SD shown in FIG.

The administrator screen SD in this example is composed of a title display "System Settings," which indicates that it is an administrator screen, and multiple menu displays. The menu displays in this example include time settings, error history settings, setting history, power saving settings, etc., and an administrator, such as a gaming parlor employee, can select any item on the menu display by operating the directional pad 193a (up key, down key, right key, left key) or OK button 193b described using Figure 1.

For example, when the time setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the date and time, and when the error history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past errors that have occurred on the gaming machine, the history of opening and closing the front door 102, and the history of power-on and power-off restoration. Furthermore, when the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations, and when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, simple settings such as the volume setting for speakers 272, 277 and the brightness of LEDs and various lamps).

Note that the items selectable on the administrator screen SD are not limited to those in this example. For example, it may be possible to set a maximum volume that can only be set by the amusement facility administrator, an error sound to be output when an error occurs (for example, the front door 102 is opened), or the light intensity of LEDs and various lamps.

<Settings change mode>
Next, the normal setting change mode will be described with reference to Fig. 22(a), which is a diagram showing the flow of the normal setting change mode in chronological order.

<Setting change mode/Turn the setting key SW ON with the power OFF>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 22 (a) is a state in which the power supply of the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the front door 102 is in the open state (open state), and the manager of the gaming facility has changed the setting key SW from OFF to ON, resulting in the setting key SW being ON.
In this state, the power supply of the power supply unit 252 is turned off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so although not shown in the figure, the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Settings change mode/Starting setting change mode>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 22(a) is a state in which, while the setting key SW indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure is in the ON state, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the gaming facility manager, and the power supply of the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, the slot machine 100 can begin control to enter setting change mode (setting change state) if both the front door 102 (door body) is open and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) are met.

In other words, when the slot machine 100 is powered on while the front door 102 (door body) is open and the setting key SW is being turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state), it is configured to transition to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

Specifically, if the main control unit 300 determines in steps S203 and S204 of the initial setting process described using FIG. 6 that the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON, it starts the setting change process described using FIG. 7.

Next, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to begin, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to begin displaying the administrator screen.

As a result, as shown in Figure 22 (a-1), the administrator screen SD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the device has entered setting change mode, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and speakers 272, 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed" to notify users that the settings are being changed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Settings change mode/Changing setting values>
The states indicated by symbols T3 and T4 in FIG. 22(a) are states in which the reset SW243 has been pressed once by the gaming facility manager in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value by incrementing the currently set value 1 to 6 by 1 each time it detects an operation of the reset SW 243, and resetting it to 1 when the set value exceeds 6.

In the states indicated by symbols T3 and T4 in Figure 22(a), a single operation of the reset SW243 is detected, and after a change in the setting value (in this example, a change from setting 2 to setting 3) is executed, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3), as shown in Figure 22(a-2).

In addition, because the setting change mode is active, the setting change sound continues to be output from speakers 272 and 277, and because the front door 102 is in the open door body state, the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 continue to issue door open notifications.

<Setting change mode/Confirming the setting>
The states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 in FIG. 22(a) are states in which the manager of the gaming facility has pressed the start lever 135 once in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, it stores (confirms) the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a as the new setting value in the subsequent steps S308 and S309, erases the display on the setting value display device 101a, and hides the setting value.

In the states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 in Figure 22(a), operation of the start lever 135 is detected in setting change mode, so the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a (in this example, setting 3) is stored (confirmed) as the new setting value, and then the display of the setting value on the setting value display device 101a is erased, as shown in Figure 22(a-3).

In addition, since this state is the setting change mode, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification continues to be output by the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127.

<Settings change mode/Exiting settings change mode>
The state indicated by the symbol T7 in FIG. 22(a) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by the manager of the gaming facility in the setting change mode.

The slot machine 100 is configured to end the setting change mode when the setting key SW is changed from ON (second operating state) to OFF (first operating state) while in the setting change mode.

As a specific example, if the main control unit 300 determines in step S310 of the setting change process that the setting key SW is OFF, it sends a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to be ended, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to end the display of the administrator screen SD.

As a result, as shown in Figure 22 (a-4), the administrator screen SD displayed on the LCD display device 157 is erased, but because the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification displayed on the LCD display device 157 is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the LCD display device 157.

In addition to the door open notification by the LCD display device 157, the dispensed coin count display 127 continues to notify the user that the door is open, and the speakers 272, 277 output a door open notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open" to notify the user that the front door 102 is open).

In Figure 22(a), the state indicated by the symbol T8 is the state in which the front door 102 is closed. In this state, the front door 102 has changed from a door-open state (open state) to a door-closed state (closed state). Therefore, although not shown in the figure, the door-open notification by the LCD display device 157, the door-open notification by the payout number display 127, and the output of the door-open notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 all end, and the machine transitions to the normal game state (playable state).

<Settings confirmation mode>
Next, the normal setting check mode will be described with reference to Fig. 22(b), which is a diagram showing the flow of the normal setting check mode in chronological order.

<Settings check mode/Front door: Door closed>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 22(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the front door 102 is in the door body closed state, and normal game is being played.

In this state, normal play is in progress, so normal effects are being displayed on the LCD display device 157 and normal effect background music is being output from the speakers 272 and 277.

<Settings check mode/Front door: Door closed → Door open>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in Figure 22(b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door body closed state indicated by the symbol T1 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body closed state to the door body open state.

In this state, the front door 102 is in an open state, and therefore, although not shown in the figure, the LCD display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is in an open state).

In addition to the door open notification by the LCD display device 157, the dispensed coin count display 127 also issues a door open notification (in this example, lighting up a segment corresponding to the letters "dr" to indicate that the front door 102 is open), and speakers 272, 277 output a door open notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open" to indicate that the front door 102 is open).

<Settings check mode/Power ON, front door (door open) and setting key SW ON>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 22 (b) is a state in which the power supply of the power supply unit 252 indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the setting key SW is turned ON by the amusement facility manager by changing the setting key SW from OFF to ON.

When the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state (open state), the slot machine 100 can begin control to enter setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) when the setting key SW (operation means) is operated from OFF (first operation state) to ON (second operation state).

In other words, when the setting key SW is turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state) while the slot machine 100 is powered on, it is configured to transition to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed.

Specifically, the main control unit 300 starts the setting confirmation process when it determines that the current period is within a predetermined valid setting value confirmation period (for example, a period that is not in the MAX bet state (a state in which the number of medals required to start one game (3 in this example) has been bet, or a state in which replay is being performed)) and the setting key SW is ON.

Next, in this setting confirmation process, the main control unit 300 sends a setting confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that setting confirmation is to begin, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to begin displaying the administrator screen.

As a result, as shown in Figure 22 (b-2), the administrator screen SD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the device has entered setting confirmation mode, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being confirmed" to notify users that the settings are being confirmed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Settings check mode/reset switch pressing operation>
The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in FIG. 22(b) are states in which the reset SW243 has been pressed once by the gaming establishment manager in the setting confirmation mode.

In setting confirmation mode, changing the setting value using the reset SW243 is invalid, so no change (update) of the setting value is performed.

<Settings check mode/Exiting settings check mode>
The state indicated by the symbol T6 in FIG. 22(b) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF by the manager of the gaming facility in the setting confirmation mode.

The slot machine 100 is configured to end the setting confirmation mode when the setting key SW is changed from ON (second operating state) to OFF (first operating state) while in the setting confirmation mode.

As a specific example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF during the setting value confirmation process, it sends a setting confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting confirmation is to be ended, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to end the display of the administrator screen.

As a result, as shown in Figure 22 (b-4), the administrator screen SD displayed on the LCD display device 157 is erased, but because the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification displayed on the LCD display device 157 is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the LCD display device 157.

In addition to the door open notification by the LCD display device 157, the dispensed coin count display 127 also issues a door open notification (in this example, lighting up a segment corresponding to the letters "dr" to indicate that the front door 102 is open), and speakers 272, 277 output a door open notification sound (in this example, the sound "The door is open" to indicate that the front door 102 is open).

Furthermore, since the setting confirmation mode has ended, the display of the setting value on the setting value display device 101a is erased.

<Door closing in setting confirmation mode>
Next, door closing in the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to Fig. 23(a) Fig. 23(a) is a time-series diagram showing an example of a state in which play is possible when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode.

Note that the state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 23(a) is the same as the normal game state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 22(b), except that the setting key SW is ON, so its description will be omitted.

<Door closed in setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door closed state → Door open state>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in Figure 23(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door body closed state indicated by the symbol T1 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body closed state to the door body open state.

When the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state), the slot machine 100 is in a playable state, and when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state), the slot machine 100 is configured to initiate control into setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).

In the state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 23(a), the conditions for initiating control from the normal gaming state (playable state) to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state). As a result, as shown in Figure 23(a-2), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Door closed in setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door open state → Door closed state>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in Figure 23(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state indicated by the symbol T2 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body open state to the door body closed state.

In this example, the slot machine 100 is configured to initiate control to a playable state when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) in setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in Figure 23(a), the conditions for initiating control to switch from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state). As a result, as shown in Figure 23(a-3), the LCD display device 157 executes a normal effect and outputs normal effect background music from the speakers 272, 277.

Note that the state indicated by reference symbol T4 in Figure 23(a) is the same as the state indicated by reference symbol T2 in the same figure, so its description will be omitted.

<Door Closing in Setting Confirmation Mode (Modified Example)>
Next, door closing in the setting check mode (variant example) will be described with reference to Fig. 23(b) Fig. 23(b) is a time-series diagram illustrating an example in which the setting check mode is maintained when the front door 102 is closed in the setting check mode.

Note that the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in Figure 23(b) are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in Figure 23(a), and therefore their description will be omitted.

<Door closing in setting confirmation mode (variant example) / Front door: Door body open state → Door body closed state>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in Figure 23 (b) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state indicated by the symbol T2 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body open state to the door body closed state.

In this example, the slot machine 100 is configured to maintain the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

In the state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 23(a), the conditions for maintaining the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met and the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is maintained, so as shown in Figure 23(b-3), the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a continues to display a number (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 continue to output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

Meanwhile, since the front door 102 has changed from an open state to a closed state, the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 and the door open notification by the dispensed number display 127 have ceased.

Note that the state indicated by reference symbol T4 in Figure 23(b) is the same as the state indicated by reference symbol T2 in the same figure, so its description will be omitted.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)>
Next, the setting change operation (Example 1) in the door closed state will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when the setting change operation (Example 1) is performed in the door closed state.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Turn setting key SW ON with power OFF>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 24 is a state in which the power supply of the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the front door 102 is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the amusement facility manager, after which the front door 102 is closed (closed state).

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is turned off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, displays such as the LCD display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, and dispensed coin count display unit 127 are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 are not outputting sound.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Power ON with door closed>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 24 is the state in which, when the door body is closed and the setting key SW is ON, as indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the gaming facility manager, and the power supply of the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON.

When power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state), the slot machine 100 is configured to start control to the normal game state (playable state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state).

In the state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 24, when the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., begins, the setting key SW is ON, but because the front door 102 is closed, the system does not enter setting change mode but instead enters normal game mode, and as shown in Figure 24(a), a normal presentation is executed on the LCD display device 157 and normal presentation background music is output from the speakers 272, 277.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 24 is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door closed state indicated by the symbol T2 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door open state.

When the slot machine 100 is in a playable state where the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state), if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state), the slot machine 100 is configured to not start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) but to start control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).

In the state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 24, the conditions for initiating control from the normal gaming state (playable state) to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state). As a result, as shown in Figure 24(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

Also, in this state, since the front door 102 is in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the front door 102 is open).

In this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the state can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values and also allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

Note that when the conditions for initiating control from the normal game state (playable state) to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, control to the setting change mode (setting change state) is not initiated and control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is initiated. However, in a playable state in which the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state), if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the door open state (open state), control to the setting change mode (setting change state) is not initiated and the playable state may be maintained.

With this configuration, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing setting values.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Reset SW pressing operation>
The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in FIG. 24 are states in which the reset SW243 has been pressed once by the gaming establishment manager in the setting confirmation mode.

In setting confirmation mode, changing the setting value using the reset SW243 is invalid, so no change to the setting value is made.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Front door: Door body open state → Door body closed state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T6 in FIG. 24 is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state indicated by reference symbol T5 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body open state to the door body closed state.

As explained using Figure 23 (a), the slot machine 100 of this example is configured to initiate control to a playable state when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) in setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T6 in Figure 24, the conditions for initiating control to switch from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state). As a result, as shown in Figure 24(d), the LCD display device 157 executes a normal effect and outputs normal effect background music from the speakers 272, 277.

As explained using Figure 23 (b), in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state), the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be maintained even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state (closed state).

When configured in this manner, as shown in FIG. 24(d'), the LCD display device 157 continues to display the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a continues to display a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 continue to output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed). However, since the front door 102 has changed from the door body open state to the door closed state, the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 and the door open notification by the dispensed number display 127 are terminated.

That is, the gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of setting values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states, and the operation means is provided in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the main control means is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means that can control gaming based on one of a plurality of setting values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states, and the operation means is provided in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the main control means is It is possible to set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state (for example, a normal play state), a setting confirmation state (for example, a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (for example, a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, and when the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, if the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when power supply by the power supply means is started, if both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state are satisfied (for example, When the power supply means starts to supply power, even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 24, the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the closed state), the control to the playable state is started without starting the control to the setting change state. In the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, even if the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the setting change state is not started. In the playable state when the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, the game machine maintains the playable state without starting control to the setting change state; when the power supply means cuts off the power supply to open the door and then starts supplying power from the power supply means, the game machine starts control to the setting change state (for example, in the state shown by reference character T8 in FIG. 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is opened, the game machine transitions to setting change mode), and maintains the setting confirmation state even when the door is closed in the setting confirmation state (for example, the game machine maintains the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 24(d')).

With the gaming machine of this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values. Furthermore, since the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved and the machine can transition to the setting change state, convenience for gaming establishment staff and others can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the setting confirmation state is maintained even when the door is closed, convenience for gaming establishment staff and others can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/close state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states, the operation means being provided in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the main control means is in a playable state (e.g., a normal a setting confirmation state (for example, a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed; and a setting change state (for example, a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values. When the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, control to the setting confirmation state can be started. When the power supply means starts to supply power, if both the conditions that the door body is in the open state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state are met (for example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is ON, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 22(a)), When the power supply by the power supply means is started, even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, when the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the door closed state as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 24), the control to the playable state is started without starting the control to the setting change state, and when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the control to the setting confirmation state is started (for example, when the determination means determines that the door body is in the In the second operating state, when the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game machine is in the playable state; when the power supply means cuts off the power supply to open the door and then starts supplying power, control to the setting change state begins (for example, in the state shown by reference symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when the front door 102 is opened and then power is restored, the game machine transitions to the setting change mode). Even if the door is closed in the setting confirmation state (for example, when the front door 102 is closed, as shown by reference symbol T6 in FIG. 24), the game machine maintains the setting confirmation state (for example, the setting confirmation mode is maintained as shown in FIG. 24(d')).

With the gaming machine of this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the machine can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values, allows setting confirmation work to be performed, and maintains the setting confirmation state even when the door is closed in the setting confirmation state, thereby increasing convenience for gaming establishment staff and others. Furthermore, the machine can transition to the setting change state by resolving the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, thereby increasing convenience for gaming establishment staff and others.

Note that the "door body" according to the present invention is not limited to a door body consisting of a single door (e.g., the front door 102), but may be a door body consisting of two doors (e.g., an upper door and a lower door), or a door body consisting of three or more doors. Furthermore, "when the door body is determined to be in an open state" according to the present invention may refer to a case where, in a case where the door body consists of multiple doors, one, multiple, or all of the multiple doors are determined to be in an open state. Furthermore, "when the door body is determined to be in a closed state" according to the present invention may refer to a case where, in a case where the door body consists of multiple doors, one, multiple, or all of the multiple doors are determined to be in a closed state.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Power ON → Power OFF>
The state indicated by symbol T7 in Figure 24 is the state in which the power supply SW 244 is operated by the gaming facility manager in the setting confirmation mode indicated by symbol T6 in the same figure, with the door body closed, and the power supply of the power supply unit 252 is changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is turned off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, as shown in Figure 24 (e), the displays on the LCD display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, dispensing number display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 do not output sound.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Starting setting change mode>
The state indicated by symbol T8 in Figure 24 is a state in which, while the setting key SW indicated by symbol T7 in the same figure is in the ON state, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the gaming facility manager, and the power supply of the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, the slot machine 100 can begin control to enter setting change mode (setting change state) if both the front door 102 (door body) is open and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) are met.

In other words, when the slot machine 100 is powered on while the setting key SW is being turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state), it is configured to transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode).

In the state indicated by symbol T8 in Figure 24, the setting change mode has been entered, and as shown in Figure 24 (f), the administrator screen SD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed) is output from the speakers 272, 277.

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the front door 102 is open).

This example eliminates the irregular state in which the door is closed and the operating means is in the second operating state, allowing the machine to transition to a setting change state, thereby improving convenience for game parlor staff and others.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Changing setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T9 and T10 in FIG. 24 are states in which the reset SW243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming facility in the setting change mode.

In this state, a single operation of the reset SW243 is detected, and after a change in the setting value (in this example, from setting 2 to setting 3) is executed, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3), as shown in Figure 24 (g).

In addition, in this state, since the setting change mode is active, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification continues to be output by the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127.

In addition, although not shown in the figures, the slot machine of this example is configured to maintain the setting change mode even when the front door 102 changes from an open door state to a closed door state in the setting change mode.

If the setting change mode is maintained, the LCD display device 157 continues to display the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a continues to display a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed) continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277. However, since the front door 102 has changed from the door body open state to the door closed state, the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 and the door open notification by the dispensed number display 127 are terminated.

That is, the gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states, and the operation means is provided in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, The main control means can set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can proceed (for example, a normal game state), a setting confirmation state in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, a setting confirmation mode), and a setting change state in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values (for example, a setting change mode), and when the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the main control means can start control to the setting confirmation state, and when power supply by the power supply means is started, both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state are satisfied. When the conditions are met (for example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is in the ON state, as shown by the symbol T2 in FIG. 22(a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and even when the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is met when the power supply means starts supplying power, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, when the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the door closed state, as shown by the symbol T2 in FIG. 24), the control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state. In the playable state when the determination means determines that the door is open, the playable state is maintained without initiating control to the setting change state; and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the power supply means cuts off the power supply to the door to open it and then starts supplying power, control to the setting change state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is opened, the machine transitions to setting change mode), and the setting change state is maintained even when the door is closed in the setting change state.

With the gaming machine of this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values. Furthermore, the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved to transition to the setting change state, and the setting change state can be maintained even when the door is closed in the setting change state, thereby improving convenience for gaming parlor staff and others.

The gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/close state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states, and the operation means is provided in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the main control means controls the progress of gaming. a setting confirmation state (for example, a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed; and a setting change state (for example, a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values. When the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, if the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply means starts to supply power, if both the conditions that the door body is in the open state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state are met (for example, in FIG. 22(a)), In the case where the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is in the ON state, as shown by the symbol T2 in FIG. 24 ), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied when the power supply means starts supplying power, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, the case where the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the door closed state, as shown by the symbol T2 in FIG. 24 ), the control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, the determination means When the determination means determines that the front door 102 is in the open state, control to the setting confirmation state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by reference symbol T3 in FIG. 24, the front door 102 is determined to be in the open state, and the system transitions to setting confirmation mode). In the playable state when the determination means determines that the door is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, power supply by the power supply means is cut off to open the door, and then power supply by the power supply means is started, control to the setting change state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by reference symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is in the open state, the system transitions to setting change mode). This gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change state is maintained even when the door is in the closed state in the setting change state.

With the gaming machine of this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the machine can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values and allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for gaming establishment staff and others. Furthermore, the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved to transition to the setting change state, and the setting change state is maintained even when the door is closed in the setting change state, improving convenience for gaming establishment staff and others.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 2)>
Next, the setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 2) will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a time series diagram illustrating an example of control when the setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 2) is performed.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 2) / Turn setting key SW ON with power OFF>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 25 is a state in which the power supply of the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the upper door is in a closed state (closed state), and the lower door is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW is changed from OFF to ON by the manager of the gaming facility.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is turned off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, displays such as the LCD display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, and dispensed coin count display unit 127 are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 are not outputting sound.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 2) / Power ON with upper door closed and lower door open>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 25 is the state in which the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager and the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON when the upper door is closed, the lower door is open, and the setting key SW is ON, as indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure.

In this example, when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state), the slot machine is configured to start control to a non-playable state and issue a door open notification without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state).

In the state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 25, when the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., begins, the setting key SW is ON, but because the upper door is in the closed position, the system does not enter setting change mode and instead enters a play-disabled state. As shown in Figure 25(a), the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the speakers 272, 277 output a door-open notification sound (in this example, the voice "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

In addition to (or instead of) the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 and the output of the door open notification sound by the speakers 272, 277, the dispensed coin count display 127 may also perform a door open notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(c) (in this example, lighting up a segment corresponding to the letter "dr" to indicate that the front door 102 is open).

<Setting change operation with the door closed (Example 2) / upper door closed, lower door open → lower door open>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 25 is a state in which the lower door has changed from an open state to a closed state in the upper door closed state and the lower door open state indicated by the symbol T2 in the same figure.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to initiate control to normal play (playable state) without initiating control to setting change mode (setting change state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) when play is disabled.

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in Figure 25, the conditions for initiating control to switch from the non-playable state to the normal playable state (playable state) are met, so the game transitions to the normal playable state without switching to the setting change mode. As shown in Figure 25(b), the normal effect is executed on the LCD display device 157, and normal effect background music is output from the speakers 272, 277.

In this example, if both doors are closed in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be transitioned to a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing setting values.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 2) / upper and lower doors closed state → upper and lower doors open state>
The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 25 is a state in which the upper door and the lower door are changed from the closed state to the open state in the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state indicated by the symbol T3 in the same figure.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to initiate control to setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without initiating control to setting change mode (setting change state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in a closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) when play is disabled.

In the state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 25, the conditions for initiating control from the non-playable state to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, so the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without transitioning to the setting change mode. As shown in Figure 25(c), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the front door 102 is open).

In this example, if both doors are opened in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the system can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent behavior such as unauthorized changes to setting values and allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

Note that the states indicated by symbols T6 to T10 in the following Figure 25 are the same as the states indicated by symbols T6 to T10 in Figure 24, except that the closed state of the front door 102 is replaced by the closed state of the upper and lower doors, and the open state of the front door 102 is replaced by the open state of the upper and lower doors, and therefore a description of these states will be omitted.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)>
Next, the setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 3) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when the setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 3) is performed.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)/Setting key SW turned ON with power OFF> The state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 26 is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the upper door is in an open state (open state), and the lower door is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the gaming facility manager.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is turned off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, displays such as the LCD display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, and dispensed coin count display unit 127 are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 are not outputting sound.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 3) / Power on with upper and lower doors open>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 26 is the state in which the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager and the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON when the upper door is open, the lower door is open, and the setting key SW is ON, as indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 3) / upper and lower doors open state → upper and lower doors closed state>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 26 is the state in which the upper door and the lower door change from the open state to the closed state immediately after the power is turned on, in the state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure where the upper door is closed and the lower door is open.

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the door closed state (closed state), the slot machine is configured to not initiate control to the setting change mode (setting change state) but to initiate control to the playable state, but not to issue a door open notification.

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in Figure 26, the conditions for initiating control to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state). As a result, as shown in Figure 26(a), the LCD display device 157 executes a normal effect and outputs normal effect background music from the speakers 272, 277.

In addition, in this state, no door-open notification is made, so no door-open notification is made by the LCD display device 157, no door-open notification is made by the dispensed coin count display 127, and no door-open notification sound is output by the speakers 272, 277.

In this example, in the irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be transitioned to the playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing setting values.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 3) / upper and lower doors closed state → upper and lower doors open state>
The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the upper door and the lower door are changed from the closed state to the open state in the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state indicated by the symbol T3 in the same figure.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to initiate control to setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without initiating control to setting change mode (setting change state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in a playable state where the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in a closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state).

In the state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 26, the conditions for initiating control from the playable state to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, so the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without transitioning to the setting change mode. As shown in Figure 26(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, since the upper and lower doors are open, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to notify that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the upper and lower doors are open).

In this example, if both doors are opened in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the system can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent behavior such as unauthorized changes to setting values and allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)/Error detection state>
In FIG. 26, the states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 are states in which an error is detected in the setting check mode.

In this state, the main control unit 300 detects a selector error, sets the interrupt status to an error detection state, and then displays an error code corresponding to the error on the dispensed coin count display 127 (in this example, it lights up the segment corresponding to the letters "CE" indicating a selector error), and prepares to send an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400.

When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start an error notification. However, in this example, displaying the administrator screen SD takes priority over an error notification, so an error notification (in this example, a display including the string "Selector error") to notify of an error (in this example, a selector error) is not executed on the LCD display device 157.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 3) / upper and lower doors open state → lower door closed state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T7 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the lower door has changed from an open state to a closed state in the upper door/lower door open state indicated by reference symbol T6 in the same figure.

In this state, the lower door has changed from an open state to a closed state, so the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the administrator screen SD displayed on the LCD display device 157 is erased. Also, because an error has been detected, the dispensed number display 127 continues to issue an error notification, while the LCD display device (notification means) 157 executes the pending error notification (in this example, a display including the text "Selector error") and outputs an error notification sound from the speakers (notification means) 272, 277 (in this example, the voice "Selector error" to notify that a selector error has occurred).

Also, because the upper door is open, the LCD display device 157 displays a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the upper door is open).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3) / upper door open state → upper door closed state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T8 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the upper door has changed from the open state to the closed state in the upper door open state indicated by reference symbol T7 in the same figure.

In this state, since an error has been detected, the error notification by the dispensed coin count display 127, the error notification by the LCD display device 157, and the output of the error notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 continue, but since the upper and lower doors are now closed, the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 has ended.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 3) / upper and lower doors closed state → upper and lower doors open state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T9 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the upper and lower doors have changed from the closed state to the open state in the upper and lower door closed state indicated by reference symbol T8 in the same figure.

In this state, since an error has been detected, the dispensed coin count indicator 127, the LCD display device 157, and the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output error alert sounds, and since the upper and lower doors are now open, the LCD display device 157 resumes issuing door open alerts.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is configured not to enter setting confirmation mode even if the gaming facility manager turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON while an error notification is being issued and the upper and lower doors are open.

Since an error has been detected, the dispensed coin count display 127 continues to issue an error alert, the LCD display 157 continues to issue an error alert, and the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output an error alert sound. Since the upper and lower doors are both open, the LCD display 157 continues to issue a door open alert.

That is, the gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/close state of the door body, an operation means (e.g., setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., ON state) as operation states, an alarm means (e.g., LCD display device 157, speakers 272, 277), and an error detection means (e.g., error alarm start process), and the operation means is in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state. The main control means is capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can proceed (for example, a normal game state), a setting confirmation state in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, a setting confirmation mode), and a setting change state in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values (for example, a setting change mode), and when the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, if the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when power supply by the power supply means is started, if both conditions of the door body being in the open state and the operation means being operated to the second operation state are satisfied (for example, When the power supply by the power supply means is started, even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 24, the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the door closed state), the control to the playable state is started without starting the control to the setting change state, and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, even if the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the control to the setting change state is started without starting the control to the playable state. In the playable state where the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, when the power supply means cuts off the power supply to open the door and then starts supplying power, control to the setting change state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is opened, the machine transitions to setting change mode). If an error is detected by the error detection means, the notification means can issue an error notification, and if the determination means determines that the door is open while the error notification is being issued, control to the setting confirmation state is not initiated even if the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state.

With the gaming machine of this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values. Furthermore, since the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved and the state can be transitioned to the setting change state, convenience for gaming parlor staff and others can be improved. Furthermore, even if the operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state when the door is determined to be in the open state during an error notification, control to the setting confirmation state will not be initiated. Therefore, the error can be resolved first by prioritizing the error notification over the setting confirmation.

The gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/close state of the door body, an operation means (e.g., setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., ON state) as operation states, an alarm means (e.g., LCD display device 157, speakers 272, 277), and an error detection means (e.g., error alarm start process), and the operation means is provided in a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and is provided on the front The main control means can set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can proceed (for example, a normal game state), a setting confirmation state in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, a setting confirmation mode), and a setting change state in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values (for example, a setting change mode). When the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, the main control means can start control to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply means starts supplying power, if both the conditions that the door body is in the open state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state are met (for example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key is pressed, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 22(a)), the main control means can start control to the setting confirmation state. When the setting key SW is in the ON state), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and when the power supply means starts supplying power, even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, the case shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 24 where the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the door closed state), control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, control to the setting confirmation state is started (for example, in the state shown by symbol T3 in FIG. 24 where the front door 102 is in the door open state), and transition to setting confirmation mode), in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the power supply means cuts off the power supply to open the door and then starts supplying power, control to the setting change state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when the front door 102 is opened and then power is restored, transition to setting change mode occurs), if an error is detected by the error detection means, the notification means can issue an error notification, and if the determination means determines that the door is open while the error notification is being issued, control to the setting confirmation state is not initiated even if the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state.

With the gaming machine of this example, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the machine can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values and allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for gaming establishment staff and others. Furthermore, the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved and the machine can transition to the setting change state, improving convenience for gaming establishment staff and others. Furthermore, even if the operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state when the door is determined to be open during an error notification, control to the setting confirmation state is not initiated. Therefore, the error can be resolved first by prioritizing the error notification over the setting confirmation.

Note that the "door body" according to the present invention is not limited to a door body consisting of two doors (e.g., an upper door and a lower door), but may be a door body consisting of a single door (e.g., the front door 102), or a door body consisting of three or more doors. Furthermore, "when the door body is determined to be in an open state" according to the present invention may refer to a case where, in a case where the door body consists of multiple doors, one, multiple, or all of the multiple doors are determined to be in an open state. Furthermore, "when the door body is determined to be in a closed state" according to the present invention may refer to a case where, in a case where the door body consists of multiple doors, one, multiple, or all of the multiple doors are determined to be in a closed state.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)/Error resolution>
The states indicated by symbols T10 and T11 in Figure 26 are states in which the error resolution operation using the reset SW243 has been performed once by the gaming facility manager.

In this state, the main control unit 300 erases the error detection status stored in the interrupt status because the error notification termination condition has been met (in this example, the error has been cleared using the reset SW 243), and transitions to setting confirmation mode. As a result, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being checked" to notify that settings are being checked).

In addition, since the upper and lower doors are open, the LCD display device 157 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to notify that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the upper and lower doors are open).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 4)>
Next, a setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 4) will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 4) is performed.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101, and the upper door (door body) is configured to be openable only when the lower door (door body) is in the open position.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 4) / Turn setting key SW ON with power OFF>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 27 is a state in which the power supply of the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the upper door is in a closed state (closed state), and the lower door is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW is changed from OFF to ON by the manager of the gaming facility.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is turned off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, displays such as the LCD display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, and dispensed coin count display unit 127 are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 are not outputting sound.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 4)/Power ON with upper door closed and lower door open>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 27 is the state in which the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager and the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON when the upper door is closed, the lower door is open, and the setting key SW is ON, as indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure.

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the door open state (open state), the slot machine is configured to start control to a playable state without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) and to issue a door open notification.

In other words, in this example, the condition for "starting control to a playable state and issuing a door open notification without starting control to change to setting change mode (setting change state)" is that the lower door (door body) of the upper and lower doors (door bodies) is in an open state (open state). It is also possible for the condition for "starting control to a playable state and issuing a door open notification without starting control to change to setting change mode (setting change state)" to be that the upper door (door body) is in an open state (open state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T2 in Figure 27, the conditions for initiating control to the normal gaming state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal gaming state (playable state), and the normal presentation is executed on the LCD display device 157, as shown in Figure 27(a).

In addition, because the lower door is open, a door-open notification sound is output from speakers 272, 277, and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letter "dr" lights up to notify that the lower door is open).

In this example, in the irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be transitioned to the playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing setting values.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 4) / lower door open state → lower door closed state>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 27 is a state in which the lower door is closed and the upper door is closed, resulting in both the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state, in the upper door closed state and the lower door open state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure.

In this state, since the lower door is closed, as shown in Figure 27 (b), no door-open notification is issued by the LCD display device 157, no door-open notification is issued by the dispensed coin count display 127, and no door-open notification sound is output by the speakers 272 and 277.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 4) / upper door closed state → upper door open state, lower door closed state → lower door open state>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 27 is a state in which the upper door and lower door are opened from the upper door closed state and lower door closed state indicated by symbol T3 in the same figure, resulting in an upper door open state and a lower door open state.

In this state, since the lower door is open, as shown in Figure 27 (c), a door-open notification sound is output from speakers 272 and 277, and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letter "dr" lights up to notify that the lower door is open).

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is turned ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, if the open/close sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the open state (open state), control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is not initiated even if the setting key SW (operation means) is turned ON (second operation state) and both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the open state (open state).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 4) / Power ON → Power OFF>
The state indicated by symbol T5 in Figure 27 is a state in which, in the upper door open state and lower door open state indicated by symbol T4 in the same figure, the lower door is closed, the upper door is open state and the lower door is closed state, and the power supply SW 244 is operated by the gaming facility manager, changing the power of the power supply device 252 from ON to OFF.

In this state, although not shown in the figure, the power supply unit 252 is turned off and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, is stopped, so the displays on the LCD display unit 157, setting value display unit 101a, dispensing number display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 do not output sound.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 4)/Power ON with upper door open and lower door closed>
The state indicated by symbol T6 in Figure 27 is the state in which the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager and the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON when the upper door is open, the lower door is closed, and the setting key SW is ON, as indicated by symbol T5 in the same figure.

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the upper door) is in the door open state (open state), the slot machine is configured to not start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) but to start control to the playable state and not to issue a door open notification.

In other words, in this example, the condition for "starting control to a playable state without starting control to change to setting change mode (setting change state) and not issuing a door open notification" is that the upper door (door body) of the upper and lower doors (door bodies) is in an open state (open state). It is also possible to set the condition for "starting control to a playable state without starting control to change to setting change mode (setting change state) and not issuing a door open notification" as well, when the lower door (door body) is in an open state (open state).

In this state, since the lower door is closed, as shown in Figure 27 (d), no door-open notification is issued by the LCD display device 157, no door-open notification is issued by the dispensed number display 127, and no door-open notification sound is output by the speakers 272 and 277.

In this example, in the irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be transitioned to the playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing setting values.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 4) / lower door closed state → lower door open state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T7 in Figure 27 is a state in which the lower door is opened when the upper door is in the open state and the lower door is in the closed state indicated by reference symbol T6 in the same figure, resulting in the upper door being in the open state and the lower door being in the open state.

In this state, since the lower door is open, a door-open notification sound is output from speakers 272 and 277, as shown in Figure 27 (e), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door-open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letter "dr" is lit to indicate that the lower door is open).

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is turned ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, if the open/close sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the open state (open state), control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is not initiated even if the setting key SW (operation means) is turned ON (second operation state) and both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the open state (open state).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5)>
Next, a setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 5) will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 5) is performed.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5)/Starting setting change mode>
In FIG. 28, the state indicated by the symbol T1 is a state in which, with the setting key SW in the ON state, the power SW 244 is operated by the manager of the gaming facility, and the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 252 (power supply means) begins, the slot machine in this example can begin control into setting change mode (setting change state) if both the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) are met.

In other words, the slot machine of this example is configured to transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on while the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open and the setting key SW is being turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 28, the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are met and the mode is transitioned to setting change mode, and as shown in Figure 28(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed).

In addition, since this state indicates that the upper and lower doors are in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5)/updating (changing) setting values>
The states indicated by symbols T2 and T3 in FIG. 28 are states in which the reset SW (second operating means) 243 has been pressed once by the gaming establishment manager in the setting change mode.

In this state, a single operation (operation to update the setting value) of the reset SW (second operating means) 243 is detected, and the current setting value, Setting 2, is updated to Setting 3 (an undetermined setting value). After that, as shown in Figure 28 (b), the setting value display device 101a displays a number (3 in this example) indicating the updated, undetermined setting value (Setting 3 in this example).

In addition, because the setting change mode is active, the setting change sound continues to be output from speakers 272 and 277, and because the upper and lower doors are in the open door body state, the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 continue to issue door open notifications.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5) / Power outage and power restoration>
The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in FIG. 28 are states in which, in the setting change mode, the power supply of the power supply device 252 is turned from ON to OFF, causing a power outage, and then turned ON again, causing a power recovery.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to cut off the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) before operating the start lever (third operating means) 135 (operation to confirm the setting value) in setting change mode (setting change state), and then, if the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, start control to the setting change state before the setting value was updated, and display the setting value before the update.

The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in Figure 28 are those in setting change mode (setting change state) after the setting value has been updated to setting 3 (an undetermined setting value) by operating the reset SW (second operating means) 243 (an operation to update the setting value), but before the start lever 135 (third operating means) is operated (an operation to confirm the setting value). Power is cut off and restored, and the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open when power is restored. Therefore, as shown in Figure 28(c), the setting value display device 101a displays a numeric value (2 in this example) indicating the setting value (setting 2 in this example) before being updated to setting 3 (an undetermined setting value), and speakers 272 and 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Setting is being changed," which notifies users that the setting is being changed).

In addition, since this state indicates that the upper and lower doors are in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open).

The gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) comprises a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door body, a first operating means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operating state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operating state (e.g., an ON state) as its operating states, and a second operating means (e.g., a reset key SW). SW243) and a third operating means (e.g., start lever 135), wherein the first operating means and the second operating means are means provided at positions that can be operated when the door body is in an open state, and the main control means is capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state (e.g., a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, and when the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state, When the first operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when the power supply means starts supplying power, if both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the first operating means is operated to the second operating state are satisfied (for example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is in the ON state, as shown by symbol T2 in Figure 22 (a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and it is possible to update the setting value by operating the second operating means in the setting change state. The updated setting value can be confirmed by operating the third operating means, and after updating the setting value using the second operating means in the setting change state but before operating the third operating means, if the power supply from the power supply means is cut off while the determination means determines that the door is in the open state (for example, turning from power ON to power OFF, as shown by reference symbol T4 in FIG. 28), and then power supply from the power supply means is started again (for example, turning from power OFF to power ON, as shown by reference symbol T5 in FIG. 28), the setting value returns to the value before the update (for example, setting 2).

Generally, when setting settings, amusement parlor staff refer to the previous day's settings when changing settings. However, with the gaming machine in this example, if the power is interrupted under irregular circumstances, i.e., if the power is interrupted unintentionally by the amusement parlor staff, the setting will return to the setting state before the update, and the setting will return to the value before the update. This prevents situations where the setting value before the change becomes unknown, and increases convenience for amusement parlor staff.

In this example, when the setting value is updated and power is lost and then restored while the door is in an open state, control is initiated to change the setting value back to the state before the update. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the setting value is updated and power is lost while the door is open, and then power is restored while the door is in an open state (when power is lost while the door is open → power is restored while the door is open), control may be initiated to change the setting value back to the state before the update. Alternatively, when the setting value is updated and power is lost while the door is closed, and then power is restored while the door is in an open state (when power is lost while the door is closed → power is restored while the door is open), control may be initiated to change the setting value back to the state before the update.

In addition, if the setting value is updated and power is interrupted and restored while the door is closed, control of the updated setting value state to the changed setting state may be initiated.In this case, if the setting value is updated and power is interrupted while the door is closed, and power is restored while the door is closed (power interrupted while the door is closed → power restored while the door is closed), control of the updated setting value state to the changed setting state may be initiated.Alternatively, if the setting value is updated and power is interrupted while the door is open, and power is restored while the door is closed (power interrupted while the door is open → power restored while the door is closed), control of the updated setting value state to the changed setting state may be initiated.

In this example, if you need to temporarily interrupt work such as changing settings, you can simply turn off the power and close the door, allowing you to resume work from where you left off, improving convenience for game parlor staff and others.

Furthermore, if power is interrupted and restored while the door is determined to be in the open state after the start lever 135 is operated in setting change mode but before the setting key is turned from ON to OFF, control may be initiated to return to the setting change state before the setting value was confirmed.

That is, the gaming machine according to this example (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) comprises a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that determines the open/close state of the door, a first operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as its operation states, and a second operation means (e.g., a reset SW 243 ), and a third operating means (e.g., a start lever 135), wherein the first operating means and the second operating means are means provided at positions that can be operated when the door body is in an open state, and the main control means can set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state (e.g., a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, and when the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state, the first operating means When the first operation state is changed to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when the power supply by the power supply means starts, if both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the first operation means is operated to the second operation state are satisfied (for example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is in the ON state as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 22( a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and in the setting change state, it is possible to update the setting value by operating the second operation means, and the updated value can be updated by operating the third operation means. This gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value can be confirmed, and after the third operating means is operated in the setting change state but before the first operating means is operated from the second operating state to the first operating state, if the power supply means cuts off the power supply while the determination means determines that the door is in the open state (for example, changing from power ON to power OFF, as shown by reference symbol T4 in FIG. 28), and then starts supplying power from the power supply means (for example, changing from power OFF to power ON, as shown by reference symbol T5 in FIG. 28), control is initiated to a setting change state in which the setting value has not been confirmed (for example, a setting change mode with setting 2).

With the gaming machine in this example, if the power is interrupted under irregular circumstances, that is, if the power is interrupted in a way that is not intended by the gaming parlor staff, the machine will return to a setting change state in which the setting value has not been confirmed, thereby preventing the setting value from becoming an unintended value for some reason.

Furthermore, even if the condition that the first operating means is operated to the second operating state is met when the power supply means starts supplying power, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in Figure 24, the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the closed state), control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the first operating means is operated to the second operating state, the determination means Even if the determination means determines that the door is in the open state, the playable state is maintained without initiating control to the setting change state; and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door is in the closed state and the first operating means is operated to the second operating state, the power supply from the power supply means is cut off to set the door in the open state, and then when the power supply from the power supply means is started, control to the setting change state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is set in the door open state, the game will transition to the setting change mode).

With this configuration, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to the setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values. Furthermore, since the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved and the game can be transitioned to the setting change state, convenience for game parlor staff and others can be improved.

Furthermore, even if the condition that the first operating means is operated to the second operating state is met when power supply by the power supply means is started, if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in Figure 24, when the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in the closed state), control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and if the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the first operating means is operated to the second operating state, the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state in the playable state. When this is determined, control to the setting confirmation state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T3 in FIG. 24, the front door 102 is determined to be in the door open state, and the setting confirmation mode is entered), and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the first operating means is operated to the second operating state, if the power supply by the power supply means is cut off to open the door body and then power supply by the power supply means is started, control to the setting change state is initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in FIG. 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is in the door open state, the setting change mode is entered).

With this configuration, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the system can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values and allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for gaming establishment staff and others. Furthermore, the irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be resolved and the system can transition to the setting change state, improving convenience for gaming establishment staff and others.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5)/Changing setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T6 and T7 in FIG. 28 are states in which the reset SW243 has been pressed once by the gaming establishment manager in the setting change mode.

In this state, a single operation of the reset SW243 is detected, and after a change in the setting value (in this example, from setting 2 to setting 3) is made, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3), as shown in Figure 28 (d).

In addition, because the setting change mode is active, the setting change sound continues to be output from speakers 272 and 277, and because the upper and lower doors are open, the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 continue to issue door open notifications.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5) / Power outage and power restoration>
The states indicated by symbols T8 and T9 in FIG. 28 are states in which, in the setting change mode, the power supply of the power supply device 252 is turned from ON to OFF, causing a power outage, and then turned ON again, causing a power recovery.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to cut off the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) before operating the start lever 135 (operation to confirm the setting value) in setting change mode (setting change state), and then, when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started again, if at least one of the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) is in a closed state (in this example, the upper door and lower door), display the (unconfirmed) setting value that was displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off.

In Figure 28, the states indicated by symbols T8 and T9 occur when power is cut off and restored in setting change mode (setting change state) before the start lever 135 is operated (the operation to confirm the setting value), and the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are closed when power is restored. Therefore, as shown in Figure 28(e), the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the (unconfirmed) setting value (in this example, setting 3) that was displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off, and speakers 272 and 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Setting change in progress" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, since the upper and lower doors are closed in this state, door-open notifications by the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 have ceased.

In this example, if the power supply from the power supply means is cut off before the operation to confirm the setting value is performed in the setting change state, and then at least one of the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) is closed when power supply from the power supply means is started again, the (unconfirmed) setting value that was displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off will be displayed. Therefore, if the work needs to be interrupted while changing settings, etc., the work can be resumed from where it left off by turning off the power and closing the door body, thereby increasing convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

In this example, power is cut off and restored before the start lever 135 is operated (the operation to confirm the setting value) in setting change mode (setting change state), and if the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are closed when power is restored, the (unconfirmed) setting value displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off is displayed. However, if either the upper door (door body) or lower door (door body) is closed when power is restored, the (unconfirmed) setting value displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off may also be displayed.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6)>
Next, a setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 6) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation in the door closed state (Example 6) is performed.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6)/Starting setting change mode>
In FIG. 29, the state indicated by the symbol T1 is a state in which, with the setting key SW in the ON state, the power SW 244 is operated by the gaming facility manager, and the power supply of the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are met and the mode is entered, so as shown in Figure 29 (a), the administrator screen SD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed) is output from the speakers 272, 277.

In addition, since this state indicates that the upper and lower doors are in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6)/updating (changing) setting values>
The states indicated by symbols T2 and T3 in FIG. 29 are states in which the reset SW (second operating means) 243 has been pressed once by the gaming establishment manager in the setting change mode.

In this state, a single operation (operation to update the setting value) of the reset SW (second operating means) 243 is detected, and the current setting value, Setting 2, is updated to Setting 3 (an undetermined setting value). After that, as shown in FIG. 29(b), the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (3 in this example) indicating the updated, undetermined setting value (Setting 3 in this example).

In addition, because the setting change mode is active, the setting change sound continues to be output from speakers 272 and 277, and because the upper and lower doors are in the open door body state, the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 continue to issue door open notifications.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6)/Determining setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T3 and T4 in FIG. 29 are states in which the start lever (third operating means) 135 has been pressed once by the gaming facility manager in the setting change mode.

In this state, since one operation of the start lever (third operating means) 135 (an operation to confirm the setting value) has been detected, the updated, unconfirmed setting value (in this example, setting 3) is stored in a specified memory area as a confirmed setting value.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6) / Power interruption and restoration with door open>
The states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 in FIG. 29 are states in which, in the setting change mode, the power supply of the power supply device 252 is turned from ON to OFF, causing a power outage, and then turned ON again, causing a power recovery.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to, in the setting change mode (setting change state), operate the start lever (third operating means) 135 (operation to confirm the setting value) and then cut off the power supply from the power supply unit 252 (power supply means), and then, if the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open when the power supply from the power supply unit 252 (power supply means) is started, start control to a setting change state in which the setting value has not been confirmed, and display the setting value before confirmation.

In Figure 29, the states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 occur after the start lever 135 (third operating means) is operated (an operation to confirm the setting value) and power is cut and restored, and when power is restored the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are in the open state. Therefore, as shown in Figure 29(c), the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the setting value before it was confirmed (in this example, setting 2), and speakers 272 and 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, since this state indicates that the upper and lower doors are in an open state, the LCD display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed coin count display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to indicate that the upper and lower doors are open).

In this example, if the power is interrupted and restored while the door is open after the setting value has been confirmed, control is initiated to change the setting to a state where the setting value has not been confirmed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the power is interrupted and restored while the door is open after the setting value has been confirmed, control may also be initiated to change the setting to a state where the setting value has been confirmed.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off while the door is open after the set value has been confirmed, and then power is restored while the door is open (when power is cut off while the door is open → power is restored while the door is open), control may be initiated to change the setting from the state of the set value before it was confirmed.Alternatively, if the power is cut off while the door is closed after the set value has been confirmed, and then power is restored while the door is open (when power is cut off while the door is closed → power is restored while the door is open), control may be initiated to change the setting from the state of the set value before it was confirmed.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6)/Changing setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T7 and T8 in FIG. 29 are states in which the reset SW243 has been pressed once by the gaming establishment manager in the setting change mode.

In this state, since a single operation (operation to update the setting value) of the reset SW (second operating means) 243 is detected, the current setting value, Setting 2, is updated to Setting 3 (an undetermined setting value), and then, as shown in Figure 29 (d), the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the updated, undetermined setting value (in this example, Setting 3).

In addition, because the setting change mode is active, the setting change sound continues to be output from speakers 272 and 277, and because the upper and lower doors are in the open door body state, the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 continue to issue door open notifications.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6)/Determining setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T8 and T9 in FIG. 29 are states in which the manager of the gaming establishment has pressed the start lever (third operating means) 135 once in the setting change mode.

In this state, since one operation of the start lever (third operating means) 135 (an operation to confirm the setting value) has been detected, the updated, unconfirmed setting value (in this example, setting 3) is stored in a specified memory area as a confirmed setting value.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6) / Power interruption and restoration with door closed>
The states indicated by symbols T10 and T11 in FIG. 29 are states in which, in the setting change mode, the power supply of the power supply device 252 is turned from ON to OFF, causing a power outage, and then turned ON again, causing a power recovery.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to, in the setting change mode (setting change state), operate the start lever (third operating means) 135 (operation to confirm the setting value) and then cut off the power supply from the power supply unit 252 (power supply means), and then, when power supply from the power supply unit 252 (power supply means) is started again, if at least one of the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) is in a closed state (in this example, the upper door and lower door), start control to a setting change state in which the setting value has been confirmed and display the confirmed setting value.

The states indicated by symbols T10 and T11 in Figure 29 occur when power is cut off and restored after the start lever 135 is operated (to confirm the setting value) in setting change mode (setting change state), and the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are closed when power is restored.As a result, as shown in Figure 29(e), the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the confirmed setting value (in this example, setting 3), and speakers 272 and 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Setting change in progress" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, since the upper and lower doors are closed in this state, door-open notifications by the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed coin count display 127 have ceased.

In this example, if you need to temporarily interrupt work such as changing settings, you can simply turn off the power and close the door, allowing you to resume work from where you left off, improving convenience for game parlor staff and others.

In this example, the confirmed setting value is displayed when power is cut and restored after the start lever 135 is operated (operation to confirm the setting value) in setting change mode (setting change state), and the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are closed when power is restored. However, the confirmed setting value may also be displayed when either the upper door (door body) or lower door (door body) is closed when power is restored.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off when the door is closed after the set value has been confirmed, and then power is restored when the door is closed (when power is cut off when the door is closed → power is restored when the door is closed), control may be initiated to change the state of the set value after confirmation to a setting change state.Alternatively, if the power is cut off when the door is open after the set value has been confirmed, and then power is restored when the door is closed (when power is cut off when the door is open → power is restored when the door is closed), control may be initiated to change the state of the set value after confirmation to a setting change state.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 6) / Door open state, pressing operation of reset SW>
In Figure 29, the state indicated by symbol T12 is the state in which the upper and lower doors have changed from a closed door state to an open door state, and the subsequent states indicated by symbols T13 and T14 are states in which the reset SW (second operating means) 243 has been pressed once by the gaming facility manager in the setting change mode for the open door state.

In this state, in setting change mode, one operation of the reset SW (second operating means) 243 (operation to update the setting value) is detected. However, in this example, since control to a setting change state in which the setting value has been confirmed has begun after the most recent power outage and restoration, the pressing operation of the reset SW (second operating means) 243 (operation to update the setting value) is invalid, and the setting value is not updated.

The configuration of the "gaming machine" according to the present invention is not limited to the configurations described in the embodiments illustrated in Figures 22 and 23, or in Examples 1 to 6 illustrated in Figures 24 to 29. By replacing or combining one or more of the configurations described in any of these embodiments with one or more of the configurations described in any of the other embodiments, the range of play may be further expanded.

<Setting change operations with the door closed/Summary>
As explained above, a gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a main control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (for example, an open/close sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door, and an operation means (for example, and a setting key SW), wherein the operation means is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the door body is in an open state, and the main control means can set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state (for example, a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (for example, a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (for example, a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values, and when the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state, the operation means When the power supply is started from the first operation state to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when the power supply means starts to supply power, if both the conditions that the door body is in the open state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state are met (for example, the state in which the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is ON, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 22( a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and when the power supply is started by the power supply means, it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and when the power supply is started, it is possible to start control to the setting change state Even if the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in Figure 24, when the setting key SW is in an ON state but the front door 102 is in a closed state), the control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, even if the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state, the game machine is characterized in that the control to the setting change state is not started and the playable state is maintained.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of setting values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 2) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an opening/closing sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states. The operation means is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the door is in an open state, and the main control means can set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state (for example, a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (for example, a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (for example, a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, and when the determination means determines that the door is in an open state, when the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, It is possible to start control to the confirmation state, and when the power supply by the power supply means starts, if both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the operating means is operated to the second operating state are satisfied (for example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is in the ON state as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 22(a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and even if the condition that the operating means is operated to the second operating state is satisfied when the power supply by the power supply means starts, the determining means determines that the door body is in the closed state. When the setting key SW is ON but the front door 102 is closed (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 24, when the setting key SW is ON but the front door 102 is closed), control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state; and when the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, in the playable state, the determination means determines that the door is open, and starts control to the setting confirmation state (for example, in the state shown by symbol T3 in FIG. 24, the front door 102 is determined to be open and the game transitions to setting confirmation mode).

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the machine can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This prevents fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values and also allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for gaming parlor staff and others.

Furthermore, in the playable state where the determination means determines that the door is closed and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, the power supply from the power supply means may be cut off to open the door, and then when the power supply from the power supply means is started, control to the setting change state may be initiated (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in Figure 24, when power is restored after the front door 102 is opened, the device may transition to setting change mode).

This configuration eliminates the irregular state in which the door is closed and the operating means is set to the second operating state, allowing the machine to transition to a setting change state, thereby improving convenience for game parlor staff and others.

The configuration of the "gaming machine" according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. For example, if the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state after a power outage and restoration, control to the playable state is initiated without initiating control to the setting change state. However, if the state before the power outage and restoration was the setting change state, control to the setting change state may be initiated after the power outage and restoration when the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, an "enclosed gaming machine" is one that circulates gaming balls enclosed within the gaming machine. The main control unit, first sub-control unit, and second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, while two-way communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to other configurations, the range of play may be further expanded.

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
a main control means for controlling a game based on one of the plurality of setting values;
power supply means capable of supplying power to the main control means;
A door body that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed;
A determination means for determining the open/closed state of the door body;
A gaming machine equipped with an operating means having a first operating state and a second operating state as operating states,
The operating means is
A means is provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state,
The main control means
It is possible to set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can proceed, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values,
When the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, control to the setting confirmation state can be started,
When the power supply means starts to supply power, if both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the operating means is operated to the second operating state are satisfied, it is possible to start control to the setting change state,
When the power supply means starts to supply power, even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied, if the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state, the control to the playable state is started without starting the control to the setting change state,
In the playable state in which the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, even if the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state, the playable state is maintained without starting control to the setting change state;
In the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, the power supply means cuts off the power supply to the door body to open the state, and then when the power supply means starts to supply power, the control to the setting change state is started;
The setting change state is maintained even when the door body is in a closed state in the setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 2)
a main control means for controlling a game based on one of the plurality of setting values;
power supply means capable of supplying power to the main control means;
A door body that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed;
A determination means for determining the open/closed state of the door body;
A gaming machine equipped with an operating means having a first operating state and a second operating state as operating states,
The operating means is
A means is provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state,
The main control means
It is possible to set one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can be played, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values,
When the determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, and the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state,
When the power supply means starts to supply power, if both the condition that the door body is in the open state and the condition that the operating means is operated to the second operating state are satisfied, it is possible to start control to the setting change state,
When the power supply means starts to supply power, even if the condition that the operation means is operated to the second operation state is satisfied, if the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state, the control to the playable state is started without starting the control to the setting change state,
When the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state in the playable state, if the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state, control to the setting confirmation state is started,
In the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, the power supply means cuts off the power supply to the door body to open the state, and then when the power supply means starts to supply power, the control to the setting change state is started;
The setting change state is maintained even when the door body is in a closed state in the setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

Next, using Figures 30 to 52, we will explain in detail other gaming machines that can be used with the present invention (for example, pinball gaming machines such as pachinko machines and reel gaming machines such as slot machines). Note that, as a general rule, the reference numerals shown in Figures 30 to 52 will only be used in explanations using Figures 30 to 52, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 30 to 52 will take precedence in explanations using Figures 30 to 52.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 30. This figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that allows players to win profits when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as the base shaft of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via hinges 112. The main body 104 is also formed in a frame shape, with a space 114 inside. Staff at the store (gaming parlor) where this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and it is equipped with a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door element with a locking function and is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped and has an opening on the inside. Gaming parlor staff can also open and close this front frame door 106, and it is also equipped with a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front of the game board 200 define a space in which the play area 124 is located. The front frame door 106 is an example of a door body. In this embodiment, lamps that use LED light sources are also referred to as lamps.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door element that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing the opening lever 1081, which can be operated when the front frame door 106 is open. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The door 108 with ball storage tray is equipped with a ball storage tray 126 that can store multiple game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a ball removal button 130 that is operated by the player to eject the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126, a ball launch handle 134 that is operated by the player to launch the game balls that have been guided to the launching device 110 into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 that is operated by the player to change the effect mode of various effect devices, a button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to light up, and a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending command to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade. Although not shown in Figure 1, a return operation button is also provided to the right of the ball lending operation button 140, which is used to instruct the card unit to return the player's balance. It also has an operation key unit 190 on which a cross key and a decision button are located.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and comprises a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, this launching device 110 launches a game ball toward the play area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), and is an example of a launching means.

Figure 31 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 30.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 consists of a cylindrical member, and inside it is equipped with a dispensing motor, sprocket, and dispensing sensor (not shown). This dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains gaming balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor and rotating it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained gaming balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies driving force to gaming balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of gaming balls sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 34) when a gaming ball is passing, and the other signal, either a high or low, when a gaming ball is not passing. Gaming balls that pass this payout sensor are configured to travel through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage tray 126 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to award (pay out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to that award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152 are a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 34) that performs overall control processing for the game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 34) that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 34) that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and an error release switch that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 34) that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls and that releases errors when operated by a gaming store employee. The system is equipped with a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see Figure 34) that performs control processing related to the launch of gaming balls, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see Figure 34) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off when operated by an amusement facility employee and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated provided that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of several settings with at least different jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may also be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed.

The reel ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and located inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to store staff. The reel ratio/setting display 196 consists of two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, with a single-digit 7-segment LED modularized on the right side. The reel ratio monitor is an indicator that reports the reel ratio (YH) and consecutive reel ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of single-color LEDs, such as red, green, blue, and white, but may also be capable of emitting light in three colors: red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a portion of the reel ratio/setting display 196 may be mounted on the game board 200, for example, to be visible to players.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 32 is a simplified front view of the gaming board 200. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the top and the lower side as the bottom. Although not shown in Figure 32, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the far side may be referred to as the rear side or the back side.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the play area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

A variety of structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, one possible structure is to insert the left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the game board 200 as seen from the front into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front, and then rotate the game board 200 around this position while pressing the right side (right side) 200b of the game board 200 against the main body 104 to set it in place. This structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201, which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the game board 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game to prevent further play) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may also be a magnetic sensor or other fraud detection sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, defining a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

Areas on the game board 200 other than the play area 124 may be referred to as non-play areas. The play area 124 and non-play areas can be distinguished by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, the area inside the area through which game balls pass when the game ball's launch strength is at its maximum may be referred to as the play area 124. The play area 124 may include areas through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the play area 124. The play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area because game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area because game balls do not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but areas through which game balls do not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may also be referred to as non-flow-down areas.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is located approximately in the center of the play area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the play area 124, and on the main control lamp board 254 are arranged a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220. In addition, the main control lamp board 254 is further provided with a high probability lamp HL, an electric support lamp TL, and a right hit lamp RL. Note that, below, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display a different decorative pattern, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used in the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are capable of displaying various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The regular map display device 210 is a display device for displaying regular maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are each configured with a 7-segment LED.

The regular symbol reserve lamp 216 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserve lamp 220 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. Note that in this embodiment, the first special symbol reserve lamp is not provided, but it may be provided.

The high probability lamp HL is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or that a high probability state is about to occur. The electric support lamp TL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in an electric support state where the variable display time of normal symbols is shortened and the blade members 2311 (see Figure 33) of the electric tulip (electric chute) described below are likely to open for a long period of time. The right hit indicator lamp RL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, or an electric support state, and that the player can benefit from these states by hitting right. In addition, in the event of a jackpot, a round indicator lamp may be provided to show the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to that jackpot.

The game board 200 shown in Figure 32 has a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 ejects game balls that enter a warp entrance 242a located on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from a warp exit 242b onto the stage 244. The stage 244 is located below and forward of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the stage where game balls that pass through the warp device 242 exhibit movements such as reciprocating and rotational motion. The reciprocating and rotational motion of the game balls increases the time they remain on the stage 244. A stage cover 245 is provided on the stage 244.

In addition, a first movable effect unit 7 is positioned above the play area 124 and supported by the main body 104. Furthermore, a second movable effect unit 8 is positioned below and behind the stage 244 and supported by the main body 104, but the second movable effect unit 8 is not visible in Figure 32.

As shown in FIG. 32, a portion of the top of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. In addition, the upper right portion of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal map start opening 228 is located in the lower center of the gaming board 200. In this embodiment, one normal map start opening 228 is located in the lower center of the gaming board 200. When a ball enters the normal map start opening 228, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 31 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, four balls), and the entering game ball is guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged toward the game island. Note that the game ball that enters the normal map start opening 228 may be returned to the board surface, and no prize balls may be paid out. The normal map start opening 228 may also be located in the left side area. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the normal map start opening 228, the pachinko machine 100 begins normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In addition, a general prize opening is also located in the lamp unit 9 extending to the left. Although not shown, general prize openings are provided in several other locations in the game area. When a ball enters a general prize opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, determining that the general prize opening has been won, and driving the payout device 152, which discharges a predetermined number of balls (for example, four) as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. The balls discharged into the ball storage tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and this configuration allows prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the win. Balls that enter a general prize opening are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 before being discharged towards the game island.

As shown in Figure 33(a), the attacker unit 23 is provided with a first special starting hole (variable) 231, a second special starting hole 232, multiple variable winning holes (attackers) 234, 235, and a normal electric gate 228g. As shown in Figure 32, the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center is configured such that it is difficult for a game ball to enter it when hit from the right. Meanwhile, a special route 244a is provided in the center of the above-mentioned stage 244, making it easier for a ball that reaches the stage 244 to enter the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center of the game board 200. It is also possible to aim for the normal starting hole 228 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the normal starting hole 228 located at the bottom center of the game board 200 is a starting hole where a ball can be expected to enter when hit from the left. Thus, in this embodiment, in normal game mode, where left-handed hitting is recommended, the game is played primarily by having the game ball enter the normal map start hole 228 and displaying the normal map fluctuations on the normal map display device 210.

Furthermore, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 is an outlet 240 that guides balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharges them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies a ball stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the launch position on the launch rail, which drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, causing the ball to pass through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 using the launch rod and launch hammer and launch into the play area 124. The ball then flows downward, changing direction using the ball direction changing member 236 and play pins, and either enters one of the various winning slots or starting slots, or reaches the outlet 240 without entering any winning slots or starting slots, or simply passing through the normal starting slot 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower edge of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may also be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the outlet 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage; however, it is also possible for only game balls discharged from the outlet 240 to pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, we will explain the attacker unit 23 located in the lower right corner of the play area 124.

The attacca unit 23 shown in Figures 33(a) and 33(b) is arranged on the back side of the attacca front plate 2301 (Figure 32). An attacca seal 2302 is affixed to the front of the attacca front plate 2301 (see Figure 32). Note that the decorative pattern of the attacca seal 2302 is omitted in Figure 32.

As shown in Figures 33(a) and 33(b), the attacca unit 23 is composed of a unit main body 32a placed on the gaming board 200 side and a unit cover body 23b that covers the front side of the unit main body 32a.

The unit main body 32a has an electric chute-type special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231, a first variable winning opening 234 which serves as the first attacker, a second variable winning opening 235 which serves as the second attacker, and a second special symbol starting opening 232. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231, the ball detection sensor 2312 detects it and, assuming that the special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231 has been won, activates the payout device 152 and discharges a predetermined number of balls (e.g., one ball) into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Furthermore, the game ball that has entered the special symbol 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is discharged from the discharge opening 231a to the back side of the game board 200. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a prize in the first variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) are discharged as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126. Furthermore, a specific area 234v is provided inside the first variable winning opening 234 through which a gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 can pass, and in this embodiment, when a gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, the game transitions to a big jackpot game. Note that a specific area may be provided inside the second variable winning opening 235 without providing the first variable winning opening 234. When a ball enters second variable winning opening 235, ball detection sensor 2352 detects it, and as a winning ball, second variable winning opening 235 is activated, and payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) into ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Also, when a ball enters special chart 2 starting opening 232, a ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning ball, special chart 2 starting opening 232 is activated, and payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 1 ball) into ball storage tray 126 as prize balls.

The size of the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 can be changed by the shutter member 2311, and the shutter member 2311 shown in Figure 33(a) is movable forward and backward. When the shutter member 2311 is advanced forward, the game ball passes over the advanced shutter member 2311. That is, in Figure 33(a), the game ball passes from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2312 of the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is located below the shutter member 2311, downstream, facing upstream. Therefore, when the shutter member 2311 is advanced forward, the game ball can easily pass through the ball detection sensor 2312, and the special chart 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. A gaming ball that passes through ball detection sensor 2312 passes through ball passage 2313 and is guided to the back of the gaming board 200 through outlet 231a. On the other hand, when shutter member 2311 is retracted to the rear, it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass through ball detection sensor 2312, and special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 becomes a state in which it is difficult to win. In addition, in this embodiment, a normal power activation gate 228g is located near the upstream side of special chart 2 starting port 232, and when a gaming ball passes through normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311, described below, is activated regardless of the status of the normal chart variable display. In other words, in this embodiment, a gaming ball that passes through normal power activation gate 228g enters special chart 2 starting port 232 directly.

The second variable winning opening 235, which serves as the second attacker, is located downstream in the direction of ball rolling (flow) from the first variable winning opening 234, which serves as the first attacker. The size of this second variable winning opening 235 is variable using a shutter member 2351, and the shutter member 2351 shown in Figure 33(a) is movable forward and backward. When the shutter member 2351 is advanced forward, the game ball passes over the advanced shutter member 2351. In other words, in Figure 33(a), the game ball passes from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning opening is located below the shutter member 2351 and faces upward. Therefore, when the shutter member 2351 is advanced forward, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, and the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize. On the other hand, when the shutter member 2351 is retracted to the rear, game balls can easily pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, and the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where winning is easy.

The first variable winning opening 234 can be switched between an open and closed state by the door element 2341. When the door element 2341 is in the open state, game balls can be received into the first variable winning opening 234, but when it is in the closed state, game balls cannot be received (or are difficult to receive) into the first variable winning opening 234.

The second special symbol start opening 232 is located where the gaming ball falls. This second special symbol start opening 232 has a fixed size winning opening, and gaming balls that enter the second special symbol start opening 232 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then ejected onto the gaming island side.

As shown in Figure 33 (b), the unit cover body 23b is provided with a ball passage forming wall 230r that protrudes toward the unit main body 23a. The ball passage forming wall 230r forms a ball passage 239 that is inclined toward the downstream side, along which a gaming ball that enters the attacker unit 23 rolls. Furthermore, the ball passage forming wall 230r is not provided at the position where the shutter member 2311 advances or the position where the shutter member 2351 advances, and the advanced shutter member 2311 or shutter member 2351 serves as the ball passage forming wall. In other words, when the shutter member 2311 or shutter member 2351 advances forward, it is inclined downward toward the downstream side, and this inclination is used to roll the gaming ball downstream.

The solid arrows in Figure 33(a) indicate the path of the game ball that rolls over the ball passage forming wall 230r and the advanced shutter member 2311 (the same applies to the arrows in the following figures). In other words, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 shows the route toward the special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231, as indicated by the solid arrow. Also, the dashed arrows in Figure 33(a) indicate the path of the game ball that rolls over the ball passage forming wall 230r and the advanced shutter member 2351 when the shutter member 2311 retracts and the shutter member 2351 advances. In other words, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 shows the route toward the special chart 2 starting port 232, as indicated by the dashed arrow. Here, when the shutter member 2351 is retracted, as shown by the solid arrows at the bottom of Figure 33 (a), the game ball falls from the shutter member 2311 and the shutter member 2351 and enters the second variable winning opening 235, and after being detected as a winning ball by the ball detection sensor 2352, it passes through the ball passage 2343 and is guided to the back of the game board through the discharge opening 235a.

A game ball that falls to just before the second special symbol start port 232 passes through the normal power operation gate 228g and enters the second special symbol start port 232, causing the shutter member 2311 to advance forward and starting the special symbol 2 variable game. In this embodiment, ribs 23r5 are protruding from the left and right sides of the upstream side of the normal power operation gate 228g so that most game balls flowing down toward the second special symbol start port 232 are guided by the normal power operation gate 228g. However, some game balls flowing down toward the second special symbol start port 232 may pass through the normal power operation gate 228g, while others may not. Alternatively, the game balls may be guided by the normal power operation gate 228g so that all game balls pass through the normal power operation gate 228g. Furthermore, because this embodiment is configured in this manner, for example, when the second special symbol display device 214 is prevented from displaying a pattern change of special symbol 2 while the first special symbol display device 212 is allowed to display a pattern change of special symbol 1, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of irregular gameplay, such as activating the shutter member 2311 by targeting only the normal power operating gate 228g and displaying a pattern change of special symbol 1.

As shown in Figure 33(a), multiple ribs are provided on the unit main body 23a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33(b), multiple ribs are also provided on the unit cover body 23b. Looking upstream along the flow of the game balls, multiple ribs are spaced apart and protrude from the downstream side of the first variable winning opening 234 to just before the shutter member 2311 of the special game ball starting opening 231. That is, in the passage that passes through the first variable winning opening 234 and turns back in an S shape, four ribs 23r1 protrude from the unit main body 23a side and five ribs 23f1 protrude from the unit cover body 23b side. These ribs 23r1, 23f1 are alternately arranged in a plan view to prevent balls from clogging the passage. The passage in which ribs 23r1 and 23f1 are arranged faces downward, and three ribs 23r2 protrude from the downward-facing passage on the unit main body 23a side and two ribs 23f2 protrude from the unit cover body 23b side. These ribs 23r2 and 23f2 are similarly arranged alternately in a side view. In this embodiment, because of this configuration, a game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 flows down while colliding with the ribs before reaching the shutter member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port 231, which may reduce the flow speed of the game ball.

In addition, a rib 2314 protrudes above the shutter member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole 231 in the unit main body 23a, and a rib 2315 protrudes above the shutter member 2311 in the unit cover body 23b. As a result, for example, if the shutter member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole 231 is operated for a short period of time to make it difficult for a ball to enter the special figure 1 starting hole 231, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2311 can be caused to collide with the ribs 2314 and 2315, slowing the ball's downward flow speed and making it even more difficult for the ball to enter the special figure 1 starting hole 231.

Furthermore, four ribs 23r3 are protruding along the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 above the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit main body 23a, and four ribs 23f3 are protruding along the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 above the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit cover body 23b. These ribs 23r3, 23f3 are arranged alternately in a plan view to prevent ball clogging in the flow path. Furthermore, in this embodiment, due to this configuration, multiple game balls may be more likely to become trapped on the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235. Furthermore, two ribs 23f3 are also arranged downstream of the second variable winning opening 235 in the unit cover body 23b. The width of the ball passage 239 is specified on the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 to prevent multiple game balls from flowing down in parallel. In this embodiment, because of this configuration, game balls rolling on the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 collide with the ribs as they flow down, which may reduce the speed at which the game balls flow down.

The ball passage 239 downstream of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 has a downwardly S-shaped passageway, which then bends downward and is guided to the normal-operated gate 228g. Here, at the bend in the S-shaped portion of the ball passage 239, two ribs 23f4 protrude from the corners of the ball passage-forming wall 230r to guide the flow path of the game balls flowing down there. This may prevent ball jams from occurring. It may also reduce the flow speed of game balls flowing down the ball passage 239. In this embodiment, the time it takes for a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 to enter the special game starting opening 232 is configured to be the time required to fire two or more game balls (e.g., 1.2 seconds). This may prevent deviations from the designed ball payout rate, for example, when the game state changes. Note that as long as two or more shots can be fired, the time is not limited to 1.2 seconds, but can be any time longer than 1.2 seconds.

In addition, in the ball passage 239 downstream of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235, the only winning opening (winning opening) through which a game ball is paid out when a ball enters is the special chart 2 starting opening 232. Note that if a ball does not enter the special chart 2 starting opening 232, it may enter the outlet 240, but no prize balls will be paid out even if the ball enters the outlet 240. This may make it possible to prevent deviation from the designed ball payout rate, for example, when the game state changes.

Specifically, during a jackpot game, most game balls will generally enter the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, and therefore, in the a2 time-saving game state that transitions to the jackpot game described below, there are (in most cases) no game balls remaining downstream of the second variable winning opening 235. Therefore, by configuring the time it takes for a game ball flowing down the top surface of the shutter member 2351 to enter the special chart 2 starting opening 232 to be a time that allows two or more game balls to be fired (e.g., 1.2 seconds), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of winning game balls exceeds the number of game balls fired in the a2 time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the incitement of gambling desires. If the time it takes for the ball to enter another winning slot (special chart 2 starting slot 232) from the top of the shutter member 2351 is short, it may enter the winning slot (special chart 2 starting slot 232) before the game ball is released in the A2 time-saving game state, resulting in a situation where a prize ball is paid out even though the game ball has not been released, which can encourage gambling.

In the above example, the ribs are provided on both the unit main body 23a and the unit cover body 23b, but some may be provided only on the unit main body 23a side, or some may be provided only on the unit cover body 23b side. Furthermore, the configuration may also include ribs provided only on the unit main body 23a side, or ribs provided only on the unit cover body 23b side.

As described above, in the attacker unit 23 according to this embodiment, the attacker for the first variable winning slot 234 is an attacker that opens and closes during small win play, and the attacker for the second variable winning slot 235 is an attacker that opens and closes during big win play. In the special symbol low probability time-saving play state, as described below, a right hit is made, and the A2 time-saving play state, in which the ball is more likely to land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231, or the A1 time-saving play state, in which the ball is more likely to land in the special symbol 2 starting slot 232, is entered, and the pattern change display is centered on special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for special symbol 1, if a big win does not result, a small win is always obtained. If a small win occurs, the first variable winning slot 234 opens (e.g., 5,800 ms x 1 time), and if special symbol 2 is currently being displayed, the pattern change display for that special symbol 2 is discarded, resulting in a miss. For this reason, in the event of a small win, the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable winning opening 234 and pass through the specific area 234v. This makes it more likely that a jackpot game will be initiated based on the ball passing through the specific area 234v. In this case, the opening operation of the first variable winning opening 234 is treated as the opening operation of the first round, and therefore the round in which the second variable winning opening 235 opens first after the transition to the jackpot game is treated as the second round. Control by game state will be described later. In this embodiment, two variable winning openings, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, are provided, but only one variable winning opening may be provided. In this case, only the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using Figure 34. Note that this figure is a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring program processing anomalies, and a random number generator (counter circuit) 318 (which is assumed to have two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308; the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as the system clock. Additionally, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Note that although the random number generation circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302; a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214; and a drive circuit 325 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the regular pattern display device 210. Drive circuit 326 is connected to drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status indicators 328 (e.g., normal symbol hold lamp 216, special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, high probability lamp, etc.), and drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including predetermined movable parts such as drive means for driving shutter member 2311 of first special symbol start slot 231 as a normal electric device, and drive means for driving door member 2341 of first variable winning slot 234 as a special electric device, and shutter member 2351 of second variable winning slot 235. In this example, crystal oscillator 316a and random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but crystal oscillator 316a may also be included in random number generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 2312 detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol start hole 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 231 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 231. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special symbol start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), this voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it begins game control (starting the main control unit main processing, described below).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, while information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured not to allow the first sub-control unit 400 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured not to allow the dispensing control unit 600 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the control program and various effect data may be stored in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440, which controls the game board lamp 442, and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450, which controls the game frame lamp 452, and controls lighting via serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the performance devices 2-5, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs to the basic circuit 402 detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-5, and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190.

Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, ROM 506 is connected to basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, as well as data for image display. In this embodiment, memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use RAM, which volatilizes stored information when power is cut off.

Next, we will explain the payout control unit 600, launch control unit 630, and power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608, which is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100, via an interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and other information to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. These sensors detect when the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs whether to allow or stop launching, and a control signal output by the launch intensity output circuit located within the ball launch handle 134 that instructs the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, and each device, such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Note that in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. However, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 35(a) to (d), we will explain the types of special and regular symbols that are displayed when stopped by the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100.

Special chart 1 variable play begins when the ball detection sensor 2312 of the first starting port detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 starting port 231, and special chart 2 variable play begins when the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 starting port 232. When special chart 1 variable play begins, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play), for example, by repeatedly turning on and off all seven segments. Furthermore, when special chart 2 variable play begins, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play), by repeatedly turning on and off all seven segments. Then, when the change time determined before the start of special chart 1 change has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1, and when the change time determined before the start of special chart 2 change has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the special chart change display. This special chart change display may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 35(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern pattern for Special Chart 1. Six types of special charts are shown in Figure 35(a): Special Chart A, Special Chart a, Special Chart b, Special Chart c, Special Chart d, and Special Chart h. In Figure 35(a), the white areas indicate the locations of segments that will be unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of segments that will be lit.

In this embodiment, one type of jackpot symbol ("Special Symbol A") is provided as the special symbol's stopping pattern. "Special Symbol A" is a 10-round (R) jackpot symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol that can be expected to result in winning balls in all 10 rounds. "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," and "Special Symbol D" are 10R small jackpot symbols. When "Special Symbol A" stops, a small jackpot game is initiated in which the first variable winning slot 234 is opened and closed. When the game ball passes through specific area 234v during this small jackpot game, a 10R jackpot game is initiated, which is a 10R small jackpot symbol. Note that, while this embodiment provides one type of jackpot symbol and four types of small jackpot symbols, the types of jackpot symbols and small jackpot symbols are not limited to these. It is also possible to provide jackpots that are virtually difficult to win in some rounds.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred during special symbol variable play is made by a hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol that will stop is determined by a software random number lottery. Furthermore, in this embodiment, after a jackpot play ends, the machine may transition to a time-saving state a. Here, the time-saving state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than in a non-time-saving state, such as by shortening the time until the next jackpot begins. More specifically, when the time-saving state a is entered, if the operating conditions for the normal electric device are met, the normal electric device enters an advantageous state (electric support state), making it easier to win the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, and the variable time of special symbol 1 is shortened. A time-saving flag is provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the machine is in an electric support state. That is, in the electric support state, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 tends to open for a longer time per opening (extended electric chute opening period) compared to the non-electric support state. For example, the 40 ms electric chute opening period in the non-electric support state is extended to 5,800 ms in the electric support state. Furthermore, the shutter member 2311 may be configured to open more frequently in the electric support state compared to the non-electric support state (increased electric chute opening frequency). For example, when a normal electric device is activated, the shutter member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state, may open twice in the electric support state (open for 2.5 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, and open again for 2.5 seconds). The extended electric chute opening period and increased electric chute opening frequency increase the probability of the ball landing in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. The time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during jackpot play. This is because, particularly during jackpot games, if game balls are picked up by the electric chute with a small number of winning balls, the player may be disadvantaged if the number of game balls entering the variable winning slots (attackers) 234, 235 decreases. In this embodiment, in the time-saving mode (electric support mode), only the opening period of the shutter member 2311 is extended. However, one or more of several time-saving functions, such as normal probability variation, normal variable variation, extension of the electric chute opening period, and increase in the number of electric chute openings, may also be performed. In the non-electric support mode, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special game slot 1 starting slot 231 than in the electric support mode. As described above, the special game slot 1 starting slot 231 changes between a difficult-to-enter state where game balls have difficulty entering and an easy-to-enter state where game balls can easily enter. In the electric support mode, the entrance of this special game slot 1 starting slot 231 remains in an easy-to-enter state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support mode. In this embodiment, when "Special Chart A", "Special Chart a", "Special Chart b", and "Special Chart c" are displayed in a non-time-saving state, after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the electric support state is maintained until the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or until the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins. When the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins, the state transitions to a non-electric support state. On the other hand, when "Special Chart d" is displayed in a stopped state and the subsequent jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a non-electric support state without transitioning to an electric support state. Also, in the a time-saving state and the c time-saving state, if "Special Chart A" is displayed in a stopped state and a jackpot occurs, the state transitions to an electric support state after the end of the jackpot game until the fifth pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins, or the second pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins. Furthermore, "Special symbols a" to "Special symbols d" result in a small win, and the system transitions to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game associated with that small win. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, the system remains in the electric support state until the first symbol change display by Special symbol 1 or Special symbol 2 begins. However, since the electric support state ends when the first special symbol change display begins, it can be said that the system transitions to a non-electric support state. Note that all jackpot symbols or small jackpot symbols for Special symbol 1 may transition to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, while this embodiment does not involve probability changes (probability change), a probability change symbol may be provided, and when the probability change symbol is displayed and a jackpot game is played, the system may transition to a probability change state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes high (special symbol high probability state) after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when "Special Symbol A" is displayed in a stopped state during non-electric support mode, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," and "Special Symbol C" are displayed in a stopped state, a small jackpot occurs, and when the gaming ball passes through specific area 234v during the small jackpot game, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol D" is displayed in a stopped state, a small jackpot occurs, and when the gaming ball passes through specific area 234v during the small jackpot game, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to non-electric support mode. Furthermore, when "Special Symbol A" is displayed in a stopped state during electric support mode, a jackpot occurs, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to electric support mode. Additionally, when "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D" are displayed, a small win occurs, and when the game ball passes through specific area 234v during the small win game, a big win occurs, and after the big win game ends, the control state essentially becomes a non-electric support state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special Symbol H" is the losing symbol.

Figure 35(b) shows an example of the stopping pattern of special symbol 2. Figure 35(b) shows eight types of special symbols: "Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," "Special Symbol D," "Special Symbol E," "Special Symbol e," "Special Symbol f," "Special Symbol g," and "Special Symbol i," of which three types of special symbols are big win symbols ("Special Symbol B," "Special Symbol C," and "Special Symbol D"), three types of special symbols are small win symbols ("Special Symbol e," "Special Symbol f," and "Special Symbol g"), one type of special symbol is a time-saving symbol ("Special Symbol E"), and one type of special symbol is a losing symbol ("Special Symbol i"). When "Special symbol B" to "Special symbol D" are displayed, a jackpot is awarded, and a 10R jackpot game begins after the symbols stop. When the small jackpot symbols of "Special symbol e" and "Special symbol f" are displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the symbols stop, and the game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the specific area 234v, resulting in a jackpot (type 2 jackpot). In other words, when a small jackpot is awarded with "Special symbol e" or "Special symbol f," if the game ball passes through the specific area 234v to award a jackpot, the game of passing the game ball through the specific area 234v is considered the first round, and then jackpot games from the second round onwards begin. The second variable winning opening 235 opens repeatedly until the tenth round, allowing the player to win balls. Furthermore, if a small win occurs on "special symbol g" and then the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, resulting in a jackpot, the game of passing the game ball through the specific area 234v is considered the first round, and the jackpot game from the second round onwards begins, with the second variable prize opening 235 remaining open until the second round, allowing balls to be won. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the game state after the jackpot game on special symbol 2 ends differs depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot. If a jackpot occurs on "special symbol B," "special symbol C," or "special symbol D" in the non-electric support state, the game will transition to the non-electric support state after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot occurs on "special symbol B," "special symbol C," or "special symbol D" in the a time-saving state or the c time-saving state (a time-saving state transitioned to by the display of a time-saving symbol), the game will transition to the electric support state after the jackpot game ends. More specifically, if a jackpot occurs on "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" in the time-saving state a or c, after the jackpot play ends, the system will essentially enter an electric support state until the fifth pattern change display by Special Chart 1 begins, but if a jackpot occurs on "Special Chart D," the electric support state will end when the jackpot play ends and the first special chart change display begins, so it can be said that the system will essentially transition to a non-electric support state. Furthermore, if a small hit occurs on Special Chart 2 and the game transitions to a jackpot game state during that small hit game, the game state after the end of that jackpot game will differ depending on the game state at the time of the small hit. If a small hit occurs on "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" during non-electric support mode, the game will transition to a non-electric support mode after the end of the jackpot game related to that small hit. If a small hit occurs on "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" during time-saving mode A or time-saving mode C (time-saving mode transitioned to by the display of time-saving symbols), the game will transition to an electric support mode after the end of the jackpot game related to that small hit. However, if a small hit occurs on "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" during time-saving mode A or time-saving mode C, the electric support mode will end when the jackpot game ends and the first special chart variable display begins, so in some cases it can be said that the game will essentially transition to a non-electric support mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "Special Chart E" is displayed, a time-saving symbol is provided that transitions to a special chart time-saving state without resulting in a big win or small win. In other words, "Special Chart E" is a time-saving symbol, and when "Special Chart E" is displayed, the special chart time-saving state is entered, in which the special chart fluctuation display time is shortened until the first pattern fluctuation display of Special Chart 1 begins or the 144th pattern fluctuation display of Special Chart 2 begins. In addition, one type of stopping symbol is provided as a losing symbol. "Special Chart i" is a losing symbol.

Figure 5(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, there are ten types of decorative patterns, "Decoration 1" through "Decoration 10." When a ball is detected as having entered the normal starting slot 228 or the special starting slot 232, a "decorative pattern change display" is performed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, switching the display in the following order: "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 changes the decorative patterns separately from the normal pattern display device 210 and the second special pattern display device 214. It also displays the stop pattern, which is a combination of decorative patterns. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern change display is not performed in response to the special pattern 1 pattern change display, but this may be done.

When announcing a 10R big win, 10R small win, or 2R small win, a decorative pattern combination of three decorative patterns of the same number lined up (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. When announcing a losing pattern, a decorative pattern combination other than those described above (for example, scattered patterns) is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" in the decorative pattern display device 208 to the display of the stopped decorative pattern pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display. The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 35(d) shows an example of a normal symbol stop pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal symbol stop display patterns: "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, and "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start hole 228, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a "normal symbol change display" (normal symbol change game) in which all seven segments are alternately lit and extinguished. Then, after the change time has elapsed, either "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, or "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol, is displayed as a stopped symbol. In Figure 35(d), the white areas in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are extinguished, and the black areas indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map change display" to the stop display of the regular map's stop pattern may be referred to as the regular map change display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 34 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 34 stores special symbol random number values, special symbol round determination random number values, special symbol electric support determination random number values, and special symbol pattern determination random number values. RAM 308 also has a random number counter that generates these various random number values. RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random number values, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the special symbol reserved number storage area. RAM 308 also has a start information storage area for special symbols, which is divided into areas for the maximum number of symbols (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), as well as a random number value storage area for regular symbols. As described below, the start information storage area for special symbols stores multiple types of start information as a set, with one set per area in order of winning (reserved order).

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 shown in Figure 34 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in Figure 36 in accordance with the control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. This initial setting 1 sets the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, sets the interrupt mask, initializes the I/O 310, initializes various variables stored in the RAM 308, and sets operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value for the WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the process monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (the CPU 304 has detected a power interruption), the process returns to step S103. If the low voltage signal is OFF (the CPU 304 has not detected a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. This initial setting 2 includes the following: setting a value in the timer circuit 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below; outputting a clear signal from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400); and setting to allow writing to RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether the state before the power was interrupted (before power was cut off) will be restored. If the state before power was cut off will not be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to perform initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (Step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 being operated by a gaming parlor staff member or the like (Step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (Step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115). If it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115; Yes), it executes the setting change process (Step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the bonus ratio/setting display 196 flashes to "1," indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed. Pressing the setting change button 194 while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is at "3" returns the display to "1." In this embodiment, settings 1 through 3, which have different jackpot probabilities, can be selected. After changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed by pressing the setting change key 192 to the OFF position. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. While the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the bonus ratio/setting display 196 in this embodiment, it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or announced via audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, there are three settings, 1 to 3, but it may be a two-step setting, or four or more settings may be possible, or the setting may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was turned off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

Furthermore, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the setting change process of step S117 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S119.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to return the basic circuit 302 to its initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area in RAM 308 is read. If this power status information does not indicate a suspend state, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a specified area (e.g., all areas) of RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The checksum is then determined to be a specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is anything other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., if the checksum result is abnormal), initialization processing is performed to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. This initialization processing includes disabling interrupts, setting the stack pointer to a stack initial value (main setting), and initializing all storage areas in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, even after initialization, the settings set in the setting change processing (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process of the main control unit 300 (step S119) has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, one initial value generation random number counter is updated to generate the initial value of each special random number counter. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as special random number values is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating special random number values provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing, which starts at a predetermined cycle.

Meanwhile, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power restoration processing, the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. The values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage are also read and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. The CPU 304 then executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state it was in when power was lost. In other words, processing resumes from the command following the command (specified in step S121) executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described below) immediately before power outage. The RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in Figure 2 also has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in that transmission information storage area. This power restoration command indicates that the state at the time of power outage has been restored, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in Figure 34 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 (shown in FIG. 34), including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310, and the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored and stored in signal status memory areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Using ball detection sensor detection signals as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times before last (approximately 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308. Information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previously described previous detection signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the currently detected signal storage area mentioned above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area is compared to determine whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While a gaming ball passes through a ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeatedly activates at very short intervals of approximately 4 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the aforementioned step S205 checks for a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor are stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area. In other words, when a gaming ball begins to pass through a ball detection sensor, there will be no second-to-last detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this embodiment, taking into account erroneous detection and noise from the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal is detected, a win is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 34 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot 226, the variable winning slots 234 and 235, the first special starting slot 231, and the second special starting slot 232, or the general starting slot 228. In other words, it is determined that a win has occurred in these winning slots 234, 235, and 226 or these starting slots 231, 232, and 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects a ball entering the first special symbol start port 231 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, it is determined that a prize has been won in the first special symbol start port 231, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 231 is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 231 is not performed and the processing branches to subsequent processing. Note that winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two times before last, that there was no detection signal last time, and that there was no detection signal this time) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the win determination clear pattern information. If the information matches the win determination clear pattern information, it will then be determined whether or not it matches the win determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating initial values performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the random number counter for generating special random number values used by the main control unit 300 is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as special random number values is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating special random number values provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Furthermore, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to that random number counter is obtained and set in the random number counter memory area. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, which fluctuates within a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, and set in the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers, and the currently set initial value is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area to determine when the random number counter for generating special pattern random numbers has completed its next cycle.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. This process updates the random number counter used to generate random numbers for performances used by the main control unit 300.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. This timer update process updates various timers, including a normal symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and timers for timing the specified winning performance time, specified opening time, specified closing time, specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a prize slot counter update process is performed. In this prize slot counter update process, when a prize is won at prize slots 234, 235, 226 or starting slots 228, 231, 232, the value in the prize ball count memory area provided for each prize slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. During the winning entry acceptance process, if certain conditions are met, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of pending).

In step S219, which follows step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in Figure 34 consists of one byte, with bit 7 indicating strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bit 6 indicating power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), bits 4 and 5 indicating the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 indicating the payout request count after encryption processing.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process performs one of several processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process during the normal map variation display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays the variation of the normal map (normal map variation game).

In addition, during the normal symbol status update process when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a winning symbol, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a losing symbol. Also, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for various settings to be made in various processes, not just the normal symbol status update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting and turning-off control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal symbol is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms and displays either the winning symbol (normal symbol A shown in Figure 35(d)) or the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in Figure 35(d)). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the regular symbol stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the confirmed symbol to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the regular symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Furthermore, if the result of the normal symbol variable play is a win, the normal symbol win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal symbol win flag is on, the normal symbol status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the normal symbol stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the setting area of RAM 308 to "normal symbol in operation," outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of the first special symbol start port 231 to advance the shutter member 2311 forward for a specified opening period (e.g., 5000 ms), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the shutter member 2311 to open and close, causing the shutter member 2311 to move backward for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that begins when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to "not operating" in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process that occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to "not operating" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not operating, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a regular map-related lottery process is performed. In this regular map-related lottery process, when regular map variable play and the opening/closing control of the first special map start port 231 are not being performed (the regular map state is inactive), and the number of reserved regular map variable play games is one or more, a win determination is made to determine whether the result of the regular map variable play will be a win or a loss by random number lottery from the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 34. If a win is determined, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If a loss is determined, the win flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as the regular map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the regular map on the regular map display device 210 is selected from multiple variable times based on the obtained regular map timer random number value. This variable display time is stored as the regular map variable display time in the regular map variable time memory area provided in RAM 308. The number of reserved normal variable games is stored in a reserved normal game number storage area provided in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved normal variable games minus 1 is stored again in this reserved normal game number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information for each of the regular and special symbols 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and change time before the win/loss determination process, and stores the pre-determination results (pre-reading results) in the pre-reading result storage unit in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, no pre-reading is performed because special symbol 1 is not reserved, but it is also possible to perform pre-reading on special symbol 1 as it can be reserved.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. First, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, during the special symbol 2 status update process when the special symbol 2 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special symbol 2 display device 214. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the variable special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big win flag, a 10R small win flag, a 2R small win flag, a miss flag, and a time-saving flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping symbol in the special chart 2 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 2 state update process, which starts when the special chart 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, in the case of a 10R time-saving jackpot flag, special charts B to D shown in Figure 35(b) are displayed, in the case of a 10R time-saving small jackpot flag (when the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, it transitions to a 10-round jackpot), special charts e and f shown in Figure 35(b), in the case of a 2R time-saving small jackpot flag (when the game ball passes through the specific area 234v, it transitions to a 2-round jackpot), special chart g shown in Figure 35(b), in the case of a time-saving flag, special chart E, and in the case of a miss flag, special chart i are displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 will confirm and display one of the following symbols: a jackpot symbol (special symbol B to special symbol D), a small jackpot symbol (a 10R jackpot when passing through the specific area 234v) (special symbol e, special symbol f), a small jackpot symbol (a 2R jackpot when passing through the specific area 234v) (special symbol g), a time-saving symbol (special symbol E), or a losing symbol (special symbol i).

Furthermore, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed special chart 2 is displayed stopped for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the result of the subtraction changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, before terminating the process.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 2 variable play is a small hit, the small hit flag is turned on. If the small hit flag is on, in the special symbol 2 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), special symbol 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special symbol 2 state update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 2341 to keep the first variable winning opening 234 open for a specified open period (e.g., 10 seconds, or until the specified number of game balls (e.g., 10) have entered the first variable winning opening 234), and sets information indicating the open period in the memory area of the opening/closing mechanism open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, in the command setting and sending process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that processing is to be executed while the jackpot generating device is operating is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified opening period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the opening and closing mechanism opening time changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 2341 to keep the first variable winning opening 234 closed. At this time, if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified jackpot transition display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 2 jackpot transition changes from 1 to 0), sets information indicating the jackpot transition presentation period in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified jackpot occurrence presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image is displayed notifying the player that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 234v and a jackpot has occurred. Additionally, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the jackpot transition effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area 234v, the jackpot flag is not turned on, and the special chart 2 inactive state is set in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 is inactive, the special chart 2 status update process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

The special symbol 2 state update process, which begins when the specified jackpot transition presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 to remove the shutter member 2351 and maintain it in an open state for the specified opening period (e.g., 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) into the second variable prize opening 235 is detected), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 for the specified closed period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) to advance the shutter member 2351 and maintain it in a closed state, and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the opening and closing control of the shutter member 2351 is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 rounds or 2 rounds excluding the first time), and the special symbol 2 state update process begins when the control ends. In order to set the process to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 10 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, information indicating the effect wait period is set in the memory area of the effect wait time management timer provided in RAM 308. Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (e.g., special symbol 1: 1 time, special symbol 2: 1 time) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the time-saving flag is set off, the number of time-saving times is not set in the time-saving times memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on.

The term "time-saving" here refers to shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special chart variable play and the start of the next jackpot, putting the pachinko machine in a state that is advantageous to the player. When the time-saving flag is set to on, the opening time of the shutter member 2351 of the special chart 1 starting port 231 during one operation tends to be longer (electric chute opening extension).

Also, as mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play (special play state). Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during jackpot play. This is to solve the problem that if the electric support state is in effect during jackpot play, many game balls may enter the special chart 1 starting port 231 before a predetermined number of game balls enter the second variable winning port 235 during jackpot play, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the tendency to gamble.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 2 status update process, which begins when the specified end display period ends (when the value of the display standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 status update process is in the case where the special chart 2 is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S227.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, during the special symbol 1 status update process when the special symbol 1 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special symbol 1 display device 212. By performing this control, the special symbol 1 display device 212 displays the variable display of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big win flag, a 10R small win flag, a miss flag, and a time-saving flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping pattern in the special chart 1 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 1 state update process, which starts when the special chart 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R big hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is also on, the special chart A shown in Figure 35(a) is displayed; when the 10R small hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is also on, the special chart a to special chart c shown in Figure 35(a) is displayed; when the 10R small hit flag is on and the time-saving flag is off, the special chart d shown in Figure 35(a) is displayed; and when the miss flag is on, the special chart h is displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 1 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 1 display device 212 will confirm and display one of the following symbols: a 10R big win symbol (special symbol A), a 10R small win symbol with time reduction (special symbols a-c), a 10R small win symbol without time reduction (special symbol d), or a losing symbol (special symbol h).

Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed special chart 2 is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off unless the special chart probability is fluctuating. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, and then the process terminates.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 1 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, in the special symbol 1 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), special symbol 1 is set to "operating" in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special drawing 1 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the slide member 2351 of the second variable drawing opening 235 to keep the slide member 2351 in an open state for the specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable drawing opening 235 is detected), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special drawing opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the slide member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 to keep the slide member 2351 in a closed state for the specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the opening and closing control of the second variable winning opening 235 is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 2 rounds in this example), and the special symbol 1 state update process, which begins when the control ends, sets information indicating the effect waiting period in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 10 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (e.g., special symbol 1: 5 times, special symbol 2: 2 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the time-saving flag is set off, the number of time-saving times is not set in the time-saving times memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When special chart 1 is inactive, the special chart 1 status update process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

Once the special chart status update processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special chart-related lottery processing is then performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Here again, the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 2 (special chart 2-related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 1 (special chart 1-related lottery processing) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2-related lottery processing is executed using the earliest special chart 2 winning random number value and special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value memory area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, the states of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are both inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable play games is 1 or more. The special chart 1 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable play times is 1 or more.

With regard to these special symbol-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special symbol 2-related lottery process before the special symbol 1-related lottery process, so that if the start conditions for the special symbol 2 variable game and the start conditions for the special symbol 1 variable game are met simultaneously, the special symbol 2 variable game will be in play first, followed by the special symbol 1 variable game. Furthermore, the results of the special symbol variable game win/fail judgment by the decorative symbol display device 208 are reported by the first sub-control unit 400, which reports the results of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 2 start port 232, but does not report the results of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 1 start port 231. Thus, in this embodiment, if a lottery based on winning at the special chart 2 start port 232 is held while special chart 1 variable play is being executed, special chart 2 variable play will start while special chart 1 variable play is being executed, and if a lottery based on winning at the special chart 1 start port 231 is held while special chart 2 variable play is being executed, special chart 1 variable play will start while special chart 2 variable play is being executed.

In the case of the special chart 2-related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number memory area, and determines whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving state, or a miss (win/lose determination) based on the special chart 2 winning random number etc. in the acquired special chart 2 start information using the win/lose determination table stored in ROM 306. Note that when determining whether or not the special chart 1 is a win/lose, a decision is made as to whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving state, or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 changes display using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number value in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose determination result etc. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the variable display time (timer number) for the special symbol 2 using various tables stored in ROM 306, based on, for example, the result of the hit/miss judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of special symbols 2 reserved at the time of the hit/miss judgment, and the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol variable time.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the above-described special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229), the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special symbol status update process and special symbol-related lottery process are performed independently for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, allowing multiple special symbols to fluctuate simultaneously. In this case, when multiple special symbols are fluctuated simultaneously, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with multiple areas that display the lottery results for each special symbol, or multiple decorative symbol display devices may be provided that display the lottery results for each special symbol, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results for multiple special symbols. Furthermore, when fluctuations related to multiple special symbols are occurring simultaneously, the lottery results for the special symbol that stopped fluctuating first may affect the lottery results for the special symbol that stops fluctuating later. Furthermore, without being limited to this, it is also possible to not perform lottery processing or variable play for the reservation of one special symbol depending on the state of the other special symbol.

In step S233, which follows step S231, a command setting and transmission process is performed. In this command setting and transmission process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example, information that can identify the type of command, such as basic command, pattern change start command, pattern change stop command, win effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, advance read result information command, and setting command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. Furthermore, if the command type is a symbol change start (spin start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, loss flags, and the timer number selected in the special symbol-related lottery process. If the command type is a symbol change stop (spin stop) command, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags. If the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 1 start port 230, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 2 start port 232, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the variable prize port 234, and so on. If the command type is a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If the command type is a setting command, the command data includes setting information and so on.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, etc., is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned ending effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the process of transmitting the jackpot closure settings described above, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc.

In addition, step S233 also performs a general command special drawing reserve increase process. In this general command special drawing reserve increase process, the command data is set with special drawing identification information (information indicating special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which follows step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

In step S237, the step following step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal status memory area in step S205 are read to monitor for the presence or absence of specified errors, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 1 start port 231 and the variable winning ports 234 and 235, and display data output to the normal drawing display device 210, special drawing 1 display device 212, special drawing 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of I/O 310.

In step S239, which follows step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243; if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in Figure 36. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers used to restore the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the process then enters a HALT state.

Next, the winning/losing determination table used in the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) and the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in Figure 37 will be explained with reference to Figures 38 and 39.

The special drawing pass/fail determination table shown in Figure 38(a) is a table that is referenced when determining whether special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 are pass/fail. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

When determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, if a number between 0 and 204 is drawn from the random number range of 0 to 65535, a jackpot will be selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 1, if a number between 205 and 65535 is drawn, a small jackpot will be selected with a probability of 1 in 1.003. Furthermore, when determining whether a jackpot is selected for Special Chart 2, if a number between 205 and 655 is drawn, a small jackpot will be selected with a probability of 1 in 145.313. Furthermore, for Special Chart 2, provided that the machine is in time-saving mode a, if a number between 656 and 65535 is drawn, a time-saving symbol will be selected with a probability of 1 in 1.010. In other words, Special Chart 1 is designed so that a jackpot is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688, and if a jackpot is not selected, a small jackpot is selected, and there are no misses on Special Chart 1. Special Chart 2 is designed so that a jackpot is selected with a probability of approximately 1 in 319.688, and a small jackpot is selected with a probability of 1 in 145.313, and in time-saving state A, if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is selected, the time-saving symbol is always selected, and there are no misses. On the other hand, in game states other than time-saving state A, if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is selected, it is designed so that it is a miss. Note that Special Chart 1 may also have misses, but even in that case, it is desirable to make it so that a small jackpot is the most likely to be won.

In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and when it passes through the specific area 234v, it becomes a big win. Therefore, special chart 1 can be said to be a pattern change display that will result in a big win when a pattern change display is performed. Also, in the time-saving state A, if neither a big win nor a small win is selected, the time-saving pattern stops and the game transitions to the time-saving state C, so it can be said to be a pattern change display that will result in a big win when a pattern change display is performed, or a transition to the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in game states other than the time-saving state A, special chart 2 will result in a miss if neither a big win nor a small win is selected.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is selected in the non-time-saving game mode shown in Figure 38 (b) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether or not special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state will be selected. Here, the a2 time-saving play state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving play state, the a1 time-saving play state described below, and the c time-saving play state. Specifically, in the a2 time-saving play state, if the normal chart win lottery result is a win or if the normal power activation gate 228g is passed, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state. In other words, it can be said that this is a play state in which it is easier to win at the special chart 1 starting port 231. Furthermore, in the a2 time-saving game state, the variation time of the special symbol 1 symbol change display is shorter than that of the special symbol 2 symbol change display and the normal symbol change display. In other words, the a2 time-saving game state can be said to be a game state in which the next jackpot is likely to occur in an extremely short time. The variation time of the special symbol 1 symbol change display in the a2 time-saving game state may be one type or multiple types. For example, if multiple types are available, any selected variation time should be shorter than that of the special symbol 2 symbol change display and the normal symbol change display in the a2 time-saving game state. Furthermore, the number of time-saving cycles in the rightmost column of the special symbol determination table for jackpots and sudden time-saving wins indicates the termination condition of the time-saving game state. Specifically, in the case of special symbol A, the game ends when the fifth variation display of special symbol 1 in the a2 time-saving game state begins, or when the second variation display of special symbol 2 begins. The conditions for ending the time-saving game state are not limited to the number of times Special Chart 1 is played and the number of times Special Chart 2 is played; in addition to these two, the combined number of times Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 may be set, or the number of times regular charts may be added, or these may be combined as appropriate.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2, Special Chart B will be selected with a probability of 50/100, Special Chart C with a probability of 30/100, and Special Chart D with a probability of 20/100. In other words, if a jackpot is selected on Special Chart 2 in non-time-saving play mode, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which symbol is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-saving play mode.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is selected in the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 38 (c) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether or not special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected. Also, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart B will be selected with a 50/100 probability, special chart C will be selected with a 30/100 probability, and special chart D will be selected with a 20/100 probability. In this embodiment, a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 80/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected, and a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 20/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A1 time-shortened play state will be selected. Here, the a1 time-saving game state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving game state, but a less advantageous state than the a2 time-saving game state. Specifically, in the a1 time-saving game state, if the normal winning lottery result is a win or if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving game state. While details will be described later, this is a game state in which if the normal winning lottery result is a win, it is easy to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231, but if the player passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it is difficult to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231.

For Special Chart D, the condition for ending the a1 time-saving play state is until the first symbol change display for Special Chart 1 begins or the first symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins. Therefore, after the end of a jackpot play, Special Chart 2 is reserved during jackpot play. Normally, the reserved Special Chart 2 is consumed and the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins, immediately ending the a1 time-saving play state and transitioning to a non-time-saving play state. However, since the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 is executed in the a time-saving play state, the result of the lottery in the a time-saving play state is used to determine whether Special Chart 2 is a win or lose. Furthermore, if a time-saving symbol that can only be won in the a time-saving play state is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2, Special Chart E is selected. If a time-saving symbol is selected, the game will transition to the c time-saving play state from the symbol change display following the execution of that symbol change display. Here, the time-saving c game state is a more advantageous state than the non-time-saving game state, but a less advantageous state than the time-saving a2 game state. Specifically, in the time-saving c game state, if the normal winning lottery result is a win, the shutter member 2311 advances for a longer time than in the non-time-saving game state. Note that, as will be described in more detail below, if the normal winning lottery result is a win, it is easy to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231, but if the ball passes through the normal electric gate 228g, it is difficult to win at the special game 1 starting gate 231.

The special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving symbol is selected in the time-saving game state c shown in Figure 38 (d) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a jackpot or time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the judgment of whether special symbols 1 and 2 are successful. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart A will be selected with a 100% probability. In other words, a 10R jackpot will always be selected, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected. Also, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart B will be selected with a 50/100 probability, special chart C will be selected with a 30/100 probability, and special chart D will be selected with a 20/100 probability. In this embodiment, a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 80/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A2 time-shortened play state will be selected, and a 10R jackpot will be selected with a 20/100 probability, and after the jackpot play ends, a jackpot that transitions to the A1 time-shortened play state will be selected. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state c ends when the number of times the pattern of special chart 1 has changed has been set or when the number of times the pattern of special chart 2 has changed has been set, but the time-saving game state may also end when the total number of times the pattern of special chart 1 and special chart 2 have changed has reached a set number.

The special symbol determination table for small wins used in non-time-saving game mode shown in Figure 39(a) is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the determination of whether special symbols 1 and 2 are selected. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart a will be selected with a 20/100 probability, special chart b with a 20/100 probability, special chart c with an 11/100 probability, and special chart d with a 49/100 probability. If special charts a to c are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state. Also, if special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the non-time-saving play state.

Furthermore, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in non-time-limited play mode and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which chart is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-limited play mode. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to non-time-limited play mode.

The special symbol determination table for when a small win is won, used in the time-saving game mode shown in Figure 39 (b), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the win/loss determination for special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for Special Chart 1, there is a 20/100 chance that Special Chart A will be selected, a 20/100 chance that Special Chart B will be selected, an 11/100 chance that Special Chart C will be selected, and a 49/100 chance that Special Chart D will be selected. If Special Charts A to C are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the A2 time-saving play state. However, if Special Chart A is selected, the A time-saving play state will continue until the start of the fifth change display for Special Chart 1 or the start of the second change display for Special Chart 2. However, if Special Charts B and C are selected, the A2 time-saving play state will end and the game will transition to the non-time-saving play state (normal play state) upon the start of the first pattern change display for Special Chart 1 or the start of the first pattern change display for Special Chart 2. Additionally, when special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected, which will transition to a1 time-saving play state.

Also, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in the A1 time-saving play state and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which design is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the A1 time-saving play state. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the A1 time-saving play state.

If special symbols b or c are selected, the game will enter the a2 time-saving game state after the jackpot play ends. However, this a2 time-saving game state ends when the first symbol change display for special symbol 1 or the first symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, making it virtually impossible to win at the special symbol 1 start gate 231. Specifically, after the jackpot play ends, special symbol 2 is reserved during the jackpot play. Normally, the reserved symbol 2 is consumed and the symbol change display for special symbol 2 begins, immediately ending the a1 time-saving game state and transitioning to the non-time-saving game state. However, since the symbol change display for special symbol 2 is executed in the a time-saving game state, the result of the lottery in the a time-saving game state will be used to determine whether special symbol 2 is a winner. Furthermore, if the time-saving symbol is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special symbol 2, special symbol E will be selected. When a time-saving symbol is selected, the game will transition to time-saving game state c from the next symbol change display after that symbol change display is executed.

Here, when special symbols b or c are selected, the state after the jackpot play ends is the a2 time-saving play state rather than the a1 time-saving play state, and the reason for setting the end condition to the initiation of the first symbol change display on special symbol 1 or the initiation of the first symbol change display on special symbol 2 is to change the rate of transition to the c time-saving play state without changing the state after the jackpot play ends when special symbols b or c are selected (the a1 time-saving play state). By doing this, when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in non-time-saving play state, there is a 51% chance that the ball will land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231, meaning that the next jackpot is likely to occur immediately. When a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in time-saving play state, there is a 20% chance that the ball will land in the special symbol 1 starting slot 231. By changing the end condition without changing the destination play state, it is possible to control the rate of the state in which the next jackpot is likely to occur immediately, making it easier to design ball output performance.

The special symbol determination table for when a small win is won, used in the time-saving play state c shown in Figure 39 (c), is a table that is referenced when determining the symbol when a small win is selected as a result of the win/loss determination of special symbols 1 and 2. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

If a small jackpot is selected as a result of the special jackpot lottery for special chart 1, special chart a will be selected with a 20/100 probability, special chart b with a 20/100 probability, special chart c with an 11/100 probability, and special chart d with a 49/100 probability. If special charts a through c are selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a2 time-saving play state. If special chart d is selected, a 10R jackpot will occur if the game ball passes through specific area 234v, and after the jackpot play ends, a small jackpot will be selected that transitions to the a1 time-saving play state.

Also, if a small jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 2, special chart e will be selected with a probability of 35/100, special chart f with a probability of 35/100, and special chart g with a probability of 30/100. In other words, if a small jackpot is selected on special chart 2 in the c time-saving play state and special chart e or special chart f is selected, a 10R jackpot will result regardless of which design is selected, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state. If special chart g is selected, a 2R jackpot will result, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to the a1 time-saving play state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, there are two factors that activate the regular electric device (electric chute) having a shutter member 2311 that changes the possibility (difficulty) of winning in the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231. One is when a game ball enters the regular symbol starting hole 228, which can be won by hitting with the left hand, and if it wins in the regular symbol lottery (determining whether the regular symbol is a hit or not), the regular electric device activates after the regular symbol pattern changes. The other is when a game ball passes through the regular electric activation gate 228g, which can be passed by hitting with the right hand, and the regular symbol lottery is not held, and the regular electric device activates without the regular symbol pattern changes.

Figure 40-1 is a timing chart showing the operation of a normal electric device. In Figure 40-1, time passes from left to right on the diagram.

Figure 40-1(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of the normal electric device when a gaming ball enters the normal symbol start hole 228. In this case, the normal symbol pattern is displayed changing on the normal symbol display device 210, and hereinafter this may be referred to as the normal symbol trigger.

The upper part of Figure 40-1(a) shows a timing chart illustrating the fluctuation and stopping of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 210. The lower part of Figure 40-1(a) shows a timing chart illustrating the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of a normal electric device that has the special symbol 1 starting port (variable) 231 installed inside. Note that "open" refers to the state in which the shutter member 2311 is advanced, and "closed" refers to the state in which the shutter member 2311 is retracted.

When a left-handed shot is made and the game ball enters the normal ball starting hole 228, if there are three or fewer reserved balls, a normal ball lottery (to determine whether the normal ball is a winning ball) will be held.

Figure 40-2(a) shows the winning/losing determination table for the regular lottery.

This winning/losing determination table is referenced in the general map-related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Note that the tables shown up to Figure 40-3 are also referenced in the general map-related lottery process (step S223), and are stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

When determining whether a regular lottery draw is a success, if a number between 0 and 204 is extracted from the random number range of 0 to 65535, the probability of a success is approximately 1 in 319.688. This is the same regardless of the game state. The probability of a success may be changed depending on the game state. In this embodiment, when a success is determined, the shutter member 2311 of the special game 1 starting hole 231 operates for a predetermined period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special game 1 starting hole 231.

Also, when a left-handed shot is made and the game ball enters the normal map starting hole 228, the normal map display device 210 begins to display changes in the normal map. As shown in Figure 40-1 (a), the change time is the time from when the normal map display device 210 starts to display changes in the normal map until it stops.

Figure 40-2 (b) shows a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map used in non-time-saving play mode, and (c) shows a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map used in time-saving play mode.

In non-time-saving play mode, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative patterns of the normal map in response to the display of the normal map changes on the normal map display device 210, and a reach effect may be performed. There are three types of reach effects: normal reach effect, super (SP) reach effect, and special super (SPSP) reach effect.

If the normal map is judged to be a hit, one of the variation patterns 06 to 08 will be selected. In all variation patterns, a reach effect will be produced. The normal map variation time is 40,000 ms for variation pattern 06, which produces a normal reach effect, 80,000 ms for variation pattern 07, which produces an SP reach effect, and 100,000 ms for variation pattern 08, which produces an SPSP reach effect.

If the normal map is a miss, one of the variation patterns 01-05 will be selected. First, a determination is made as to whether or not to perform a reach effect, with a 10% chance of a reach effect being performed. The normal map's variation time is 14,000 ms for variation pattern 03, which performs a normal reach effect, 40,000 ms for variation pattern 04, which performs an SP reach effect, and 80,000 ms for variation pattern 05, which performs an SPSP reach effect. These are shorter than the variation time for the same type of reach effect in the case of a hit. On the other hand, if the result is a miss and a reach effect is not performed, the variation pattern is determined according to the number of reserved balls on the normal map. If the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), variation pattern 01 will be selected, with a relatively long variation time of 8,000 ms. If the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3), variation pattern 02 will be selected, with a relatively short variation time of 4,000 ms.

In time-saving play mode, if the normal map is judged to be a hit, variation pattern 10 is determined, and if the normal map is judged to be a miss, variation pattern 11 is determined. Whether variation pattern 10 or variation pattern 11 is selected, the shortening function of the time-saving play mode results in an ultra-shortened variation of 200 ms. In time-saving play mode, right-handed hits are recommended in the first place, and left-handed hits, which can result in a win in the normal map starting slot 228, are not recommended, and the normal map variation display in time-saving play mode is an irregular variation display.

As shown in Figure 40-1 (a), when the display of the normal map changes on the normal map display device 210 ends, the confirmation stop of the normal map is displayed for the confirmation stop time. If the normal map is correct or incorrect, normal map A is confirmed and stopped, and if it is incorrect, normal map B is confirmed and stopped.

Figure 40-2 (d) shows a table for determining the confirmed stop time for regular trains.

The fixed stopping time for a normal drawing is determined regardless of the game state and whether the normal drawing is a hit or miss. In other words, a uniform 500 ms is guaranteed.

As shown in Figure 40-1 (a), once the fixed stop time has elapsed, it is time for the normal electric device to start winning (OP time). This winning start time is the time (standby time) until the normal electric device (electric chute) starts operating.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the regular lottery is a winning lottery, it determines the winning start time and the opening time, closing time, and winning end time (described below) in the regular lottery-related lottery processing (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

Figure 40-3 (a-1) shows a determination table for the start time (OP time) of a normal symbol trigger in a non-time-saving game mode, and Figure 40-3 (a-2) shows a determination table for the start time (OP time) of a normal symbol trigger in a time-saving game mode.

After normal symbol A is confirmed and stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, if the game is in a non-time-saving mode, the winning start time of 24,800 ms begins. In a non-time-saving mode, a left-handed shot is performed, and at this winning start time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display instructing a "right-handed shot" to aim for the normal electric device (electric chute), and this winning start time is used to shoot the game ball into the right-hand area. A display indicating that the electric chute will open is also displayed.

On the other hand, after normal map A is confirmed and stopped on the normal map display device 210, if the game is in a time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), a win start time of just 20 ms will begin. Here too, the time-saving function makes this shorter than in a non-time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 40-1 (a), once the winning start time has elapsed, the regular electric device (electric chute) begins to operate. In other words, the shutter member 2311, which had been in a retracted position until then, begins to advance and enters an advanced state. The shutter member 2311 maintains its advanced state until the end of the opening time. When the shutter member 2311 is in an advanced state, it becomes easier to win at the special chart 1 starting hole 231. The opening time here is the time from when the shutter member 2311 begins to advance until it stops maintaining its advanced state. Note that the opening time may also be the time from when the shutter member 2311 begins to advance until it completely retreats.

Figure 40-3 (b-1) shows the opening time determination table for normal symbol triggers in the non-time-saving game state, (b-2) shows the opening time determination table for normal symbol triggers in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state, and (b-3) shows the opening time determination table for normal symbol triggers in the a2 time-saving game state.

In any game state, the shutter member 2311 opens (operates) once, but it may also be configured to repeat multiple advances and retreats.

When not in time-saving play mode, the opening time will be the normal opening time of 5000 ms.

In the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, the opening time is the same as the normal opening time, 5000 ms. However, it may be longer than the normal opening time (for example, 5500 ms). Also, while the opening time is the same in the c time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state, it may be longer in the a1 time-saving play state than in the c time-saving play state, or vice versa.

In the a2 time-saving game mode, the opening time is the extended opening time of 5,800 ms. Note that the time it takes for the shutter member 2311 to change from a retracted state to an advanced state is the same in either game mode, and during the extended opening time, the time it maintains the advanced state is 800 ms longer than the normal opening time due to the time-saving function.

As shown in Figure 40-1 (a), once the opening time of a normal electric device (electric chute) has elapsed, it enters the closing time. This closing time is the time during which the closed state is maintained after the opening time has ended. If a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 located inside the normal electric device during the closing time, the entry is treated as valid. Although the shutter member 2311 is not in the advanced state, taking into account the time lag until the ball detection sensor in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 detects the game ball, and detection delays due to the game ball getting caught, the detection of the winning ball by the ball detection sensor is treated as valid during the closing time.

Figure 40-3 (c) shows the closing time determination table for normal symbol triggers.

The closing time is the same in all game modes and is 56 ms.

As shown in Figure 40-1 (a), the winning end time occurs when the closing time of the normal electric device (electric chute) has elapsed. This winning end time is the time after the normal electric device (electric chute) has finished operating. In other words, it is the time after the shutter member 2311 has retracted, and once this winning end time has elapsed, the variable display of the normal symbol can begin. The detection of a winning ball by the ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 is treated as valid during the closing time, but is treated as invalid during the winning end time to prevent cheating.

Figure 40-3 (d-1) shows a table for determining the winning end time of a normal symbol trigger in a non-time-saving game mode, and Figure 40-3 (d-2) shows a table for determining the winning end time of a normal symbol trigger in a time-saving game mode.

The winning time is 4500 ms in non-time-saving play mode, but 500 ms in time-saving play mode. Here again, the time-saving function makes the time in time-saving play mode shorter than in non-time-saving play mode.

Figure 40-1(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of the normal electric device when the gaming ball passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g. Hereinafter, this case may be referred to as the normal electric operation gate trigger.

The upper part of Figure 40-1(b) shows a timing chart indicating the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal electric operation gate 228g. The lower part of Figure 40-1(b) shows a timing chart indicating the opening and closing of the shutter member 2311 of the normal electric device, similar to the lower part of Figure 40-1(a).

When the ball detection sensor detects a game ball passing through the normal power operation gate 228g, an ON-level detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives this detection signal, it determines the start time for the normal ball status update process (step S221) in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

Figure 41-1(a) shows a determination table for the start time (OP time) of the normal power operation gate trigger.

The start time (OP time) of the normal power operation gate trigger is the time (standby time) from when an ON-level detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor of the normal power operation gate 228g until the normal electric device (electric chute) begins to operate.

The opening time here is 500 ms, the same in both game modes. That is, as shown in Figures 40-3 (a-1) and (a-2), the winning start time (OP time) for the normal symbol trigger differs in length between the non-time-saving game mode and the time-saving game mode, but the normal power activation gate trigger has the same length in both the non-time-saving game mode and the time-saving game mode. The normal power activation gate 228g can be passed by hitting it to the right, and since hitting it to the right is recommended in the time-saving game mode, the player can simply continue hitting it to the right. Note that, since hitting it to the left is recommended in the non-time-saving game mode, it is irregular for the game ball to pass through the normal power activation gate 228g in the non-time-saving game mode.

As shown in Figure 40-1 (b), once the start time has elapsed, the normal electric device (electric chute) begins to operate. In other words, the opening time here is the same as the opening time of a normal electric device triggered by a normal symbol, and is the time from when the shutter member 2311 begins to advance until it stops maintaining its advanced state. Once the opening time has elapsed, the closing time begins. This closing time is also the same as the closing time of a normal electric device triggered by a normal symbol, and is the time from when the shutter member 2311 moves from its advanced state to its retracted state. Even during this closing time, the detection of a winning ball by the ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 is treated as valid.

Figure 41-1(b) shows a table showing the activation time determination for the normal power activation gate trigger in various game states.

In any game state, the shutter member 2311 opens (actuates) once, but it may also be configured to repeat the advance and retreat operation multiple times.

When the start time has elapsed, the main control unit 300 determines the opening time according to the game state in the normal game state update process (step S221) in the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the non-time-saving game state, the opening time is 44 ms, and in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state, the opening time is also 44 ms. In other words, there is no difference in the opening time between the non-time-saving game state and the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state. On the other hand, in the a2 time-saving game state, the opening time is the extended opening time of 5,800 ms. As a result, in the non-time-saving game state, the a1 time-saving game state, and the c time-saving game state, even if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231. However, in the a2 time-saving game state, once the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, it can be said that it is easy to get the game ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231.

As explained above, with a normal power gate trigger, the opening time and start time (OP time) are the same between the non-time-saving game state, the a1 time-saving game state, and the c time-saving game state. However, with a normal symbol trigger, first, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (Figure 40-2(c)), the winning opening time (OP time) is also shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (Figure 40-3(a-2)), and furthermore, the winning end time is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state (Figure 40-3(d-2)). Therefore, it can be said that the requirements for the time-saving game state are met. In particular, since the time-saving game state is acquired by a normal symbol trigger in the normal state at the start of play (non-time-saving game state), it is important that the requirements for the time-saving game state are met by a normal symbol trigger.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, it is not desirable for the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. Therefore, the shutter member 2311 of the normal electric device (electric chute) must be set to an operating mode that makes it as difficult as possible for a winning ball to enter. By setting the operating mode to the same as in the non-time-saving play state, it is possible to make it as difficult as possible for a winning ball to enter the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, thereby ensuring game playability and preventing cheating (fraud). Furthermore, data on the opening time and start time (OP time) can be shared between the non-time-saving play state and the a1 time-saving play state and the c time-saving play state, which also reduces data volume.

Also, in the non-time-saving game state, the start time for a win (OP time) at the normal symbol trigger may be 10 seconds, and the start time (OP time) at the normal power gate trigger may be 20 seconds. In the time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), the start time for a win (OP time) at the normal symbol trigger may be 5 seconds, and the start time (OP time) at the normal power gate trigger may be 15 seconds. In this case, when comparing the start time for a win (10 seconds) at the normal symbol trigger in the non-time-saving game state with the start time (15 seconds) at the normal power gate trigger in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is longer. However, when comparing the start time (20 seconds) at the normal power gate trigger in the non-time-saving game state with the start time (15 seconds) at the normal power gate trigger in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is shorter, ensuring the time-saving requirements. Here, an example of the start time (OP time) is given, but the same applies to the opening time. That is, in the non-time-saving game state, the opening time for the normal symbol trigger may be 10 seconds, and the opening time for the normal power gate trigger may be 20 seconds, and in the time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), the opening time for the normal symbol trigger may be 5 seconds, and the opening time for the normal power gate trigger may be 25 seconds. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the start time (OP time) for the normal symbol trigger is 20 seconds, and the start time (OP time) for the normal power gate trigger is 10 seconds. In the time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state, a2 time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), the start time (OP time) for the normal symbol trigger is 15 seconds, and the start time (OP time) for the normal power gate trigger is 5 seconds. Even if the normal symbol trigger is longer than the normal power gate trigger, the time-saving requirements are guaranteed in the same way as described above. Note that the number of seconds exemplified here is just an example. For example, if the OP time is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state for the same trigger, it may be shorter in the non-time-saving game state than in the time-saving game state for different triggers, or it may be the same in the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the case of open time, as long as the time-shortened game state is longer than the non-time-shortened game state at the same trigger, the non-time-shortened game state may be longer than the time-shortened game state at different triggers, or the time-shortened game state and the non-time-shortened game state may be the same.

In the above description,
"An operating gate through which the game ball can pass [for example, a normal electric operating gate 228g],
A first ball entry means [e.g., special drawing 1 starting hole 231];
Ordinary electric devices [for example, electric chute],
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A gaming machine equipped with
The control means is capable of controlling a gaming state,
The normal electric device can be activated when the game ball passes through the activation gate,
The first ball entry means is a ball entry means that can be achieved when the normal electric device is activated (for example, when the shutter member 2311 is advanced),
The game states include a non-time-shortened game state, a first time-shortened game state [for example, an a1 time-shortened game state and/or a c time-shortened game state], and a second time-shortened game state [for example, an a2 time-shortened game state] in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than in the first time-shortened game state,
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate, if the game state when determining the activation time is the non-time-reduction game state, the control means determines a first time value [for example, 44 ms in the non-time-reduction game state shown in FIG. 41-1(b)] as the activation time [for example, the opening time shown in FIG. 40-1(b)],
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate, if the game state when determining the activation time is the first time-saving game state, the control means determines a second time value [for example, 44 ms in the a1 time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state as shown in FIG. 41-1(b)] as the activation time,
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate, if the game state when determining the activation time is the second time-saving game state, the control means determines a third time value [for example, 5800 ms in the a2 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 41-1(b)] as the activation time,
the third time value is a longer time value than the first time value,
the third time value is a longer time value than the second time value,
the first time value and the second time value are the same time value;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

In this gaming machine, in the first time-saving game state, it is not desirable for game balls to enter the first ball entry means, and the normal electric device must be set to an operating mode that makes it as difficult as possible for balls to enter. By setting the operating mode to the same as in the non-time-saving game state, it is possible to make it as difficult as possible for balls to enter the first ball entry means, thereby ensuring game playability and preventing cheating (fraud). Furthermore, the operating time data can be shared between the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state, which also reduces data volume.

Also,
"When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate in the non-time-reduced game state, the control means determines a fourth time value [for example, 500 ms in the non-time-reduced game state shown in FIG. 41-1(a)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate [for example, the start time shown in FIG. 40-1(b)],
When the normal electric device is activated based on the game ball passing through the activation gate in the first time-saving game state, the control means determines a fifth time value [for example, 500 ms in the a1 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 41-1 (a)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate,
the fourth time value and the fifth time value are the same time value;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Also,
"A second ball entry means [for example, a normal starting hole 228] is provided,
The control means may start a variable display of a normal symbol when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means,
The normal electric device is operable when a winning symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the normal symbol.
When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time-reduction gaming state and the normal electric device is activated, the control means determines a sixth time value [for example, 24,800 ms shown in FIG. 40-3(a-1)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate [for example, the winning start time shown in FIG. 40-1(a)],
When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the first time-shortened game state and the normal electric device is activated, the control means determines a seventh time value [for example, 20 ms shown in FIG. 40-3 (a-2)] as the time until the normal electric device starts to operate,
the seventh time value is a time value shorter than the sixth time value,
The normal electric device is operable when the game ball passes through the operation gate without executing the variable display of the normal symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Also,
"The second ball entry means is provided in the first game area [for example, the left-hand hitting area],
The operating gate is provided in a second play area (e.g., a right-hand play area),
The first gaming area is a gaming area in which it is recommended to let the gaming ball flow down in the non-time-reduction gaming state,
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the first time-saving game state [for example, a1 time-saving game state],
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the second time-saving game state [for example, a2 time-saving game state],
The second game area is a game area provided with the first ball entry means [e.g., special figure 1 starting hole 231], the third ball entry means [e.g., special figure 2 starting hole 232], and a variable ball entry means [e.g., attacker unit 23] having a specific area [e.g., specific area 234v],
The control means is capable of starting a big win game when a game ball passes through the specific area during a small win game,
The control means may start a variable display of a first special symbol [for example, special symbol 1] when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means,
The control means may start a variable display of a second special symbol [for example, special symbol 2] when a gaming ball enters the third ball entry means,
After a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol [for example, a jackpot, a jackpot via a small jackpot], the second time-saving game state [for example, an a2 time-saving game state (a time-saving game state where it is easy to score: 1G consecutive loop)] may be entered, or the first time-saving game state [for example, an a1 time-saving game state (a time-saving game state where it is difficult to score)] may be entered.
In the variable display of the first special symbol, the possibility of a small win is higher than a miss (for example, the miss shown in FIG. 38(a) includes 0%),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine allows for consecutive jackpots (1G consecutive) in a short period of time, and offers new gaming features that allow for 1G consecutive wins to be looped.

Figure 41-2 is a timing chart that explains the timing for determining the opening time of the normal electric device (electric chute) triggered by the normal electric gate. In this timing chart, time also progresses from left to right on the diagram.

At the top of Figure 41-2, a timing chart is shown showing the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal power operation gate 228g. Below that, a timing chart is shown showing the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 2 start port 232 located immediately below the normal power operation gate 228g. Below that, a timing chart is shown showing the operation and non-operation of the normal electric device. In other words, the operation of the normal electric device corresponds to the state during the open time, and the non-operation of the normal electric device corresponds to a state other than the open time. Below the timing chart for the normal electric device, a timing chart is shown showing the change and stop of special symbol 2 on the second special symbol display device 214. At the bottom, the game status is shown.

As described above, when the ball detection sensor detects a gaming ball passing through the normal power operation gate 228g, an ON-level detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives this detection signal, it determines the start time (OP time) according to the current gaming state in the normal power operation gate 228g timer interrupt process (step S221). In other words, it determines the start time (OP time) according to the gaming state after the gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g, or more specifically, the gaming state when the gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g. As shown in Figure 41-1(a), in this embodiment, the start time (OP time) is 500 ms regardless of the gaming state.

Because the special symbol 2 start port 232 is located directly below the normal power operation gate 228g, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g immediately enters the special symbol 2 start port 232 and is detected by the ball detection sensor installed in the special symbol 2 start port 232, initiating the variable display of the special symbol 2. In other words, the special symbol 2 start port 232 is positioned so that a gaming ball can enter after passing through the normal power operation gate 228g and before the normal symbol electric device begins to operate. As described above, in the a time-saving game state (a1 time-saving game state or the a2 time-saving game state after winning special symbols b and c in the time-saving game state), where winning is difficult, the time-saving game state ends when the variable display of the special symbol 2 begins, and the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, as shown in Figure 41-2, even if the game state at the start of the start time is the time-saving game state, the game state at the end of the start time may be the non-time-saving game state. For this reason, in this embodiment, the game state when determining the opening time of the normal electric device is not the game state at the timing referenced when determining the start time, but the game state after the opening time has elapsed, more specifically, the game state when the normal electric device begins to operate. Therefore, in the case of Figure 41-2, the opening time is determined to be 44 ms (see Figure 41-1 (b)), which is the opening time corresponding to the non-time-saving game state. This ensures an opening time that is appropriate to the current situation, and allows for accurate control of the winning rate for the first special symbol start slot 231.

In the above description,
"An operating gate [for example, a normal electric operating gate 228g] through which the game ball can pass,
Ordinary electric devices [for example, electric chute],
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A gaming machine equipped with
The normal electric device operates for a second period [for example, the opening time shown in FIG. 40-2] after a first period [for example, the start time (OP time) shown in FIG. 40-2] has elapsed when a game ball passes through the operating gate,
The control means determines the length of the first period by referring to the game state when the game ball passes through the operating gate (for example, the game state after receiving the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor of the normal power operating gate 228g: time-shortened game state a) among a plurality of game states (for example, by using the judgment table shown in FIG. 41-1(a)),
The control means determines the length of the second period by referring to the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate (for example, the game state immediately before the operation of the normal electric device: time-saving game state) among the multiple game states (for example, by using the judgment table shown in FIG. 41-1(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes it possible to control the rate at which balls enter the standard electric device, ensuring playability.

Also,
"A first ball entry means [for example, the starting hole 231 in Special Drawing 1],
A third ball entry means [e.g., special drawing 2 starting hole 232];
Equipped with
The first ball entry means is capable of entering the ball when the normal electric device is activated,
The control means may start a variable display of a second special symbol [for example, special symbol 2] when a gaming ball enters the third ball entry means,
The plurality of types of game states include a non-time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state [for example, a2 time-saving game state],
The second time-shortened game state is a time-shortened game state that may end when the first variable display of a special symbol [for example, a special symbol] begins after the second time-shortened game state is set [for example, when a jackpot is reached with special symbol D shown in FIG. 38(c)], or when the variable display of a special symbol begins a certain number of times [for example, five or two times] after the second time-shortened game state is set [for example, when a jackpot is reached with special symbol B or special symbol C shown in FIG. 38(c)].
When the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate is the non-time-reduction game state, the control means determines the length of the second period to be shorter than when the game state when the normal electric device starts to operate is the second time-reduction game state [for example, FIG. 41-1(b)].
The actuation gate is provided upstream of the third ball entry means (e.g., immediately above the third ball entry means).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

With this gaming machine, even in the same second time-saving game state, by changing the ending conditions, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can be scored into the first ball scoring means, or a state in which the second time-saving game state ends without the ball scoring into the first ball scoring means, thereby controlling the rate at which the ball scores into the first ball scoring means.

The third ball entry means may be located in a position that allows the game ball to enter the slot after passing through the operating gate and before the normal electric device has finished operating.

Figure 41-3 is a timing chart that explains the measures taken to ensure the fixed stop time for the normal symbol shown in Figure 40-2 (d). In this timing chart, time also passes from left to right on the diagram.

Figure 41-3(a) is a diagram explaining the problems with pachinko machines that do not incorporate the above-mentioned innovations, while Figure 41-3(b) below it explains how the above-mentioned problems are resolved by incorporating the above-mentioned innovations. At the top of both figures is a timing chart showing the fluctuations and stops of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 210, and below that is a timing chart showing the state of the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal electric operation gate 228g. Furthermore, at the bottom of both figures is a timing chart showing the operation and stop of the normal electric device (electric chute). In other words, the operation of the normal electric device corresponds to the state during the open time, and the stop of the normal electric device corresponds to the state outside the open time.

The normal map display device 210 can begin displaying the changing patterns of the normal map when the normal electric device (electric chute) finishes operating. As described below, if a gaming ball passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the changing patterns of the normal map are being displayed, the changing patterns of that normal map are interrupted. However, if a gaming ball passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the normal map is being fixed and stopped, the fixed stop will continue. However, if a normal map is on hold, as shown in Figure 41-3(a), once the opening time of the normal electric device has elapsed, the fixed stop of the normal map will end, even before the fixed stop time (500 ms) has elapsed, and the changing patterns of the normal map will begin to be displayed. This can cause problems if the player is distracted by the operation of the normal electric device (electric chute) and misses the fixed display of the normal map. Conversely, there can be cases where the player is distracted by the fixed display of the normal map and misses the operation of the normal electric device, which can also be problematic.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, the time length from when a detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal operation gate 228g to when the opening time of the normal electric device ends, i.e., the time length L from when the player passes through the normal operation gate 228g to when the operation of the normal electric device ends, is set to be longer than the normal device's confirmation stop time (500 ms). This time length L is the total time length of the start time (500 ms) of the normal electric device triggered by the normal operation gate plus the minimum opening time (44 ms) of the normal electric device triggered by the normal operation gate. This ensures that the timing at which the operation of the normal electric device ends is after the confirmation stop of the normal device has ended, reducing the risk of the player missing the confirmation display of the normal device or the operation of the normal electric device. Furthermore, if the length of time from when a detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor installed in the normal power operation gate 228g until the opening time of the normal power device begins, i.e., the length of time OP from when the game ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g until the normal power device begins to operate, is set to be longer than the normal power device confirmation stop time, there will be no overlap between the period when the normal power device confirmation display is on and the period when the normal power device is operating, and the two can be clearly seen separately.

In the above explanation, the fixed stop time of the normal map was < the start time + opening time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, but it could also be the fixed stop time of the normal map < the start time + opening time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, or the fixed stop time of the normal map < the start time + opening time + closing time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, or the fixed stop time of the normal map < the start time of the normal electric device triggered by the normal electric gate, or the fixed stop time of the normal map < the opening time. Or it could be the fixed stop time of the normal map < the closing time.

In the above description,
"An operating gate [for example, a normal electric operating gate 228g] through which the game ball can pass,
Ordinary electric devices [for example, electric chute],
a second ball entry means (e.g., a general entry hole 228);
A control means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A gaming machine equipped with
The control means may start a variable display of a normal symbol when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means,
The normal electric device can be activated when the game ball passes through the activation gate,
The variable display of the normal pattern is a variable display that can start when the operation of the normal electric role is completed,
The normal electric device has a time length from when the game ball passes through the operating gate to when it finishes operating [for example, the time length from when a detection signal is output from the ball detection sensor provided in the normal electric operating gate 228g to when the opening time of the normal electric device ends] (hereinafter referred to as the "first time length") that is longer than the time length from when the variable display of the normal symbol ends and a stop display is made [for example, the fixed stop time of the normal symbol (500 ms)] (hereinafter referred to as the "second time length").
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, by making the first time length longer than the second time length, it is possible to confirm both the operation of the normal electric device and the display of the stopped normal symbol. If the first time length were shorter than the second time length, there is a risk that the player will be distracted by the operation of the normal electric device and miss the display of the stopped normal symbol, or conversely, there is a risk that the player will be distracted by the display of the stopped normal symbol and miss the operation of the normal electric device.

Also,
"The control means is capable of controlling the gaming state,
The gaming state includes a non-time-saving gaming state and a time-saving gaming state,
The normal electric device has a first time length [for example, start time (500 ms) + opening time] longer than the second time length [for example, the fixed stop time of the normal figure (500 ms)] whether in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state [for example, the start time = the fixed stop time of the normal figure regardless of the game state, so it is always longer by the opening time].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The normal electric device will not start operating even if the game ball passes through the operating gate while the variable display of the normal symbol has finished and the stop display of the winning symbol is being displayed [for example, while the winning symbol is being confirmed and stopped] [for example, the normal symbol winning is invalid when the normal symbol is confirmed and stopped as shown in Figure 41-1 (c)].
The normal electric device starts operating when the game ball passes through the operating gate while the variable display of the normal symbol has finished and the stop display of the losing symbol is being performed [for example, during the confirmation stop of the losing symbol] [for example, when the normal symbol is confirmed and stopped as shown in Figure 41-1 (c), the normal symbol miss is valid],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also, as shown in Figure 41-1 (b), the closing time of the shutter member 2311 of the normal symbol electric device when the normal symbol activation gate is triggered is the same as the closing time when the normal symbol is triggered, 56 ms, regardless of the game state. In other words, the closing time is the same for the non-time-saving game state, the a1 time-saving game state, and the c time-saving game state. As such, since the closing time does not change depending on the game state, it may be determined when determining the opening time. However, once the opening time has elapsed, the main control unit 300 may determine the closing time in the normal symbol state update process (step S221) in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In Figure 40-1 (b), the operation of the normal electric device (electric chute) triggered by the normal electric gate does not have a set winning end time, unlike the operation of the normal electric device triggered by the normal symbol, but it is also possible to set a winning end time of 500 ms that is common to all game states.

In addition, when referring to the operating time of a normal electric device (electric chute), it may be the opening time alone, or the opening time plus both the opening time (i.e., the start time or start time of a win) and the closing time, or it may be the time plus only one of the two times. Alternatively, it may be the opening time + opening time + closing time + winning end time, or the opening time + closing time + winning end time. In other words, it is sufficient as long as it includes at least the opening time.

Next, with reference to Figure 41-1 (c), we will explain how a gaming ball is handled when it passes through the normally-powered gate 228g.

Figure 41-1(c) shows how a gaming ball is handled when it passes through the normally-operated gate 228g.

The processing states of the normal-power operation gate 228g include the standby state of the normal-power operation gate 228g (the state before passing through the normal-power operation gate 228g), normal-power OP (the open state in Figure 40-1(b)), the normal-power electric device in operation (the open state in Figure 40-1(b)), and the end of operation of the normal-power electric device (the closed state in Figure 40-1(b)).

This explanation also explains the relationship between the normal symbol processing state based on winning the normal symbol starting hole 228. The normal symbol processing states include the normal symbol waiting state (the state before winning the normal symbol starting hole 228), the normal symbol changing state (the changing time state in Figure 40-1(a)), the normal symbol fixed stop state (the fixed stop time state in Figure 40-1(a)), normal power OP (the win start time state in Figure 40-1(a)), the normal symbol electric device operating (the opening time state in Figure 40-1(a)), the normal symbol electric device operation completed (the closing time state in Figure 40-1(a)), and normal power ED (the win end time state in Figure 40-1(a)). Also, Figure 41-1(a) summarizes the results of the normal symbol lottery executed when a ball enters the normal symbol starting hole 228, divided into winning and losing cases.

When the normal power operation gate 228g is in a standby state and the normal symbol is in a standby state or a changing normal symbol state, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g is treated as valid.

When the normal power operation gate 228g is in a standby state and a winning normal symbol is displayed, a gaming ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g is treated as invalid. In other words, a winning normal symbol lottery takes priority. On the other hand, when a gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while a losing normal symbol is displayed, its passage is treated as valid.

In the normal electric opening, when the normal electric device is in operation, when the normal electric device has finished operating, and in the normal ending, the normal symbol is considered a winning symbol, so any game ball that passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g is treated as having been invalidated. In other words, the operation of the electric chute due to a winning normal symbol lottery currently being held takes priority. Note that there are no losing cases in the normal electric opening, when the normal electric device is in operation, when the normal electric device has finished operating, and in the normal ending, so these are marked with a diagonal line.

Furthermore, if the processing status of the normal electric operation gate 228g is normal electric OP, normal electric device in operation, or normal electric device operation finished, regardless of the processing status of the normal symbol, the passage of a game ball that passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g will be treated as invalid. In other words, if the electric chute is activated based on the passage through the normal electric operation gate 228g, the next passage through the normal electric operation gate 228g will be treated as invalid.

Next, we will explain how to handle Special Drawings 1 and 2 when they are fluctuating simultaneously, with reference to Figure 41-1 (d).

Figure 41-1 (d) shows how Special Drawings 1 and 2 are handled when they are fluctuating simultaneously.

The diagonal lines in Figure 41-1 (d) represent combinations that are impossible to achieve in the first place. As mentioned above, there are no misses on Special Chart 1. Also, if Special Chart 2 lands on Special Chart 1 during a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot will not be selected on Special Chart 1 and it will be a miss, and if Special Chart 1 lands on Special Chart 2 during a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot will not be selected on Special Chart 2 and it will be a miss. Therefore, it is impossible for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 to result in a jackpot at the same time. Also, the horizontal bar indicates that special control will not be executed.

As shown in Figure 41-1 (d), if Special Chart 1 stops displaying a jackpot or small jackpot while both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are displaying a jackpot, the display result of Special Chart 2 during the jackpot display is discarded and a losing symbol is displayed. Also, for example, if Special Chart 1 wins while Special Chart 2 is displaying a jackpot, Special Chart 1 will not select a jackpot and will result in a loss, causing a losing symbol to be displayed on Special Chart 1 and the jackpot Special Chart 2 display to continue as normal. As will be explained later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed on Special Chart 2, the display of the losing Special Chart 1 is interrupted. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the display of the losing Special Chart 1 will resume, and the display of the losing Special Chart 2 may begin with the display of the losing Special Chart 1 symbol resumed. In this case, when a losing symbol is displayed on Special Chart 1, the display of the losing Special Chart 2 will continue as normal.

On the other hand, if Special Chart 2 stops displaying due to a big or small win while both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are displaying a changing pattern, the display of Special Chart 1 will be interrupted, and the display will resume once the big or small win game has ended. Note that the display will not be interrupted for time-saving patterns selected only on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving play state c.

Next, with reference to Figure 41-1 (e), we will explain how to handle the situation when a gaming ball passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal map is changing.

Figure 41-1(e) shows how to handle a game ball that passes through the normal power operation gate 228g while the normal map is changing.

As shown in Figure 41-1 (e), if a game ball enters the normal map start port 228 and passes through the normal electric operation gate 228g while the normal map is being displayed, the normal map being displayed will be interrupted regardless of the display result, and the display of the normal map will resume when the opening and closing operation of the electric chute shutter member 2311 based on the game ball passing through the normal electric operation gate 228g is completed.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 42 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 42 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM 408.

In step S303, which follows step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S307, which follows step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which follows step S307, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, processing such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which follows step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control processing, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190, depending on the detection result.

In step S313, the step following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which follows step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which follows step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the first performance movable unit 7 at the top shown in Figure 32 or the second performance movable unit 8 hidden at the rear, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 42 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Figure 42 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 43 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 43 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S401. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM (not shown).

In step S403, which follows step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S407, which follows step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which follows step S407, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, processing such as reading the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) from ROM (not shown) is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S411, the step following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, processing returns to step S403.

Figure 43 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM.

Figure 43 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which follows step S441, other processing such as updating random number values for presentation purposes is performed.

Figure 43 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, described below). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 in VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (source address in ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (destination address in VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which follows step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on image data information (such as VRAM 518 coordinate axes, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the step following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 44. Note that this explains the normal flow of the game, and may not explain irregular flow.

The first game state is (1) the normal game state, i.e., the non-time-saving state. In this game state, left-handed play is recommended, and the gameplay revolves around the normal map changing display when the game ball enters the normal map starting slot 228.

Then, when the normal map display shows a win (normal map A) as a result of the change (A), (2) a normal map win game is executed, and the shutter member 2311 of the special map 1 starting port 231 advances for a predetermined time as described above.

In normal winning mode, when a game ball enters the special game ball 1 starting port 231 (B), the variable display of special game ball 1 begins, and a big win or small win symbol is displayed. When a small win symbol is displayed, the first variable winning port 234 opens, allowing a game ball to enter. When the game ball that entered the first variable winning port 234 passes through the specific area 234v (3), a big win occurs, and the big win game begins. On the other hand, when a big win symbol is displayed, a big win occurs without the first variable winning port 234 being opened, and the big win game begins.

When the initial jackpot play ends, the game will transition to one of two routes depending on the symbol on Special Chart 1. Specifically, if "Special Chart d" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a small jackpot, and if the small jackpot leads to a jackpot, after the jackpot play related to that jackpot ends (C), the game will not transition to the time-saving play state, but will transition to (1) the normal play state. If a jackpot is achieved with any other symbol, after the jackpot play related to that jackpot ends (D), the game will transition to the a2 time-saving play state described above (4), which makes it easier to win at Special Chart 1 starting hole 231, and the game ball will immediately pass through the normal power operation gate 228g, making it possible to win at Special Chart 1 starting hole 231 without any symbol change. In the a2 time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of special chart 1 is the shortest of the multiple types of fluctuation times (i.e., a fluctuation time shorter than that of special chart 2 (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), so the fluctuation display result of special chart 1 is displayed in priority to special chart 2 (E), and (5) a big hit or small hit occurs in a short time. As a result, two big hit games may be played seamlessly. In the a2 time-saving game state, there may be multiple fluctuation times for special chart 1, or there may be only one, but in either case, it is sufficient that the fluctuation time is shorter than any of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 2. It is also sufficient that the fluctuation time is shorter than any of the fluctuation times of the multiple normal charts. In addition, if there are multiple fluctuation times for special chart 1, the average of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 1 may be shorter than the average of the fluctuation times of the multiple special charts 2 (normal charts).

When the second or subsequent jackpot play ends, the game will transition to one of two routes depending on the symbol on Special Chart 1. In this case, the special chart determination table for a jackpot or sudden time-saving win in the time-saving play state a or the special chart determination table for a small win in the time-saving play state a shown in Figures 38(c) and 39(b) is referenced. Specifically, if "Special Chart A" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a jackpot, or "Special Chart A" appears, indicating a small win, and the jackpot is reached via the small win, when the jackpot play ends (F), (6) the game will transition to the time-saving play state a2, and this will continue until the symbol change display on Special Chart 1 has started five times or the symbol change display on Special Chart 2 has started twice. In this case, too, the game enters a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to land on Special Chart 1, so the variable display result of Special Chart 1 is displayed in priority to Special Chart 2 (G), and (5) another big hit or small hit occurs in a short period of time (1G consecutive).

On the other hand, if "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" appears on Special Chart 1, indicating a small win, and then a big win is reached via the small win, once the big win play ends (H), (7) the game transitions to the a2 time-saving play state, which continues until either the symbol change display of Special Chart 1 begins once or the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 begins once. In most cases, since Special Chart 2 is reserved during a big win, when the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 begins for the first time, the a2 time-saving play state ends (I), and (8) the game transitions to the normal play state. However, since the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 during play is determined by lottery in the a time-saving play state, in most cases the time-saving symbol will be selected, as shown in Figure 38(a). Therefore, when the symbol change display of Special Chart 2 results in the time-saving symbol (Special Chart E) being displayed (J), (9) the game transitions to the RUSH state, which is the c time-saving play state. Furthermore, if "Special Chart d" appears on Special Chart 1, resulting in a small win, and then that small win leads to a big win, when the big win game ends (H), (7) the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state, which will continue until the pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins once or the pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins once. In other words, the game will operate in substantially the same way as the a2 time-saving game state, which is transitioned to after the big win game that was transitioned to due to the display of "Special Chart b" or "Special Chart c" ends.

In the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), the gameplay is centered around the display of the changing patterns on special symbol 2. The c time-saving play state continues until the display of the changing patterns on special symbol 1 has begun once or the display of the changing patterns on special symbol 2 has begun 144 times. Therefore, in the c time-saving play state, the special symbol determination table for when a jackpot or sudden time-saving win occurs in the c time-saving play state or the special symbol determination table for when a small win occurs in the c time-saving play state shown in Figures 38 (d) and 39 (c) is referenced until the display of the changing patterns on special symbol 2 has begun 144 times. Specifically, if "Special Chart B" or "Special Chart C" is displayed on Special Chart 2 and a jackpot occurs (N), a 10R jackpot game is executed (3), and when the jackpot game ends (D), (4) the game transitions to a2 time-saving game state, which continues until the pattern change display on Special Chart 1 begins five times or the pattern change display on Special Chart 2 begins two times.

On the other hand, if "Special Chart D" appears on Special Chart 2, indicating a jackpot, or if "Special Chart e," "Special Chart f," or "Special Chart g" appears, indicating a small jackpot, and then a 10R or 2R jackpot is reached via the small jackpot (K), (10) when the jackpot game ends (L), (7) the game will transition to the a1 time-saving game state, which will continue until the symbol change display for Special Chart 1 begins once or the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins once (I), after which (8) the game will transition to the normal game state. As mentioned above, in this normal game state, the symbol change display for Special Chart 2, which is usually the trigger for the end of the a1 time-saving game state, is executed, and Special Chart E will be selected as the result of the jackpot lottery for Special Chart 2 (unless a jackpot is reached), and the game will immediately transition to the c time-saving game state (J). Additionally, when the 144th symbol change display by special symbol 2 ends during the time-saving c game mode, the time-saving c game mode ends (M) and the game transitions to the normal game mode (1).

In the game flow according to this embodiment described above, in normal game mode, gameplay is centered around the variable display of the normal symbol, in c time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), gameplay is centered around the variable display of special 2, and when a normal symbol wins in normal game mode or when the normal symbol passes through the normal power activation gate 228g (1G consecutive) in a2 time-saving game mode where the number of time-saving times is set to 5 (special symbol 1), in other words, when the shutter member 2311 is open in a manner allowing entry into the special symbol 1 starting port 231, gameplay is centered around the variable display of special 1.

Next, we will explain specific examples of effects that are executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment.

Figure 45 is a diagram showing an example of a staged presentation centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Figure 45 shows the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern hold lamp 216, and the special pattern 2 hold lamp 220.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 45(a) displays a static decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7." Note that the background here is not displayed, but a default background image, which will be described later, is displayed. In the following explanation, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may also be displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern display area 284 is an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing (or a pattern is stopped), and from top to bottom is an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a normal pattern, an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a special pattern 1, and an area for notifying whether a pattern is changing for a special pattern 2. When a normal pattern is stopped, a circle or cross symbol is displayed lit up, but when a normal pattern is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. When a special pattern 1 is stopped, a circle or cross symbol is displayed lit up, but when a special pattern 1 is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. When a special pattern 2 is stopped, a circle, cross or triangle symbol is displayed lit up, but when a special pattern 2 is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. In this way, not only does the fourth symbol have a different display position, but the display format (here, shape) also differs, allowing the player to distinguish it at a glance. Note that advance notice may be given by changing the display format, lighting format, or blinking format of the fourth symbol.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a variable icon display area 280 located at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 45 is a non-time-saving game state. In this non-time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a normal symbol hold icon display area 281 to the left of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the non-time-saving game state, the hold icon display areas for special symbols 1 and 2 are not explicitly shown, but hold icon display areas for special symbols 1 and 2 may also be provided.

The reserve icon display area 281 for regular maps displays reserve icons representing reserves for regular maps. The number of reserves for regular maps is represented by the number of lit regular map reserve lamps 216 as well as the number of reserve icons for regular maps, and the number of reserves for special map 2 is represented by the number of lit special map 2 reserve lamps 220. It may also be represented by the number of reserve icons for special map 2. In other words, the reserve icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserve icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserve icon, the reserve icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserve icon, and so on. In the reserve icon display area 281 for regular maps, reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the right being the oldest winning icon. In this embodiment, special map 1 is not reserved, so no reserve icon is displayed, but this may be done.

In Figure 45(a), two regular map hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281, and these two regular map hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for regular maps is a round hold icon. Note that in Figure 45(a), to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines.

On the other hand, no hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of Special Chart 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 45 is a non-time-saving game state, and therefore winning at Special Chart 2 start port 232 is not recommended.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reserve icon display area for the normal or special 2 symbol that is more likely to result in a win is displayed depending on the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is a non-time-saving game state, the reserve icon display area 281 for the normal symbol is displayed in the effect display area 208d, as shown in FIG. 45(a), and when the control state is a time-saving game state, conversely, the reserve icon display area 282 for the special 2 symbol may be displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the regular map and the default display mode of the hold icon in the special map 2 may be the same, or they may be different display modes.

In this embodiment, the display of the pattern change for the normal or special pattern begins in the following order: change begins on the special pattern display device or normal pattern display device → the fourth pattern starts flashing or goes out → the pending icon movement animation starts or disappears → the decorative pattern starts changing; however, this order may be reversed.

In Figure 45 (b), the display of the pattern change on the normal map begins, the pattern change begins on the normal map display device 210, and the fourth pattern goes off, but no change has yet occurred to the reserved icon or decorative pattern.

In Figure 45 (c), the animation of the movement of the regular reserved icons h11 and h12 has begun. In this animation, the reserved icon (the reserved icon subject to this pattern change) that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 begins to move towards the changing icon display area 280, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 begins to move towards the display position of the first reserved icon h11 on the regular map. At this stage, the display of the decorative pattern change has not begun.

In Figure 45 (d), the movement animation continues, and in Figure 45 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the change began reaches the hold icon display area 280 and is displayed as the hold icon h0, and the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the change began reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but even at this stage the display of the decorative pattern change has not yet begun. Note that when the pattern change begins on the general display device 210, the hold icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the hold icon h0, and the hold icon that was previously the second hold icon h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, the decorative pattern begins to change as shown in Figure 45 (f).

As shown in FIG. 45(g), when the decorative pattern display device 208 begins displaying the decorative pattern changes, an operation prompt notification image 136P is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 to encourage the player to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation prompt notification image 136P displays an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period to the right of the main character image. Although the decorative pattern changes are hidden by the operation prompt notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284, etc. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation prompt notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in Figure 45(h), the valid period is decreasing, and in Figure 45(i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in Figure 45(j), a reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the operation prompt notification image 136P. In the reach state entry notification image 2071, the words "It's your chance!!" are displayed to the right of the main character's character image.

In Figure 45 (k), the reach state entry warning image 2071 disappears, the changing display of the decorative symbols becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in Figure 45 (l). Note that even if the reach state entry warning image 207 is displayed, there are cases where the reach state is not entered, but it is also possible to set it so that the reach state is always entered.

As explained above, the appearance of the operation prompt notification image 136P corresponds to a performance that triggers a notice regarding the currently occurring pattern change display.

In Figure 45(m), the background image has been switched from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 have disappeared. The fourth pattern display area 284 is still displayed. In addition, the variable decorative pattern displays that had previously been displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and reduced in size, and in Figure 45(n), this has developed into a special reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 45(n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure (o) displays an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman.

Note that the reach state entry warning image 2071 may not only be a warning that the reach state will be entered, but may also be a warning that the game will progress to an SP reach.

Figure 46 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example of the effect shown in Figure 45.

Continuing from Figure 45(o), Figure 46(p) shows the continuation of the duel scene animation, which continues until Figure 46(s). In Figure 46(s), the lord, the protagonist, defeats the villain, the master swordsman, and in Figure 46(t), everything except the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Note that instead of being hidden, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, a setting suggestion may be displayed in this scene. Eventually, as shown in Figure 46(u), a fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden, or may be a different background image from before. Furthermore, the variable icon display area 280 and the regular reserved icon display area 281 remain hidden, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 46(v) displays a static display of the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7." Also, the fourth symbol (a round symbol) of the normal symbol shown in Figure 46(v) is lit. In Figure 46(v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Finally, in Figure 46(w), the word "Jackpot" is displayed along with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the jackpot as the jackpot game start effect. Note that a display including setting suggestions may be displayed during the jackpot game start effect shown in Figure 46(w). In this case, the display including setting suggestions may be displayed only when a jackpot that satisfies certain conditions occurs (e.g., only when it is the first jackpot after power-on, only when five or more consecutive jackpots occur, or only when it is the jackpot with the largest number of balls out of multiple jackpots with different payouts (e.g., a 10R jackpot, etc.)).

Figure 47 shows a step-by-step example of a different presentation following Figure 46 (q).

In Figure 47(a), the animation of the duel scene that began in Figure 45(o) continues, and this animation continues until Figure 47(b). In Figure 47(b), the main character, the lord, is defeated by the villain, the master swordsman. In Figure 47(c), as in Figure 46(t), everything except the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden. Note that in this scene, a setting suggestion display may be displayed. This may, for example, create a sense of anticipation regarding the setting while the player is feeling disappointed after missing the SP reach. Eventually, in Figure 47(d), the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" begins to fluctuate. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the normal reserved icon display area 281 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the normal reserved icon h11 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 47 (e), the fourth pattern (circular pattern) of the regular map is lit, and the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed frozen. Next, during the period when the regular map is displayed as confirmed, an animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In Figure 47 (f), the animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 begins, and in Figure 47 (g), the animation for the disappearance continues, and in Figure 47 (h), the variable icon h0 has completely disappeared. Note that the animation for the disappearance of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the regular map is performed.

Figure 48 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of a presentation centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. Note that Figure 48 omits the illustration of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 48(a) displays the changes in the decorative patterns. Also, in the state shown in Figure 48(a), the changes in the normal pattern are displayed, and both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are displayed stationary. To indicate this, the fourth pattern of the normal pattern is displayed flashing in the fourth pattern display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the fourth patterns of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are displayed lit.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 48 is a non-time-saving game state, a regular pending icon display area 281 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The regular map hold icon display area 281 displays hold icons representing regular map holds. The number of regular map holds is represented by the number of regular map hold icons in addition to the number of lit regular map hold lamps 216, and the number of special map 2 hold lamps 220. The number may also be represented by the number of special map 2 hold icons. In other words, the hold icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second hold icon, and so on. In the regular map hold icon display area 281, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icon on the right being the hold icon with the oldest winning. In Figure 48(a), the number of regular map holds is 0, so no regular map hold icons are displayed in the regular map hold icon display area 281.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 48 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4," and the display result of the normal winning symbol is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Additionally, in the fourth symbol display area 284, a circle symbol indicating a normal winning symbol is displayed.

When a normal winning game begins, the shutter member 2311 of the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 advances, making it easier to win at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(c) displays a right-hit display U4 in the center of the display screen to encourage right-hit, promoting winning at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. In addition, a right-hit display is also displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area 284. At this time, it is also possible to display a presentation regarding the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won in this jackpot (for example, a suggestion of a 1500-ball jackpot, a suggestion of a 3000-ball jackpot, or a presentation to tease whether it is a 1500-ball or a 3000-ball jackpot). Furthermore, at the timing shown in Figure 48 (c), a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, the display of the changing special symbol 1 symbol begins, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 begins to flash a "-" symbol, indicating that the changing special symbol 1 symbol is being displayed.

After that, when a predetermined variation time for special symbol 1 (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, special symbol 1 is displayed as stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 48 (d), the display result of special symbol 1 is a small win, so a triangular symbol is displayed as stopped in the display area of special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284, indicating that a small win has occurred. When a small win occurs, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the gaming ball enters this first variable winning opening 234 and passes through the specific area 234v, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game begins. Note that Figure 48 (e) shows the situation in which the gaming ball passes through the specific area 234v during small win gameplay, resulting in a jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 48(e) displays a background (jackpot background) indicating that a jackpot is occurring, and the number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the lower center of the display screen displays the number of prize balls expected to be acquired in the current jackpot and the number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot. At the timing shown in Figure 48(e), one game ball enters the first variable prize opening 234, so 15 prize balls are paid out. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays "+15" in the upper center, indicating the number of prize balls associated with the win, and adds "15" to the number of prize balls acquired. After that, when 10 game balls enter the first variable prize opening 234, the first variable prize opening 234 is closed. Next, the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 retracts, opening the second variable winning opening 235 and starting a round of play. In this case, the game in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens is counted as the first round, so the first game in which the second variable winning opening 235 opens is the second round of play.

Figure 48 (f) shows the end of the first jackpot game. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the number of prize balls won as "TOTAL 01500pt" because 1500 balls have been won since the first jackpot, and also displays "1500/3000" at the bottom center. Also, in the center of the display screen, a message is displayed warning players to avoid becoming addicted and forgetting to remove their prepaid card: "Be careful not to get addicted. If you forget to remove your card, please stop." This warning message is displayed after each jackpot game, but it may also be displayed only at the end of the jackpot game related to the first jackpot.

After that, when the game transitions to the A2 time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 48 (g) displays "Please hit right," instructing the player to continue hitting right, indicating that the game has transitioned to the time-saving game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 48(h), when the gaming ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g and enters the special chart 2 starting hole 232, the variable display of special chart 2 begins, while the shutter member 2311 of the special chart 1 starting hole 231 advances upon passing through the normal power activation gate 228g, making it easier for the ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231. In other words, in this embodiment, the shutter member 2311 is configured to be activated when triggered by either a normal winning or the gaming ball passing through the normal power activation gate 228g. Note that in the a2 time-saving gaming state, as described above, the operating time of the shutter member 2311 is longer (e.g., 5,800 ms), making it easier for the ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231 and the variable display of special chart 1 begin. The number of winning balls also continues to be displayed. In this embodiment, only the number of prize balls acquired by winning through the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235 is displayed in the number of prize balls acquired display; however, the number of prize balls acquired by winning through other prize slots (for example, the general prize slot or the starting slot) may also be added to the number of prize balls acquired display. Also, in this embodiment, since the time between the end of the first jackpot and the start of the second jackpot is short, the jackpot background is also continuously displayed. In other words, ending and opening effects are not executed.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 48(i), a gaming ball enters the special symbol 1 start port 231, and the display of the special symbol 1 change is shown to have begun. Note that in this embodiment, since the machine is a simultaneous change machine that can change special symbols 1 and 2 simultaneously, the display of the special symbol 1 change begins without waiting for the change of special symbol 2 to stop. Note that in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 48(i), the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is four, and the fourth symbol display area 284 indicates that the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is four. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the special symbol 1 change is not reserved, so even if multiple gaming balls enter the special symbol 1 start port 231, only the prize balls are paid out and the display of the symbol change is not reserved.

After that, as shown in Figure 48 (j), when special symbol 1 is displayed in a stopped state and a small win symbol (for example, "special symbol b") is displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and when the game ball enters the opened first variable winning opening 234 and passes through the specific area 234v, the second big win game begins in the same manner as the first big win. Note that in this embodiment, when special symbol 1 is displayed in a stopped state, special symbol 2, which is being displayed in a variable state, is discarded and a losing symbol is displayed.

Figure 48 (k) shows the end of the second jackpot game. The second jackpot occurred because Special Chart 1 stopped at "Special Chart B" during the A2 time-saving game state, and so after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the A2 time-saving game state. However, when the first symbol change display for Special Chart 1 or the first symbol change display for Special Chart 2 begins, this A2 time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends, the reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 is consumed and the change display for Special Chart 2 begins, effectively transitioning to the non-time-saving game state, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the Special Chart 1 starting hole 231. However, the first symbol change display of Special Chart 2 that is consumed after this jackpot game has ended is drawn using the judgment table for the a2 time-saving game state (see Figures 38(c) and 39(b)), so the change time is relatively short (e.g., 5 seconds) and in most cases the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary, resulting in a transition to time-saving game state c. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 48(k) displays the words "Entering Ox/X RUSH!!" indicating a transition to time-saving game state c, suggesting a transition to time-saving game state c.

At the timing shown in Figure 48 (l), the reserved Special Chart 2 is consumed and the first symbol change display begins. At this time, the word "Ready" is displayed, amplifying the player's sense of anticipation for the transition to time-saving game state c. Note that at this timing, the game state is in a non-time-saving game state, but because the symbol change display for Special Chart 2 shown in Figure 48 (l) began in time-saving game state a, the right-hit display continues.

After that, as shown in Figure 48 (m), when the symbol fluctuation display of Special Symbol 2 ends and the time-saving symbol ("Special Symbol E") stops, a star is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 284 to indicate that the time-saving symbol has stopped. Also, at this time, the word "GO" is displayed in the center of the display screen, notifying players that they have transitioned to time-saving game state c. As mentioned above, in time-saving game state c, the operating time of the shutter member 2311 of the Special Symbol 1 start port 231 is extremely short (e.g., 45 ms), making it difficult to win on Special Symbol 1; however, because a fluctuation time with a short fluctuation display time for Special Symbol 2 is likely to be selected, it may be possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls in your possession.

Figure 48(n) shows the state in which the time-saving c game state has begun and the symbol change display of special symbol 2 has begun. When the time-saving c game state is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "RUSH TIME display" in the upper center of the display screen, which indicates the execution time of the time-saving c game state, and also displays the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the time-saving c game state in the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 48(n) indicates that 0.18 seconds have passed since the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) began, and that the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the time-saving c game state is 143.

In addition, when the c time-saving game state begins, decorative symbols for the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed, and a mini symbol is also displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a variable icon display area 280 in the lower center of the performance display area 208d, and a special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 to the right of that. The special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282 displays hold icons representing holds for special pattern 2. The number of holds for special pattern 2 is represented by the number of lit special pattern 2 hold lamps 220 as well as the number of hold icons for special pattern 2. In the special pattern 2 hold icon display area 282, hold icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icons on the left being the hold icons with the oldest winning entries.

In Figure 48 (n), four special chart hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282, and all four of these special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 2 is a round hold icon.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(o), special symbol 2 stops at the losing symbol ("special symbol i"), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7," indicating that the display result is a losing symbol. The variable icon h0 also disappears. The fourth symbol display area 284 also displays special symbol 2 as a stopped cross, indicating that the display result is a losing symbol. At this time, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "00:01:98," indicating that 1.98 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game mode. While this "RUSH TIME" display shows the time since the time-saving c game mode began, the progression of time may be suspended during standby mode when no symbol variation display is being performed. It may also be displayed from the start of the first jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 48 (p) displays the state in which one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 has been consumed and the symbol variation display for Special Symbol 2 has begun. At this time, the reserved symbols h21, h22, h23, and h24 for Special Symbol 2 are each displayed moving using a moving animation. The reserved symbol at the display position of the first reserved symbol h21 moves to the variable symbol display area 280 and becomes variable symbol h0. The reserved symbol at the display position of the second reserved symbol h22 becomes the first reserved symbol h21 for Special Symbol 2. The reserved symbol at the display position of the third reserved symbol h23 becomes the second reserved symbol h22 for Special Symbol 2. The reserved symbol at the display position of the fourth reserved symbol h24 becomes the third reserved symbol h23 for Special Symbol 2. The decorative symbol variation display then begins. At this time, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "00:02:37," indicating that 2.37 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving game mode. It also notifies the player that the number of symbol changes until the time-saving game mode c ends is 142.

Figure 49 shows a step-by-step example of the presentation that occurs when a jackpot symbol stops and appears on Special Chart 2 during the c time-saving game mode (RUSH mode), resulting in a jackpot.

Figure 49(a) shows how the pattern change display of special symbol 2 has been performed 44 times since the transition to the time-saving play state c. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 49(a) is displaying the decorative symbol change. Also, in the state shown in Figure 49(a), the special symbol 2 change display is being performed, and both the normal symbol and special symbol 1 are displayed as still symbols. To indicate this, the fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 flashing, and the fourth symbols of the normal symbol and special symbol 1 are displayed as lit symbols.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in Figure 49 (a) is the time-saving game state c, a special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282 is provided to the right of the variable icon display area 280. Reserve icons representing reserves for special chart 2 are displayed in the special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282. The number of reserves for special chart 2 is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserve lamps 220 as well as the number of reserve icons for special chart 2. In the special chart 2 reserve icon display area 282, reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icons on the left being the reserve icons with the oldest winnings.

In Figure 49 (a), four special chart hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282, and all four special chart 2 hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 2 is a round hold icon.

Furthermore, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 49(a), the "RUSH TIME" display is "00:46:10," indicating that 46.1 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game state. Furthermore, the number of times the special symbol 2 will change display until the time-saving c game state ends is "100 times."

After that, as shown in Figure 49(b), Special Chart 2 stops and displays the jackpot symbol ("Special Chart B"), and at the same time, it stops and displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Additionally, Special Chart 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 also stops and displays a circle, indicating a jackpot. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Furthermore, the "RUSH TIME" display shows "01:30:00", indicating that 1 minute and 30 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving game mode c.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 49(c) displays "3000pt Jackpot!!" in the center of the display screen, indicating that two jackpots will occur. A right-hit display encouraging continued right-hit play is also displayed in the lower center of the display screen. The "RUSH TIME" display shows "01:40:87," indicating that 1 minute, 40 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game mode. When the jackpot game begins, the first variable winning slot 234 is not opened, and the second variable winning slot 235 is opened, starting the first round. The effects shown in Figures 49(d) to 49(h) are then performed. The effects shown in Figures 49(d) to 49(h) are similar to those shown in Figures 48(f) to 48(j), and therefore will not be described here.

Figure 49(i) shows a situation in which a gaming ball passes through a specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, resulting in a jackpot. At the timing shown in Figure 48(e), one gaming ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, so 15 prize balls are paid out. At the same time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "+15" in the upper center to indicate the number of winning balls. Also, "15" is added to the number of winning balls, and "TOTAL 04515pt" is displayed. After that, when 10 gaming balls enter the first variable winning opening 234, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Next, the shutter member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 retracts, opening the second variable winning opening 235 and commencing the round of play.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 49(j) shows an in-animation in which translucent button images move from the left and right sides of the display screen to the center. This can create a sense of anticipation as to whether or not a button effect will begin. If the button effect does not begin, the translucent button images do not merge, and instead frame out of the screen. At the timing shown in Figure 49(j), the total number of prize balls acquired is displayed as "04665pt," indicating that 4665 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the lower center is displayed as "1665/3000," indicating that 1665 prize balls have been acquired since the previous jackpot. The "RUSH TIME" display continues to progress, showing "02:34:87," indicating that 2 minutes, 34 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the initial c-time-saving game mode began.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 49 (k), a pair of translucent button images merge in the center, the button effect begins, a remaining time display bar is displayed along with the button image, and the words "Press!" are displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136.

When the player then operates the effect button 136, as shown in Figure 49(l), the letter "V" appears along with the words "Added!!," indicating that one more jackpot is available. On the other hand, the button effect may also be performed even if there is no additional jackpot. In this case, for example, a message such as "Sorry" may be displayed to indicate that there is no additional jackpot. Furthermore, the button effect may always be performed during a jackpot game, or it may be performed in some cases and not in others. At the timing shown in Figure 49(l), the total number of prize balls acquired is displayed as "04710pt," indicating that 4710 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot. The number of prize balls acquired in the lower center is displayed as "1710/4500," indicating that 1710 prize balls have been acquired since the previous jackpot and the number of prize balls (4500) that can be expected to be acquired in three jackpots. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won is updated to indicate an additional jackpot, but instead the number of rounds may be displayed and the additional rounds may be displayed to indicate an additional jackpot. Also, while the "V" display is set to disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed, it may be set to continue to be displayed until the jackpot game related to the additional jackpot has ended. Furthermore, the "RUSH TIME" display continues to progress and shows "02:35:87," indicating that 2 minutes, 35 seconds, and 87 seconds have passed since the initial c-time-saving game mode began.

Then, the jackpot game shown in Figure 49(m) continues, and the effects shown in Figures 49(n) to 49(r) are played. Note that the effects shown in Figures 49(n) to 49(r) are similar to the effects shown in Figures 49(d) to 49(h), so a description of them will be omitted.

In the above description,
"A first starting winning means [for example, a normal starting gate 228, etc.],
A first symbol display means (e.g., a general symbol display device 210, etc.) capable of executing a first symbol change display when a game ball enters the first start winning means;
When a winning symbol [for example, "normal symbol A"] is displayed in the first symbol change display, a certain electric device [for example, shutter member 2311] that can change from a first state [for example, closed state] to a second state [for example, open state],
an actuated gate [e.g., a normally-operated gate 228g, etc.];
a first playing area (e.g., a left playing area, etc.);
A gaming machine having a second gaming area (for example, a right gaming area) that is different from the first gaming area,
When the game ball passes through the operating gate, the certain electric device can change from the first state to the second state (for example, when the game ball passes through the normal electric operating gate 228g, the shutter member 2311 is activated and advances, making it easier for the game ball to enter the special drawing 1 starting hole 231, etc.),
The first start winning means is a winning means arranged in the first game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 32, a start opening 228 is arranged in the center of the game board 200, and a game ball flowing down the game area on the left side can win a prize, etc.),
The certain electric device is a device arranged in the second play area (for example, as shown in Figures 32 and 33, the shutter member 2311 is arranged in the play area on the right side),
The operating gate is a gate located in the second play area (for example, as shown in Figures 32 and 33, the normally powered operating gate 228g is located in the play area on the right side).

While conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in terms of playability, this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with unique playability.

Furthermore, this gaming machine may be able to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay features, allowing the first starting winning means and the operating gate to activate a common device.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols besides the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means. Furthermore, the first symbol display means may always display the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means, or may not always display the first symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means.

Also, a certain electric device may only be able to change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display, or may be able to change from the first state to a state other than the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display.Also, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display, or may not be able to change from the first state to the second state when a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol changing display.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may only be able to change from the first state to the second state, or when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may also be able to change from the first state to a state other than the second state. Further, when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state, or when a gaming ball passes through an activation gate, a certain electric device may not always change from the first state to the second state.

Furthermore, the first start winning means may be located only in the first game area, or may be located in an area other than the first game area. Furthermore, the first start winning means may always be located in the first game area, or may not always be located in the first game area.

Furthermore, a certain electric device may be placed only in the second play area, or may be placed in areas other than the second play area. Further, a certain electric device may always be placed in the second play area, or may not be placed in the second play area.

Furthermore, the operating gate may be arranged only in the second play area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second play area. Furthermore, the operating gate may always be arranged in the second play area, or may not always be arranged in the second play area.

Also,
"A second starting winning means [for example, the special drawing 1 starting port 231, etc.] that makes it easier to win when the certain electric device is in the second state,
A third starting winning means [for example, special drawing 2 starting port 232, etc.],
A second pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 1 display device 212, etc.] capable of executing a second pattern change display;
A third pattern display means (e.g., special pattern 2 display device 214, etc.) capable of executing a third pattern change display;
A first variable winning means (e.g., a first variable winning port 234, etc.),
A specific area (e.g., specific area 234v, etc.) through which the gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game control means (for example, a CPU 304 in the main control unit 300) capable of executing a small win game and a big win game is provided.
The first variable winning means is a means by which the game ball can enter in the small win game (for example, when a small win occurs in special drawing 1, the first variable winning port 234 opens, making it easier for the ball to enter, etc.),
The game control means is a means capable of transitioning to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the small win game (for example, as shown in Figures 48(d) to 48(e), when a small win occurs on special chart 1 and the game ball passes through the specific area 234v in the small win game related to the small win, the game transitions to the jackpot game, etc.),
The first gaming area is a gaming area in which it is recommended to let the gaming ball flow down in a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, etc.),
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in a second game state [for example, a time-saving game state, etc.] and a third game state [for example, c time-saving game state, etc.],
the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
the third gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is a gaming state different from the second gaming state,
The second symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the second symbol change display when a game ball enters the second start winning means [for example, when a game ball enters the special symbol 1 start hole 231, the special symbol 1 change display is executed, etc.],
The third symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the third symbol change display when a game ball enters the third start winning means (for example, when a game ball enters the special symbol 2 start hole 232, the special symbol 2 change display is executed, etc.),
The second game state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning means than in the first game state (for example, in a time-saving game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special game starting hole 232 than in the normal game state),
The third game state is a game state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second start winning means than in the second game state (for example, in the c time-saving game state, it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the special chart 2 start hole 232 than in the a time-saving game state),
After the jackpot game that has been transitioned to based on the result of the second pattern change display has ended, there is a case where the game state is transitioned to the second game state or the third game state (for example, if the result of the change display of special pattern 1 is a jackpot or a small jackpot, after the jackpot game that has been transitioned to based on this has ended, there is a case where the game state is transitioned to a time-saving game state or a case where the game state is substantially transitioned to c time-saving game state, etc.),
In the second symbol variable display, the result of a small win is more likely to be displayed than the result of a loss [for example, in the variable display of special symbol 1, the small win symbol is more likely to be displayed than the loss symbol].

This gaming machine may be able to provide a gaming machine with new gameplay that allows consecutive jackpots to be won in a short period of time and can even generate additional jackpots.

Here, the second symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the second symbol variation, or may be capable of displaying other symbols besides the second symbol variation. Furthermore, the second symbol display means may always display the second symbol variation, or may not always display the second symbol variation.

Furthermore, the third pattern display means may be capable of only executing the third pattern variable display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the third pattern variable display. Furthermore, the third pattern display means may always execute the third pattern variable display, or may not execute the third pattern variable display in some cases.

Furthermore, the specific area may be one that only gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass through, or one that only gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass through.Furthermore, the specific area may be one that gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means always pass through, or one that gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning means may not pass through.

Furthermore, the game control means may be capable of executing only small hit games and big hit games, or may be capable of executing games other than small hit games and big hit games.Furthermore, the game control means may be capable of always executing small hit games and big hit games, or may be capable of not executing small hit games and big hit games in some cases.

The game control means may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is only possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game, or may be such that a transition to a game other than a jackpot game is possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game. The game control means may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is always possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game, or may be such that a transition to a jackpot game is not possible when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game.

Furthermore, the first game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down only in the first game state, or one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down in game states other than the first game state. Further, the first game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down always in the first game state, or one in which it is not recommended to let game balls flow down in the first game state.

Furthermore, the second game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down only in the second game state and the third game state, or one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down in game states other than the second game state and the third game state. Further, the second game area may be one in which it is recommended to let game balls flow down always in the second game state and the third game state, or one in which it is not recommended to let game balls flow down in the second game state and the third game state.

Furthermore, the second symbol display means may be capable of only executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means, or may be capable of executing displays other than the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means.Furthermore, the second symbol display means may be capable of always executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means, or may be capable of not executing the second symbol change display when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means.

Furthermore, the third symbol display means may be capable of only displaying the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols in addition to the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means.Furthermore, the third symbol display means may always display the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means, or may not always display the third symbol variation when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means.

Furthermore, the second gaming state may be one in which it is easier for gaming balls to win only the second start winning means than in the first gaming state, or it may be one in which it is easier for gaming balls to win in winning means other than the second start winning means than in the first gaming state.Furthermore, the second gaming state may be one in which it is always easier for gaming balls to win in the second start winning means than in the first gaming state, or it may be one in which it is sometimes less easier for gaming balls to win in the second start winning means than in the first gaming state.

Furthermore, the third gaming state may be one in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to win only the second start winning means than in the second gaming state, or it may be one in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to win in winning means other than the second start winning means than in the second gaming state.Furthermore, the third gaming state may be one in which it is always more difficult for a gaming ball to win in the second start winning means than in the second gaming state, or it may be one in which it is not always more difficult for a gaming ball to win in the second start winning means than in the second gaming state.

Also, there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state only after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol change display has ended, or there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state other than after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol change display has ended. Also, there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state always after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol change display has ended, or there may be cases where the game state transitions to the second game state or the third game state does not occur after the jackpot game to which the game state transitions based on the result of the second symbol change display has ended.

Furthermore, the second pattern changing display may only display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss, or the second pattern changing display may have cases other than a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss. Further, the second pattern changing display may always display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss, or the second pattern changing display may not display a result that is a small win more often than a result that is a loss.

Also,
"The second symbol change display is a symbol change display that can be executed at a change display time selected from a plurality of change display times,
The third symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
In the second gaming state, the second symbol variable display is more likely to have a shorter variable display time [for example, a variable display time of 0.2 seconds] than the third symbol variable display.

With this gaming machine, the change time of the second symbol change display is short, which makes the transition from the first jackpot game to the second jackpot game feel seamless, and may improve the feeling of immediate consecutive wins.

Here, the second symbol variable display may be one that can be executed only at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times, or one that can be executed at a variable display time other than the variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times. Furthermore, the second symbol variable display may be one that is always executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times, or one that may not be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times.

Furthermore, the third pattern variable display may be one that can be executed only at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times, or one that can be executed at a variable display time other than the variable display time selected from multiple variable display times.Furthermore, the third pattern variable display may be one that is always executed at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times, or one that may not be executed at a variable display time selected from multiple variable display times.

Furthermore, in the second gaming state, only the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may be more likely to be selected, or in the second gaming state, variable display times other than the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may also be more likely to be selected. Further, in the second gaming state, the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display may always be selected, or in the second gaming state, there may be cases where the variable display time for the second symbol variable display that is shorter than the third symbol variable display is not selected.

Also,
"Equipped with a display means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208, etc.) capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
When the first pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display may be executed [for example, when the normal pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display is executed, etc.],
When the third pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display may be executed [for example, when the special pattern 2 change display is executed, the decorative pattern change display is executed, etc.],
Even if the second symbol variable display is executed, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed [for example, even if the special symbol 1 variable display is executed, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, etc.].

With this gaming machine, by not displaying decorative symbol changes during the second symbol change display, it may be possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative pattern change display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the decorative pattern change display. Furthermore, the display means may always display the decorative pattern change display, or may not always display the decorative pattern change display.

Furthermore, when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where only the decorative pattern change display is executed, or when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where displays other than the decorative pattern change display are also executed. Further, when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is always executed, or when the first pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is not executed.

Furthermore, when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where only the decorative pattern change display is executed, or when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where displays other than the decorative pattern change display are also executed. Further, when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is always executed, or when the third pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is not executed.

Furthermore, even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for only the decorative pattern change display to be executed, and even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for displays other than the decorative pattern change display to be executed. Furthermore, even if the second pattern change display is executed, it is not necessary for the decorative pattern change display to be executed, and even if the second pattern change display is executed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern change display is executed.

Also,
We also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, etc.] that can be opened and closed during the jackpot game."

Here, the second variable winning means may be capable of opening and closing only during a jackpot game, or may be capable of opening and closing during games other than a jackpot game. Furthermore, the second variable winning means may be capable of always opening and closing during a jackpot game, or may not always open and close during a jackpot game.

Also,
"Even if the gaming ball passes through the operating gate while the first symbol variation display is being executed, the certain electric device will be in the second state [for example, if the gaming ball passes through the normal electric operating gate 228g while the normal symbol variation display is in progress, the shutter member 2311 will advance even though the normal symbol variation display is in progress]," was also explained.

With this gaming machine, even if the first symbol change display is performed between jackpots or during an instant win streak, the activation gate is active, so a certain electric device can be activated without waiting for the first symbol change display to end. This makes the transition to the jackpot game between jackpots feel seamless, which may improve the feel of instant wins.

Here, even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, only a certain electric device may enter the second state, or even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, things other than the certain electric device may enter the second state. Also, even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, a certain electric device may always enter the second state, or even if a gaming ball passes through the activation gate while the first symbol changing display is being executed, a certain electric device may not enter the second state.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that, when a gaming ball passes through the operating gate, the certain electric device can change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol variation display."

Here, when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, only a certain electric device may be able to change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display, or when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, devices other than the certain electric device may also be able to change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display. Also, when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, a certain electric device may always change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display, or when a gaming ball passes through the activation gate, a certain electric device may not change from the first state to the second state without executing the first symbol change display.

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A certain starting winning means [for example, special drawing 2 starting port 232, etc.],
A certain pattern display means [for example, a special pattern 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a certain pattern change display when a game ball enters the certain start winning means;
A variable winning means (e.g., a second variable winning opening 235) that can be opened and closed during a jackpot game;
a first playing area (e.g., a left playing area, etc.);
A gaming machine having a second gaming area that is a gaming area different from the first gaming area [for example, a right gaming area, etc.],
the certain start winning means is a winning means disposed in the second game area,
the certain variable winning means is a winning means arranged in the second game area,
A game ball passage (for example, a ball passage 239) through which game balls that have not entered the variable winning means can flow down is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage provided with first protrusions [for example, ribs 23f1 to 23f3, ribs 23r1 to 23r3, etc.] for causing the gaming balls flowing down the gaming ball passage to collide with the first protrusions and slow down the flow speed of the gaming balls.

While conventional gaming machines have had room for improvement in the ball path, this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with a distinctive ball path.

In addition, this gaming machine may be able to reduce the speed at which gaming balls flow down, thereby improving the winning rate.

Furthermore, with this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a gaming ball that was shot during a jackpot but has not yet won a prize will win before the gaming ball is shot in the game state immediately after the jackpot, causing a payout before the gaming ball is shot, thereby suppressing gambling.

Here, a certain symbol display means may be capable of only displaying a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means, or may be capable of displaying other symbols in addition to a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means. Also, a certain symbol display means may be capable of always displaying a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means, or may not always display a certain symbol change when a gaming ball enters a certain starting winning means.

Furthermore, a certain variable winning means may be capable of opening and closing only during a jackpot game, or may be capable of opening and closing during other games as well. Further, a certain variable winning means may be capable of always opening and closing during a jackpot game, or may not always open and close during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, a certain start winning means may be arranged only in the second game area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second game area. Further, a certain start winning means may be arranged always in a certain game area, or may not be arranged in the second game area.

Furthermore, a certain variable winning means may be arranged only in the second play area, or may be arranged in areas other than the second play area. Further, a certain variable winning means may be arranged always in the second play area, or may not always be arranged in the second play area.

Furthermore, the game ball passage may be such that only game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means can flow down, or such that game balls other than those that have not entered a certain variable winning means can also flow down.Furthermore, the game ball passage may be such that game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means can always flow down, or such that game balls that have not entered a certain variable winning means may not always be able to flow down.

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage having a width that does not allow two or more gaming balls to flow down in parallel [for example, the ball passage 239 has a width that does not allow multiple gaming balls to flow down in parallel]."

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage that does not allow a gaming ball that is received without entering the certain variable winning means to enter a winning means other than the certain initial winning means."

Also,
"The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball passage is a passage having a serpentine portion (for example, an S-shaped structure extending from the second variable winning opening 235 to the special drawing 2 starting opening 232) that has a structure in which a portion of the gaming ball passage snakes downward."

Also,
The article also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized in that a second protrusion [e.g., rib 23f4, etc.] is provided on the serpentine portion to guide gaming balls flowing down the serpentine portion along the flow path."

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 11)
a first starting winning means;
a first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the first starting winning means;
When a winning symbol is displayed in the first symbol variation display, an electric device that changes from a first state to a second state;
an operating gate;
a first game area into which the game ball is more likely to enter when hit from the left than when hit from the right;
A second game area into which the game ball is more likely to enter when hit from the right than when hit from the left.
When the game ball passes through the activation gate, the certain electric device changes from the first state to the second state,
the first start winning means is a winning means arranged in the first game area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain electric device is a device placed in the second gaming area.

(Appendix 12)
12. The gaming machine according to claim 11,
A second starting winning means;
A third starting winning means;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variable display;
a third symbol display means capable of executing a third symbol variable display;
a first variable winning means;
a specific area through which a gaming ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game control means capable of executing a small win game and a big win game is provided.
The game control means is a means for transitioning to the big win game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the small win game,
The first game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in a first game state,
The second game area is a game area in which it is recommended to let the game ball flow down in the second game state and the third game state,
the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
the third gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is a gaming state different from the second gaming state,
the second symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the second symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the second start winning means;
the third symbol display means is a display means capable of executing the third symbol variation display when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning means,
The second game state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to win via the second start winning means than via the third start winning means,
The third gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming ball is more likely to win via the third starting winning means than via the second starting winning means,
After the jackpot game to which the transition is made based on the result of the second symbol variation display is completed, there are cases where the game state is transitioned to the second game state and cases where the game state is transitioned to the third game state,
In the second symbol variation display, the game machine is characterized in that a result of a small win is displayed more often than a result of a loss.

(Appendix 13)
13. The gaming machine according to claim 12,
The second symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
The third symbol variable display is a symbol variable display that can be executed at a variable display time selected from a plurality of variable display times,
In the second gaming state, the shortest variable display time is more likely to be selected for the second variable pattern display than for the third variable pattern display.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13,
A display means is provided for displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
When the first symbol variation display is executed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed,
When the third symbol variation display is executed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative symbol variation display is not executed even when the second symbol variation display is executed.

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 14,
The gaming machine is characterized by being provided with a second variable winning means that can be opened and closed during the jackpot game.

(Appendix 16)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 15,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain electric device is in the second state even when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate while the first pattern variation display is being executed.

(Appendix 17)
A starting winning means;
A certain symbol display means capable of executing a certain symbol variation display when a game ball enters the certain starting winning means;
A variable winning means that can be opened and closed in a jackpot game;
A gaming machine having a certain gaming area into which a gaming ball is more likely to enter when hit from the right than when hit from the left,
the certain start winning means is a winning means arranged in the certain game area,
the certain variable winning means is a winning means arranged in the certain game area,
a guide path for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the variable winning means to the start winning means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guideway is a passage provided with a first protrusion for colliding with a gaming ball flowing down the guideway to slow down the speed at which the gaming ball flows down the guideway.

(Appendix 18)
18. The gaming machine according to claim 17,
The guideway is a passageway having a width that does not allow two or more game balls to flow down in parallel.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to claim 17 or 18,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the guide path is a passageway having a serpentine portion, part of which is structured to snake downward.

(Appendix 19)
19. The gaming machine according to claim 18,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second protrusion is provided on the serpentine portion for guiding gaming balls flowing down the serpentine portion along the flow path.

Next, we will further explain specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment.

As explained using Figure 38, in Special Chart 2, if the time-saving play state is A, there are no misses, and either a big win symbol, a small win symbol, or a time-saving symbol will be displayed, with the probability that a time-saving symbol will be displayed. Conversely, in Special Chart 2, if the play state is other than A (normal play state, C time-saving play state), the time-saving symbol will not be displayed, and there is the highest probability that a miss symbol will be displayed. In other words, the time-saving symbol is only displayed in A time-saving play state. Also, in Special Chart 1, there are no misses regardless of the play state, and either a big win symbol or a small win symbol will be displayed, with the highest probability that a small win symbol will be displayed.

Also, as mentioned above, in the flow of play according to this embodiment, in the normal play state, play is centered on the variable display of the normal symbol, while in the time-saving play state c (RUSH state), play is centered on the variable display of special symbol 2. In other words, in the normal play state, among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, the variable display of the normal symbol takes top priority, while in the time-saving play state c (RUSH state), among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, the variable display of special symbol 2 takes top priority. Here, top priority means that a presentation corresponding to the variable display (for example, a decorative symbol variable display) is given priority. In the normal play state, if only the normal symbol is displaying a variable display among the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2, a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the normal symbol variable display (normal symbol decorative symbol variable display) is executed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if only special symbol 2 of the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2 is displaying a change, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 2 change effect (special symbol 2 decorative symbol change effect) is not executed. However, whether or not the special symbol 2 change effect is being executed is also notified on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the mini symbol and the symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284. On the other hand, in the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), if only special symbol 2 of the normal, special symbol 1, and special symbol 2 is displaying a change, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 2 change effect (special symbol 2 decorative symbol change effect) is executed. Note that with special symbol 1, the decorative symbol change effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 change effect is not executed under any circumstances. However, whether or not the special symbol 1 change effect is being executed is also notified on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the mini symbol and the symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284.

Figure 50 shows a step-by-step example of prioritizing the effect of the symbol that is displayed first when different symbols are displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

In normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode), it is recommended to hit from the left and aim for the normal game start slot 228, so a win at the special game 2 start slot 232, which requires a right-handed hit, is an irregular win. However, immediately after switching from the time-saving game mode, in which a right-handed hit is recommended, to the normal game mode, the special game 2 change display may be displayed due to the reserved special game 2 being consumed. Therefore, it is possible that both the normal game change display and the special game 2 change display may be displayed in the normal game mode.

Figures 50 (a) to (j) show examples where priority is given to the symbol that stops first when both the normal symbol and the special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed in normal play mode. Note that if the special symbol 2 display is a miss, no special symbol 2 effect will be displayed even if the special symbol 2 stops first. The special symbol 2 display takes longer to change during normal play mode than the normal symbol, and multiple normal symbol display changes may occur while one special symbol 2 display is being displayed.

A fourth pattern display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 50. The fourth pattern display area 284 is, from top to bottom, a display area for the normal pattern, a display area for special pattern 1, and a display area for special pattern 2. In the display area for each pattern, the left area is a hold number notification area, and the right area is a pattern change notification area. In this embodiment, there are no holds for special pattern 1, and normal pattern and special pattern 2 can each store a maximum of four holds. In the pattern change notification area for the normal pattern, while the normal pattern is stopped, a circle symbol indicating a win or a cross symbol indicating a loss is displayed lit up, but while the normal pattern is changing, a "-" symbol is displayed flashing. In the notification area for special chart 1 during pattern change, while the special chart 1 pattern is stopped, a circle indicating a big win, a triangle indicating a small win, or a cross indicating a miss is displayed lit up, but while the special chart 1 pattern is changing, a "-" is displayed flashing. In the notification area for special chart 2 during pattern change, while the special chart 2 pattern is stopped, a circle indicating a big win, a triangle indicating a small win, a star indicating a time-saving pattern has stopped, or a cross indicating a miss is displayed lit up, but while the special chart 2 pattern is changing, a "-" is displayed flashing.

In addition, a regular map hold icon display area 281 is provided in the left portion of the effect display area 208d in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 50. This regular map hold icon display area 281 displays a hold icon representing the hold of a regular map. Furthermore, a variable icon display area 280 is provided in the center of the effect display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change display.

The fourth pattern display area 284, regular pattern pending icon display area 281, and variable icon display area 280 described above are the same in the subsequent figures.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the normal game state, no change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 are performed, but change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of the regular symbol are performed. Note that in the c time-saving game state, the change display of the symbol on special symbol 2 is the main focus, so change effects using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 are performed.

In Figure 50(a), only the special symbol 2, which is the jackpot, is showing a variable display. As mentioned above, in normal game mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform a variable display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol 2, and the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 50(a) displays a stop display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. That is, "Decoration 8" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 3" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the right symbol display area 208c, and since the symbols are scattered, a miss for the normal symbol is announced. Additionally, a mini symbol MIN is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. This mini symbol MIN corresponds to a display that notifies whether or not a variable display of the symbol (regular symbol, special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is being performed. While a variable display of the symbol is being performed, the mini symbol is displayed as a variable display, and while a static display of the symbol is being performed, the mini symbol is also displayed as a static display. In the mini symbol MIN shown in Figure 50(a), the 8-3-4 mini symbol combination is displayed as a static display.

In normal game mode, it is recommended to aim for the normal map start hole 228 (see Figure 32) and make a left-handed hit. In Figure 50 (b), a win occurs at the normal map start hole 228, and the normal map change display begins on the normal map display device 210 shown in Figure 32. Hereinafter, when we refer to the normal map change display, we mean the change display on the normal map display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300. Also, when we refer to the special map change display, we mean the change display on the first special map display device 212 or second special map display device 214 controlled by the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 sends a map change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when the normal map change display begins and when the special map change display begins. The map change start command includes the time for the change display (change time). The first sub-control unit 400 is aware of the remaining time for the variable display of the special symbol 2, which continues from FIG. 50(a). If the currently active variable display of the special symbol 2 is a jackpot, upon receiving the normal symbol variable start command, it determines which variable display will end first: the normal symbol variable or the special symbol 2 symbol variable. Note that if the currently active variable display of the special symbol 2 is a miss, the above determination is not made. Also, while the above determination may be made, if the variable display of the special symbol 2 is a miss, no effect related to the variable display of the special symbol 2 will be performed even if the variable display of the special symbol 2 ends first. In this case, the variable display of the normal symbol ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a variable display using decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. In other words, the decorative symbols that had been displayed as still symbols begin to change, and the decorative symbols are rapidly changing in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Additionally, the mini symbol will also begin to change in the upper left corner. The regular symbol change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280 in the lower center.

In Figure 50 (c), the normal map's changing display continues, and the changing performance using the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal map's changing display shows a fluctuating display of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7". Because the normal map's changing display continues, the mini pattern MIN does not show a fluctuating display and continues to show the changing display, and the mini pattern MIN notifies that the normal map is changing. In this situation, a win is again made in the normal map start port 228, and normal map reserves are accumulated. The normal map reserve icon h11 is displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 281. Also, in the fourth pattern display area 284, "1" is displayed in the normal map reserve number notification area.

In Figure 50(d), there are three winning entries in the normal map start slot 228, and one more normal map is reserved. The normal map reserve icon h12 is additionally displayed in the normal map reserve icon display area 281. Additionally, in the fourth pattern display area 284, the value in the normal map reserve number notification area is updated to display "2." At the timing of Figure 50(d), the normal map fluctuation display ends, and the fluctuation performance using the decorative patterns corresponding to the normal map fluctuation display also ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 7" as frozen. Additionally, the mini pattern MIN combination of 5-4-7 is also frozen in the upper left. The normal map fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared in the fluctuation icon display area 280 in the lower center. Note that the fluctuation display of special map 2 is still ongoing.

In Figure 50(e), one reserved regular map is consumed, and the display of the regular map's changes begins. A pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current regular map pattern change or the special 2 pattern change continuing from Figure 50(a). Here again, the regular map pattern change display ends first. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 again starts a change performance using a decorative pattern corresponding to the regular map's change display. Note that the regular map reserved icon display area 281 displays an animation of the reserved icon moving, and the regular map change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. In addition, notifications of the regular map's changes also begin via the mini pattern MIN and the regular map pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284.

In Figure 50 (f), the display of the regular map's changes continues, and in the following Figure 50 (g), the display of the regular map's changes ends, and the display of the changes using the decorative patterns corresponding to the regular map's change also ends, with the decorative pattern display device 208 displaying a static display of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 7." Additionally, the mini pattern display displays a static display of the mini pattern combination of 4-1-7, and a cross is lit in the regular map's pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern display area 284, indicating that the regular map has stopped displaying. At this point, the number of reserved regular maps is 1. The display of the special map 2's change is still ongoing.

In Figure 50(h), the remaining regular symbol is reserved, and the display of the regular symbol's changes begins. A symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, which determines which of the symbol changes, the current regular symbol or the special 2 symbol change continuing from Figure 50(a), will end first. Here, the special 2 symbol change display that has been continuing until now ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a presentation that suggests a jackpot with the current special symbol 2 symbol change display. In other words, in conjunction with the start of the regular symbol change display, a shutter effect is started, which is a presentation that suggests a jackpot with that change, rather than a change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the regular symbol change display. When the shutter effect starts, a shutter image STG in a closed state is displayed on the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The shutter image STG displays the words "Rush Challenge Approaching," suggesting that the jackpot game is about to begin. Also, because this shutter image STG overlaps, the regular map's pending icon display area 281 and variable icon display area 280 are not visible, but the fourth symbol display area 284 and mini symbol MIN are displayed. The mini symbol indicates that the regular map is currently variable.

In Figure 50(i), the display of the variation of special symbol 2 ends. A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 50(i). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. In addition, a small right-hit display U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 50 (j), a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) for special symbol 2 has begun, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, the shutter image STG has disappeared and an image during the jackpot game, such as "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. The display of the normal symbol's change continues, and the mini symbol MIN and the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Also, below the mini symbol MIN, a prize ball count display TAL is displayed, which shows the cumulative number of prize balls won since the first jackpot game. Furthermore, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hit display U5 is still displayed.

The above explanation was an example of a jackpot being indicated by the variable display of special chart 2, but the same applies when the variable display of special chart 2 is indicated by a small jackpot. In other words, the shutter effect may be an effect that suggests a small jackpot in the currently active variable display of special chart 2. In this case, the text displayed on the shutter image SRG may be the same or different (e.g., "V Challenge Approaching"). Conversely, if the variable display of special chart 2 indicates a small jackpot, the shutter effect may not be performed. For example, if the variable display of special chart 2, which indicates a small jackpot, stops while the normal chart is changing, only a small right-hit display U5 may be displayed after the fixed stop of special chart 2 (at the start of the small jackpot). In other words, the background display and the variable display of the normal chart may continue as is. Here, if the game ball passes through specific area 234v during a small jackpot game, an image of the jackpot game may be displayed.

Also, if both the normal symbol and the special symbol 2, which is a losing symbol, are being displayed during normal play, regardless of which symbol stops first, the display will not feature a decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2's display, but will feature a decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol's display.

Figures 50 (A) to 50 (D) show an example in which, in the time-saving c game state, when both the variable display of special symbol 2 and the variable display of special symbol 1, which will result in a jackpot, are being executed (so-called simultaneous fluctuations), the effect of the symbol that stops first is prioritized. In the time-saving c game state (RUSH state), a right hit is made, aiming for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a jackpot is aimed at the variable display of special symbol 2. The variable time of special symbol 2 in this time-saving c game state is shorter than the variable time of special symbol 2 in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). In the time-saving c game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display of special symbol 2 is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

Figure 50(A) shows the state immediately after the c time-saving game state begins and the symbol change display of special symbol 2 begins. When the c time-saving game state is entered, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "RUSH TIME display" in the upper center of the display screen, which indicates the execution time of the c time-saving game state. The lower left corner of the display screen also displays the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 50(A) indicates that 0.01 seconds have passed since the c time-saving game state (RUSH state) began, and that there are 143 symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state. Furthermore, a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed. Below the number of symbol changes remaining until the end of the c time-saving game state, a presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed. Presentation modes will be described in more detail below, but in this case, the default presentation mode, presentation mode A, is selected.

In addition, when the c time-saving game state begins, decorative symbols for the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed, and a mini symbol MIN is also displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 282 for special pattern 2 is displayed to the right of that. In Figure 50 (A), the variable icon h0 for special pattern 2 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the variable display of special pattern 2 is being performed. In the central area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable effect using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of special pattern 2 has begun. In other words, in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of special pattern 2 has begun.

In Figure 50 (B), a win occurs at the special symbol 1 start port 231 in the electric chute, which opens for a longer time than in the normal game mode but shorter than in the A2 time-saving game mode. This win corresponds to an irregular win. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the special symbol 1 pattern change to the first sub-control unit 400, which then determines which of the two patterns, the special symbol 1 pattern change or the currently running special symbol 2 pattern change, will end first. Here, the special symbol 1 pattern change ends first. As mentioned above, in the special symbol 1 pattern change display, losing symbols are not displayed as stopped symbols, and either a jackpot symbol or a small jackpot symbol is always displayed as stopped symbols. The decorative symbol display device 208 prioritizes the display of the symbol that stops first, but in this embodiment, no change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol 1 pattern change display is performed. Instead, a shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a jackpot when the special symbol 1 pattern change display is performed, begins. Here, the shutter image STG is displayed so as to overlap the display of the decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 that has been performed until now. In other words, a new shutter effect is started in place of the decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2. The mini symbol MIN continues to notify that special symbol 1 is changing. Also, in the special symbol 1 pattern change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284, a flashing "-" symbol is displayed, continuing to notify that special symbol 1 is changing. The shutter image STG shown in Figure 50 (B) displays the words "Chance occurring," suggesting that the start of a jackpot game is imminent.

In Figure 50(C), the display of the variation of special symbol 1 ends. A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 50(C). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit indicator U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. A small right-hit indicator U5 is also displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that in special symbol 2, which was supposed to have a longer variation display than special symbol 1, the lottery result is discarded because the jackpot symbol was displayed frozen on special symbol 1, and a cross indicating a loss is displayed in the pattern variation notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 50(C), and a random mini symbol combination such as 4-1-7 is displayed frozen on mini symbol MIN. The timing for discarding the lottery results is when the jackpot symbol stops and is displayed on Special Chart 1, but it may be earlier (for example, when Special Chart 1 wins) or later (when the jackpot game begins).

In Figure 50 (D), the jackpot game of special symbol 1 (10R jackpot game) has started, and on the decorative symbol display device 208, the shutter image STG has disappeared and an image of the jackpot game, such as "Big Bonus," is displayed. The number of prize balls won display TAL is displayed below the mini symbol MIN. Also, the right-hand hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hand hit display U5 is displayed.

The text displayed on the shutter image STG changes depending on the type of jackpot. If the jackpot game always transitions to RUSH state after the end of the jackpot game, the text "Chance occurring" is displayed (Figure 50 (B)), and if the jackpot game transitions to RUSH state or normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, the text "RUSH challenge approaching" is displayed (Figure 50 (h)). Also, the time-limited game state in which it is difficult to win (7) in Figure 44) appears to be a RUSH state (c time-limited game state). Similarly, the normal game state in (8) in Figure 44 also appears to be a RUSH state. If special chart 1 is hit here, even though it appears to be a RUSH state, it is actually a normal game state in terms of control, so the text "RUSH challenge approaching" is displayed.

In addition, for special symbol 1 that results in a big win or a small win, a shutter effect may be displayed at the start of the change, regardless of the change time of the other symbol (special symbol 2 or regular symbol). However, even in this case, if special symbol 2 that results in a big win or small win stops first, it is preferable to execute the effect of special symbol 2 without executing the shutter effect at the start of the change.

Figure 51 shows an example in which, when both the normal symbol variable display, which indicates a win, and the special symbol 2 variable display, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed in normal game mode, the effect of the symbol that stops first takes priority.

Figures 51(a) to 51(c) are the same as Figures 50(a) to 50(c), and the variable display of special symbol 2, which indicates a jackpot, is being displayed (Figure 51(a)), but a prize is awarded at the normal symbol start port 228, and the variable display of the normal symbol ends before the variable display of special symbol 2, so the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a variable display using decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (Figure 51(b)). In Figure 51(c), the variable display of the normal symbol continues, a prize is awarded again at the normal symbol start port 228, and the reserved number of normal symbols is accumulated.

In Figure 51 (d), there is no new winning entry in the normal map starting slot 228, the normal map changing display ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7" in a stopped state.

In Figure 51 (e), the reserved regular map is consumed and the display of regular map changes begins. The regular map change display here becomes a winning change display. A pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the regular map pattern change this time or the special 2 pattern change currently being performed. Here too, the regular map pattern change display ends first. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 again begins a change performance using decorative patterns according to the regular map pattern change display.

In Figure 51 (f), the display of the normal symbol changes ends, the display of the change using the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbol change also ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 4" as a static display. Also, the mini symbol combination of 4-4-4 is displayed as a static display, and a circle is lit in the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284, indicating that the normal symbol has stopped displaying.

Since the regular symbol has been won, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 51(g) displays a right-hit indicator U4 and a small right-hit indicator U5 to recommend aiming for the electric chute inside the special symbol 1 starting hole 231. Note that at the timing of Figure 51(g), the variable display of special symbol 2 is still continuing. Also, at the timing of Figure 51(g), a win occurs at the special symbol 1 starting hole 231, the variable display of special symbol 1 occurs in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the small win symbol is displayed stationary on special symbol 1. In the symbol-changing notification area of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 51(h), a triangular mark lights up, the variable display of special symbol 1 ends, and it is notified that a small win has been won. At the timing of Figure 51(g), special chart 2 was still displaying a variable effect, but the small win symbol was displayed as a static symbol on special chart 1, causing the jackpot lottery result to be discarded, and a cross mark indicating a loss is displayed in the symbol-changing notification area for special chart 2 in fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 51(g). Furthermore, in decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 51(h), since a small win has been won, right-hit indicator U4 and small right-hit indicator U5 are displayed to promote entry into first variable winning slot 234. In Figure 51(h), the game ball enters first variable winning slot 234, passes through specific area 234v, and is promoted to a jackpot.

In Figure 51(i), a jackpot game has begun, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, and an image of a jackpot game that has been upgraded from a small jackpot, such as a "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. Also, the number of winning balls display TAL is displayed, and a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed.

Figure 52 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example different from the example shown in Figure 50, when both the normal symbol variable display and the special symbol 2 variable display, which indicates a jackpot, are being displayed during normal gameplay.

Figure 52(a) is the same as Figure 50(a), and only the special symbol 2, which is the jackpot, is displayed in a variable manner. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display using a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the regular symbol is displayed.

In Figure 52 (b), two balls win consecutively in the normal ball starting hole 228, and the decorative pattern display device 208 starts a variable effect using decorative patterns according to the normal ball variable display based on the previous win, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in the normal ball hold icon display area 281 based on the later win.

In Figure 52(c), the display of the normal symbol based on the previous win ends with a stop display of the losing symbol, and the display of the normal symbol based on the subsequent win begins. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the normal symbol change to the first sub-control unit 400, which determines which of the two symbol changes will end first: the current normal symbol change or the special 2 symbol change that continues from Figure 52(a). Here, the display of the special 2 symbol change that has continued until now ends first. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a shutter effect, which is an effect that suggests that the current special 2 symbol change will result in a jackpot. The shutter image STG shown in Figure 52(c) displays the words "Rush Challenge Approaching," suggesting that the jackpot game is about to begin. From Figure 52(c) to (e), both the special symbol 2 change display and the regular symbol change display are being executed, and the special symbol 2 change display ends at the timing of Figure 52(f). A circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the special symbol 2 symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 52(f). On the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen so as to overlap the shutter image STG, promoting a win in the second variable winning slot 235. In addition, a small right-hit display U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 52 (g), a jackpot game (10R jackpot game) for special symbol 2 has begun, and the shutter image STG has disappeared on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image during the jackpot game, such as "Rush Challenge Bonus," is displayed. The display of the normal symbol change continues, and the mini symbol MIN and the normal symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Also, the number of winning balls display TAL is displayed below the mini symbol MIN. Furthermore, the right-hit display U4 has disappeared, but the small right-hit display U5 is still displayed.

Figures 52(d'), (h), and (i) are modified versions of Figure 52(d). In Figure 52(d'), normally, a game ball would not enter the special chart 1 starting hole 231, but by chance, a game ball enters the special chart 1 starting hole 231, and the display of the special chart 1 change begins. This display of the special chart 1 change is assumed to be a small win. The main control unit 300 sends a command to start the change of the special chart 1 pattern to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the current change of the special chart 1 pattern or the change of the special chart 2 pattern continuing from Figure 52(c). Here, the change display of the special chart 1 ends before the change display of the special chart 2 pattern. As a result, the decorative pattern display device 208 would normally start a shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a small win with the changing display of special pattern 1, but since the shutter effect, which is an effect suggesting a big win with the changing display of special pattern 2, is already in progress, the shutter effect currently being displayed continues to be displayed. Note that even if the image is the same, a new display process may be performed. Furthermore, a new shutter image may be displayed as the changing display of special pattern 1 begins, without comparing the changing times of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

In Figure 52(h), the normal symbol continues to change, while the special symbol 1 changes and displays a small win symbol. A triangle symbol indicating a small win is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 52(h). In special symbol 2, which continued to change, the small win symbol was displayed as a small win symbol on special symbol 1, resulting in the big win lottery result being discarded, and a cross symbol indicating a loss is displayed in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 52(h). Since a small win was won on special symbol 1, a right-hit indicator U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen, overlapping the shutter image STG, to promote winning in the first variable winning slot 234, thereby promoting winning in the second variable winning slot 235. Additionally, a small right-hit indicator U5 is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284.

In Figure 52(i), the game ball enters the first variable winning slot 234, passes through the specific area 234v, and is upgraded to a jackpot. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 52(i), in response to the upgrade of the small jackpot on Special Chart 1 to a jackpot, the display switches to an image of a jackpot game that has been upgraded from a small jackpot, such as a "Rush Challenge Bonus." In this image of a jackpot game, a small right-hit display U5 and the number of balls won display TAL are also displayed.

In this way, the appearance appears to be that the shutter effect, which is an effect that suggests a jackpot when the special chart 2 changes, has been shortened. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when an irregular jackpot occurs. It also makes it less likely that the jackpot on special chart 2 has been discarded. In Figure 52(c''), the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, which can be passed by hitting to the right while the normal chart is changing in Figure 52(b). As explained using Figure 41(c), if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g while the normal chart is changing, the normal chart being displayed is interrupted regardless of the display result, and the display of the normal chart's change resumes when the opening and closing operation of the electric chute's shutter member 2311 based on the game ball passing through the normal power activation gate 228g is completed. Because the normal symbol variation display is interrupted, the special symbol 2 variation display, which indicates a jackpot, ends first, and a circle indicating a jackpot is displayed in the symbol variation notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 52 (j). In other words, the order of the normal symbol hit and the special symbol 2 jackpot has been reversed, and a sudden jackpot has occurred. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-hit display U4 encouraging a right hit is displayed in the center of the display screen, and a small right-hit display U5 is also displayed. However, no shutter effect is performed, and the shutter image STG is not displayed.

According to the above description,
"A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a ball detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting hole 228];
A second detection means (e.g., a second starting hole sensor) that is provided in a different area from the first detection means and detects the game ball;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
Equipped with
A gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
When the first detection means detects a gaming ball, a first pattern [for example, a normal pattern] may be displayed in a variable manner [for example, a normal pattern variable manner].
When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a variable display of a second pattern [for example, special pattern 2] [for example, special pattern 2 variable display] may be executed.
The first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that the first detection means detect a gaming ball [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)],
The second game state is a game state [for example, a time-saving game state c] that recommends that the second detection means detect a game ball,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first pattern change performance [for example, a normal decorative pattern change display] in accordance with the change display of the first pattern,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second pattern change performance [for example, a special pattern 2 decorative pattern change display] in accordance with the change display of the second pattern,
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the first symbol variation presentation in accordance with the first symbol variation display when the first symbol variation display is being executed in the first gaming state,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second symbol variation effect in accordance with the variable display of the second symbol when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the second game state [for example, FIG. 53(a)],
the effect means is means for not executing the second symbol variation effect in response to the variable display of the second symbol when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state;
The presentation means is a means for executing a presentation (hereinafter referred to as a "first specific presentation") [for example, a shutter presentation] that suggests that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second symbol when both the variable display of the first symbol and the variable display of the second symbol that will result in the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed are being executed in the first game state [for example, FIG. 50(h)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, the main variable display is determined depending on the gaming state, and players must aim to see that variable display while playing. In the first gaming state, the variable display of the first symbol is the main focus, but if the variable display of the second symbol is also being executed, the first specific effect may be executed, and by executing effects according to the situation, it is possible to liven up the game.

In this gaming machine, since the first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that a gaming ball be detected by the first detection means, the first gaming state has the highest priority to the variable display of the first symbol, and since the second gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that a gaming ball be detected by the second detection means, the second gaming state has the highest priority to the variable display of the second symbol. In the first gaming state, if the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, which results in a jackpot, and the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side are both active, if the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side stops before the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, the first specific effect will not be executed, and if the variable display of the second symbol stops before the variable display of the first symbol, the first specific effect will be executed.

The presentation means may also be means that, when the first game state is being executed and both the first symbol variable display and the second symbol variable display resulting in a small win symbol being displayed stationary, may execute a presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "second specific presentation") [for example, a shutter presentation] that suggests a small win.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be a display means, and the first pattern change presentation may be a presentation executed in the central area of the display means, and the second pattern change presentation may also be a presentation executed in the central area of the display means.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for not executing the second symbol variation presentation as the main presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol when, in the first gaming state, only the second symbol of the first and second symbols is being displayed in a variable display. The "main presentation" here refers to the presentation with the largest presentation area (display area) or the most noticeable presentation.

The presentation means may be means for executing the first pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the first pattern when, in the first gaming state, a change display of only the first pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed; the presentation means may be means for executing the second pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the second pattern when, in the second gaming state, a change display of only the second pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed [for example, Figure 53(a)]; and the presentation means may be means for not executing the second pattern change presentation in response to the change display of the second pattern when, in the first gaming state, a change display of only the second pattern of the first and second patterns is being executed.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the first specific presentation without executing the first symbol variation presentation even if the execution of the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed in the first gaming state, and the second symbol variation presentation ends before the first symbol variation presentation [for example, FIG. 50(h)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

If the presentation (first pattern change presentation) of another symbol (the first symbol) can be completed before a jackpot occurs, the first specific presentation is not executed. This prevents the player from knowing that a jackpot will occur until just before the jackpot occurs, allowing players to continue firing game balls until just before the jackpot occurs, making it possible for gaming establishments to provide gaming machines that are popular with gaming establishments. Even if the first symbol change display finishes before the second symbol change display, if the first specific presentation is executed, the player will wait for the second symbol change display to result in a jackpot when they see the first specific presentation, and will stop firing game balls, causing a disadvantage to the gaming establishment.

In addition, in the first gaming state, the variable display of the first symbol takes priority over the variable display of the second symbol, and if the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side stops and displays before the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side, the first specific effect is executed.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for executing the second specific presentation without executing the first symbol variation presentation even when the first symbol variation presentation has started, if the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol variation presentation ends before the first symbol variation presentation in the first gaming state.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for executing the first symbol variation presentation without executing the first specific presentation when, in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation in which a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first symbol variation presentation ends before the second symbol variation presentation [for example, Fig. 50(b) and Fig. 50(e)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By minimizing the timing of special displays such as the first specific effect, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort and to ensure that the tempo of the effect is not impaired.

In addition, in the first gaming state, if the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side stops and displays before the variable display of the second symbol on the non-priority side, the variable display of the first symbol on the priority side will be executed.

The presentation means may also be means for executing the first symbol variation presentation without executing the second specific presentation if, in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation presentation is started during the execution of the second symbol variation presentation, which results in a small win symbol being displayed in a stopped state, and the first symbol variation presentation ends before the second symbol variation presentation.

Also,
"The production means is a means capable of executing a second change notification (for example, notification of a mini pattern or/and a pattern change notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284) that notifies whether the change display of the second pattern is being performed or not,
The presentation means is a means for, when the variable display of the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state, not executing the second symbol variation presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol, but executing the second variation informing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The presentation means may be a means capable of executing a first change notification that notifies whether the first symbol is being displayed in a changing state (for example, a notification in the mini symbol and/or regular symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284).

The first fluctuation notification may be a notification that is executed in an area of the display means that is outside the central area, and the second fluctuation notification may also be a notification that is executed in an area of the display means that is outside the central area.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means that, when a variable display of only the second symbol out of the first symbol and the second symbol is being executed in the first gaming state, may not execute the second symbol variation presentation in response to the variable display of the second symbol, but may execute the second variation in progress notification.

Also,
"The first design is a normal design,
The second design is a special design [e.g., special design 2].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The special symbol may undergo a variable display when it wins a starting hole where the ease of winning remains unchanged, and may be a symbol that opens a variable winning hole when a jackpot is hit.

Figure 53 is a diagram showing an example of the transition from the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state (RUSH state) to the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) in stages.

In the c time-saving play state, it is recommended to aim for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 and hit to the right. In Figure 53(a), up to four special symbol 2s are reserved, and the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 each display a change effect (a swinging display in Figure 53(a)) using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of the special symbol 2. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 53(a) indicates that 3 minutes 25.01 seconds have passed since the start of the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), and that the number of symbol change displays until the c time-saving play state ends is 0. In other words, the current change display of the special symbol 2 will be the final change in the c time-saving play state. Also displayed are the mini symbol MIN, which indicates that the special symbol 2 is changing, and the fourth symbol display area 284. In the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 53 (a), the symbol change notification area for special symbol 2 indicates that special symbol 2 is changing. In addition, the number of winning balls display TAL and a small right-hit display U5 are also displayed.

Also displayed are a variable icon display area 280 and a special chart 2 hold icon display area 282. The variable icon display area 280 displays the special chart 2 variable icon h0 corresponding to the currently changing special chart 2 variable display, and the special chart 2 hold icon display area 282 displays four hold icons h21 to h24.

In addition, below the number of remaining symbol changes until the end of the time-saving play state c, the presentation mode selection display DMS is displayed, and the default presentation mode, presentation mode A, is selected.

In the state shown in Figure 53(a), a left-handed hit is made even though a right-handed hit is recommended, resulting in a win at the normal starting hole 228. This win at the normal starting hole 228 corresponds to an irregular win.

In Figure 53(b), the pattern of the normal symbol has begun to change. The fact that the normal symbol is changing is notified in the normal symbol pattern change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 53(b). In addition, the losing symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a stop symbol, the display of the change of special symbol 2 has ended, and the time-saving play state c (RUSH state) has also ended. In other words, in Figure 53(b), the game has transitioned to the normal play state. Upon the end of the RUSH state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 53(b) displays the result display of the RUSH state (result display RST) for a predetermined display period. The result display RST displays a time display RST1 that shows the total time from the start to the end of the RUSH state, and a prize ball count display RST2 that shows the cumulative prize balls won since the first jackpot play.

In addition, when the game transitions from the time-saving game mode to the normal game mode, when the game transitions from the jackpot game mode or the small jackpot game mode to the normal game mode, or when a 1G consecutive win transitions to the normal game mode, the main control unit 300 transmits the remaining time for the normal game mode to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 may also count the remaining time for the normal game mode. Because the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the result display RST, it cannot start a variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal game mode variation display and must wait for the result display RST to end. However, if the variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal game mode variation display is started after the result display RST has ended, the variation effect using the decorative symbols will start halfway through, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. For example, if a reach effect is being performed using a variation display using decorative symbols on the normal game mode and the reach effect starts halfway through, it may cause the player to feel very uncomfortable or may lead to suspicion of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not initiate a variation effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the normal map variation display, but instead determines whether the remaining variation time of the normal map transmitted from the main control unit 300 upon transition to the normal game mode is greater than or equal to a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). If the remaining variation time is greater than or equal to the predetermined time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a standby display when the result display RST ends. If the remaining variation time is less than the predetermined time, the result display RST continues to be displayed until the normal game mode variation display ends. If the result display RST continues to be displayed for too long, some players may mistakenly believe that the transition to the normal game mode has not yet occurred and hit the right button. In the normal game mode, the normal map variation display is the main focus. However, as described above, if the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g upon hitting the right button, the normal map variation display is interrupted, preventing gameplay from progressing. Therefore, if the remaining variation time of the normal map variation display is greater than or equal to the predetermined time, the standby display is displayed instead of the result display RST. On the other hand, the waiting display is a special display that is only displayed in irregular situations, such as when the normal game mode is returned to and the normal map variable display is already in progress. For example, if the normal map variable display starts to be executed during normal game mode, the waiting display will not be displayed, and as in Figure 50(b), a variable effect using decorative patterns corresponding to the normal map variable display begins. For players who have never seen a waiting display before, seeing it for the first time can be strange, and if the time is less than the specified time, even if the waiting display is not displayed, there is little chance that they will be mistaken for not having transitioned to normal game mode, so the result display RST continues to be displayed.

Figure 53(c) shows an example where the remaining time for the normal map change display is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. When the result display RST ends on the decorative symbol display device 208, the waiting display WAT is displayed, indicating that the remaining time for the normal map change display is 20 seconds. In other words, it is clearly indicated that the normal map change display is occurring, and it is prevented from interrupting the normal map change display by hitting to the right. This waiting display WAT may also include an indication encouraging a left hit. Note that a symbol change start command for special symbol 2 has also been sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and in Figure 53(c), the change display for special symbol 2 has also started, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 has decreased by one. The first sub-control unit 400 determines which change display will end first: the normal symbol pattern change that started in Figure 53(b) or the special symbol pattern change for special 2. In this case, the normal symbol pattern change display ends first.

In the waiting display WAT in Figure 53 (d), there are 19 seconds left until the normal map changing display ends, and there is another win at the normal map start port 228.

The waiting display WAT in Figure 53(e) shows that the remaining time is 0 seconds. While the waiting display WAT is displayed, the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed, but the mini symbol MIN is not. However, the mini symbol MIN may also be displayed. The reserved number notification area for the regular symbol in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 53(e) displays 1.

In Figure 53 (f), the normal map's variable display has ended, and the waiting performance has also ended. The normal map's variable display here is a miss. In the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the waiting display WAT, a stop display using a decorative pattern (a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7") corresponding to the missing stop pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is displayed.

In Figure 53 (g), one reserved regular map is consumed and the display of regular map changes begins.

In Figure 53 (f), the variable display of the normal map is a miss, while in the same figure (f'), the variable display of the normal map is a win. In the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the waiting display WAT, a decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" corresponding to the winning stopped pattern of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is displayed.

In the following Figure 51 (h), since the regular symbol has been won, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a right-hit indicator U4 and a small right-hit indicator U5 to recommend aiming for the electric chute inside the special symbol 1 starting hole 231.

Figure 53 (c') shows an example of a case where the remaining time for the normal map fluctuation display is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the result display RST. Before the player suspects that the game has not transitioned to the normal game state, a stop display using a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal map stopping pattern, as shown in Figure 53 (f) and (f'), is displayed.

In Figure 53(A), just like in Figure 53(a), the final change is taking place in the time-saving c game state, and four special symbols 2 are reserved. The decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a change effect (swing display) using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2. Also, in Figure 53(A), a left-handed hit is made even though a right-handed hit is recommended, resulting in a win in the normal symbol start slot 228 and the change display of the normal symbol starting. The fact that the normal symbol is changing is notified in the normal symbol symbol change notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 53(A).

In the following Figure 53(B), the losing symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a static display, the variable display of special symbol 2 ends, and the time-saving game state c (RUSH state) also ends. In other words, in Figure 53(b), the game has transitioned to the normal game state. The result display RST is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 53(B). Also, at the timing of Figure 53(B), the variable display of the normal symbol also ends, the winning symbol of the normal symbol is displayed as a static display, and a circle symbol indicating a normal winning symbol is displayed lit up in the normal symbol symbol variable notification area in the fourth symbol display area 284.

In this example, the game enters normal play mode during the period from when a normal symbol is hit until the electric chute containing the special symbol 1 starting hole 231 begins to operate, and a right-hit display is displayed to encourage the player to aim for the electric chute. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 53 (C), the result display RST ends, and a right-hit display U4 is displayed in the central area, with a small right-hit display U5 also displayed to the left of the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that the right-hit display U4 may continue to be displayed as the result display RST, overlapping it and making it difficult to see.

In the example of Figure 53 (B'), the variable display of a normal winning symbol ends even earlier than in Figure 53 (B), and in Figure 53 (B'), the electric chute begins to operate. In other words, the transition to normal game mode occurs while the electric chute is operating. In this case, the right-hit display U4 is not displayed in the central area as shown in Figure 53 (C), and the result display RST continues to be displayed as shown in Figure 53 (B'), with a small right-hit display U5 displayed. Note that the electric chute being operated includes any of the states in which the electric chute is waiting to start operating (during opening), the electric chute is open, and the electric chute has finished operating (during ending). If the right-hit display U4 were displayed so that it overlapped the result display RST, the player would not be able to see the result display for the RUSH state, which could affect their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, the right-hit display U4 is not displayed to prioritize the result display RST.

As mentioned above, Figure 53 shows an example of the c time-saving game state ending and transitioning to the normal game state, but the same applies when a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state in which right-hand play is performed ends and transitions to the normal game state. The same also applies when a 1G streak in the a2 time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state. In this case, instead of the result display RST, only the number of winning balls may be displayed, or a display indicating the end of the jackpot game (for example, a text display indicating the end of the jackpot game) may be displayed. Furthermore, a puncture display (a disappointment display when a V is not won on a jackpot or small jackpot, or when a win is not made on the electric chute (winning the electric chute = 1/1 for a jackpot or small jackpot)) may continue to be displayed.

Figure 54 shows a modified example of the standby display.

As the game state (stage) transitions to the normal game state, the waiting display WAT1 shown in Figure 54(a) displays "Stage transition in 20 seconds."

In the waiting display WAT2 shown in Figure 54 (b), there is no display regarding the remaining fluctuation time, and the message "Stage transition in progress" is displayed. If a right hit is performed while the waiting display WAT2 is displayed, and the game ball passes through the normal power activation gate 228g, the normal map fluctuation display will be interrupted as described above, resulting in a discrepancy between the remaining fluctuation time and the actual end timing. For this reason, in this example, the display regarding the remaining fluctuation time has been omitted.

In the example shown in Figure 54 (c), the result display RST is displayed while the waiting display WAT3 is also displayed. This waiting display WAT3 displays the time remaining until the result display RST, which is the result of the time-saving game state c, ends (in other words, the time remaining until the game transitions to the normal game state).

According to the above description,
"A first detection means for detecting a game ball [for example, a ball detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting hole 228];
A second detection means (e.g., a second starting hole sensor) that is provided in a different area from the first detection means and detects the game ball;
A presentation means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208),
Equipped with
A gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
When the first detection means detects a gaming ball, a first pattern [for example, a normal pattern] may be displayed in a variable manner [for example, a normal pattern variable manner].
When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, a variable display of a second pattern [for example, special pattern 2] [for example, special pattern 2 variable display] may be executed.
The first gaming state is a gaming state that recommends that the first detection means detect a gaming ball [for example, a normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)],
The second game state is a game state [for example, a time-saving game state c] that recommends that the second detection means detect a game ball,
The presentation means is a means capable of displaying a certain display (for example, a display capable of displaying a certain display if the remaining time of the display of the normal symbol variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time) when the display of the first symbol variation is being executed (for example, FIG. 53(b)) at the time of transition from the second game state to the first game state (for example, when the final variation in the second game state is completed),
The certain display is a display that cannot be displayed when the execution of the variable display of the first symbol is started in the first gaming state [for example, a display that will not be displayed in FIG. 50(b)] [for example, a waiting display WAT],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, the aforementioned display can alert players to irregular conditions, preventing them from mistaking them for malfunctions or other issues.

The presentation means is capable of displaying a certain display if the variable display of the first symbol is being executed when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

Also,
"The presentation means is a means for not displaying the certain display (for example, when the remaining time of the normal symbol display is less than a predetermined time) even when the first symbol display is in progress at the time of transition from the second game state to the first game state (for example, when the final change in the second game state is completed) [for example, Figure 53 (c')].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

In addition, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the certain display may not be displayed even if the variable display of the first symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for, when the variable display of the first symbol is being executed at the time of transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, displaying the certain display if the remaining variable display time of the currently executing variable display of the first symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined time, and not displaying the certain display if it is less than the predetermined time.

Also,
"The certain display is a display that notifies the remaining variable time of the variable display of the first pattern that is being executed,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

This makes it easy to know when you can resume playing, providing a convenient gaming machine.

The certain display may be a display relating to the time period during which the variable display of the first symbol is being executed, a display relating to the end of the variable display of the first symbol being executed, or a display relating to the transition of the game state [for example, the waiting display WAT1 shown in FIG. 54(a) or the waiting display WAT2 shown in FIG. 54(b)]. Alternatively, the certain display may be a display relating to the second game state [for example, the waiting display WAT3 shown in FIG. 54(c)].

Also,
The first detection means is provided in a first game area (for example, an area where a game ball hit by a left hand can be detected (a central area or a left side area)),
The second detection means is provided in a second game area (for example, an area (right area) where a game ball hit to the right can be detected),
The second game area is a game area provided with a third detection means (e.g., a normal power gate 228g) in addition to the second detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, if a gaming ball is detected by the third detection means, the variable display of the first symbol is suspended for a certain period of time [for example, while the electric chute is operating].
He also explained:

More specifically, the device may be equipped with a device that activates when the third detection means detects a game ball (for example, an electric chute with a special starting hole 231 inside and a shutter member 2311 that opens and closes), and the certain period may refer to the period during which the device is operating.

The first game area may be an area that the game ball can reach when hitting either left-handed or right-handed, and the second game area may be an area that the game ball can reach when hitting either left-handed or right-handed. For example, the first game area may be a left-handed area, and the second game area may be a right-handed area.

Furthermore, a fourth detection means may be provided in the second gaming area, and when a gaming ball is detected by the fourth detection means, a variable display of a third pattern [for example, special pattern 1] [for example, special pattern 1 variable display] may be executed, and the third pattern may execute a variable display when it enters a starting hole [for example, special pattern 1 starting hole 231] where the ease of winning varies, and may be a special pattern that opens a variable winning hole when a jackpot is hit, and in the case of a small win, when the gaming ball that enters the variable winning hole passes through a specific area [for example, specific area 234v], it may be upgraded to a jackpot.

Also,
"The first design is a normal design,
The second design is a special design [e.g., special design 2].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The special symbol may undergo a variable display when it enters a starting slot where the ease of winning remains unchanged, and when a jackpot is won, a variable winning slot opens.

Next, we'll go into more detail about the presentation modes.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the time-saving play state (RUSH state), the player can select one of multiple presentation modes by operating the up and down buttons on the cross key of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 30. This presentation mode is a mode related to the way presentations are performed using reserved icons and variable icons.

Figure 55 is a diagram explaining the presentation modes.

Figure 55(a) is a table showing the selectable rendering modes.

There are three types of presentation modes available. Presentation mode A is the default presentation mode. Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the presentation is executed less frequently than presentation mode A. The presentation here refers to a pre-reading preview presentation for the pending icon, and a presentation suggesting a jackpot for that change for the variable icon. Presentation mode C is a presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot is displayed on the pending icon or variable icon.

Note that while a player can only select this in the c time-saving game state (RUSH state), it may also be possible to make the selection in other game states (for example, the normal game state, the a1 time-saving game state, the a2 time-saving game state, or the probability variable game state). Alternatively, it may only be possible to make the selection in one or more of the c time-saving game state, the normal game state, the a1 time-saving game state, the a2 time-saving game state, or the probability variable game state. Furthermore, the above-mentioned presentation modes are merely examples, and presentation modes other than the above-mentioned presentation modes may also be selectable. For example, it may be possible to select a mode in which a specific presentation is executed more frequently, or a mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot for a certain preview presentation is higher.

Figure 55(b) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon in presentation mode A or presentation mode B.

The normal color is white, and the display mode of this normal color is the default display mode for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B. A rainbow color also indicates a guaranteed big win. Note that when describing the reliability of a big win in the explanation of presentation modes, the reliability of a small win is also included. This is because even a small win can be upgraded to a big win if it passes through the specific area 234v. However, it is also possible not to include the reliability of a small win.

In presentation mode B, the frequency of presentations is lower than in presentation mode A, so the frequency of normal-colored hold icons appearing increases. Also, by keeping the frequency of gold and rainbow colors, which have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more, the frequency of their appearance is the same as in presentation mode A, and making the frequency of blue, green, and red colors, which have a jackpot reliability of 10% or more but less than 50%, lower than in presentation mode A, presentation mode B becomes a presentation mode that is more likely to be executed when reliability is high, and can be considered a predictive chance mode.

Figure 55 (c) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon in presentation mode C.

As mentioned above, in presentation mode C, when a hold icon is generated, the hold icon always displays one of the jackpot reliability levels (except when the command described below is not received correctly), and this display continues even if the hold icon changes to a variable icon. Specifically, the hold icon display mode is determined to achieve the reliability shown in Figure 55(c) based on the pre-read result information when the game ball enters special chart 2 starting hole 232, and the hold icon is displayed in the determined display mode. The displayed jackpot reliability (display mode) and the actual jackpot reliability may all be the same, but a display mode of 99% actually indicates a 100% jackpot. A display of 100% is intentionally avoided. Also, 3000% may be displayed, and in this case, the jackpot is actually 100% confirmed. This 3000% display is a display mode that is only displayed when special chart B or special chart C is won. If you win on Special Chart B or Special Chart C, the game will transition to a2 time-saving game mode after the jackpot play ends, and since you can expect to win 3,000 prize balls with a 1G streak (two jackpots), the maximum number of prize balls that can be won is displayed as a percentage to liven up the game. In this way, if you win and there is some kind of bonus (in this case, two wins are guaranteed), a number exceeding 100% may be displayed.

The 1% display mode is also the default display mode for presentation mode C. This 1% display mode is the display mode that is always displayed on the reserved (remaining reserved) special chart 2 that will be consumed after the time-saving play state c (RUSH state) or time-saving play state a ends. The default display mode is not limited to the 1% display mode, and can be any mode with the lowest reliability (for example, 0.1%), or a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode where the % display is not displayed or a display mode where a question mark is displayed).

Furthermore, when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) falls below a predetermined number (for example, 10 spins, 5 spins, or a number that is at least half of the total), a display mode with a low reliability (for example, "1%" or "5%) may be more likely to be displayed. In other words, when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) is below a predetermined number, a jackpot is more likely to occur with a lower reliability than when the remaining number of times is greater than the predetermined number. In this way, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained even when the number of remaining times in the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) is low and only icons with a display mode that is unlikely to result in a jackpot are displayed.

The hold icon or variable icon explained above applies to Special Chart 2. In Special Chart 1, there will always be a big hit or a small hit, and there are no holds to begin with. On the other hand, for hits on regular charts, the hold icon or variable icon explained above may be the subject. In other words, the jackpot reliability becomes the hit reliability.

In this embodiment, of the multiple presentation modes, certain presentation modes such as presentation mode A and presentation mode B perform a normal change presentation of the pending icon. In this normal change presentation, the change may occur when a win is won or when the pending icon shifts. Furthermore, of the multiple presentation modes, certain presentation modes such as presentation mode C display the probability of a jackpot as a percentage (reliability display) on the pending icon or variable icon. This reliability display begins to be displayed when a pending occurs and does not change when the display shifts. Note that the reliability display may change when a shift is made, but the original reliability display should be displayed before it is displayed as a variable icon. In other words, the reliability display does not change after it is displayed as a variable icon.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55(b), the number of display modes in presentation mode A or presentation mode B is six, whereas as shown in the same figure (c), the number of display modes in presentation mode C is eight. In this way, the number of display modes is greater in presentation mode C than in presentation mode A or B. Note that the number of display modes in presentation mode A or presentation mode B may be greater than the number of display modes in presentation mode C.

Figure 56 shows a step-by-step example of how the game progresses while changing the presentation mode in the time-saving game mode (RUSH mode).

As mentioned above, in the c time-saving play state, it is recommended to aim for the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 and hit the ball to the right, which makes it easier to accumulate special symbol 2 reserves. In the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56, a change effect using decorative symbols corresponding to the change display of special symbol 2 is performed. Furthermore, a change icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282 is displayed to the right of it. Furthermore, it is notified that 0.01 seconds have passed since the start of the c time-saving play state (RUSH state), and that the number of symbol change displays until the c time-saving play state ends is 143. In other words, the currently active change display of special symbol 2 is the first change display since the transition to the c time-saving play state. In addition, a mini symbol MIN is displayed to indicate that special symbol 2 is changing, and the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of winning balls display TAL, and a small right-hand hit display U5 are also displayed.

In Figure 56 (a), presentation mode A is selected, and a round, normal-colored (white) variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. The round, normal-colored (white) variable icon and the hold icon are icons that are only displayed while presentation mode A is selected.

In Figure 56 (b), one reserve for Special Chart 2 has been accumulated, and the first reserve icon h21, which is round and in the normal color (white), is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2.

In Figure 56 (c), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 30 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. Then, the round, normal-colored variable icon h0 and first hold icon h21 that had been displayed up until then change to the triangular, normal-colored variable icon h0 and first hold icon h21. The triangular, normal-colored variable icon and hold icon (hereinafter collectively referred to as "icons") are the default display mode for presentation mode B. When presentation mode A is changed to presentation mode B, the presentation mode A icons that had been displayed up until then are all re-displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode B. Also, when presentation mode B is changed to presentation mode A, the presentation mode B icons that had been displayed up until then are all re-displayed in the default display mode for presentation mode A (round, normal color). The same applies when changing from presentation mode C to presentation mode A, or when changing from presentation mode C to presentation mode B; in the former case, the presentation mode C icon that was previously displayed is re-displayed in the default display format for presentation mode A (round, normal color), and in the latter case, it is re-displayed in the default display format for presentation mode B (triangle, normal color). The default display format is different for presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and a triangular icon is used for presentation mode B, but it may also be common. For example, a round icon may also be used in presentation mode B. On the other hand, the default display format for presentation mode C is a square, normal color icon displayed at 1%, so it cannot be common with other modes.

In Figure 56 (d), one reserve has been added to Special Chart 2, and a triangular second reserve icon h22 in the normal color is additionally displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2. The additional reserve here actually has a jackpot probability of 15% and is green, but because presentation mode B has been selected, the frequency of the pre-read preview presentation is reduced and it is displayed in the normal color.

In Figure 56 (e), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode B to presentation mode C. Icons that were already displayed at the time the presentation mode was changed to C will not be displayed in the display mode of presentation mode C. Therefore, the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h21, and the second hold icon h22 remain triangular icons. Note that the hold icon corresponding to presentation mode C may be displayed again at the time the presentation mode is switched to presentation mode C. In other words, at the time the presentation mode is switched to presentation mode C, a lottery is re-drawn using the advance reading result information, and the reliability of the hold icon is displayed.

In Figure 56 (f), the number of reserved items for Special Chart 2 is increased by one. In other words, this is the increase in reserved items after switching to Presentation Mode C. A third reserved item h23, a square with 1% displayed, is additionally displayed in the reserved item icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2.

In Figure 56 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 56 (h), one reserve for special chart 2 has been consumed and a new pattern change has begun. The icon that was previously the first reserve icon h21 is now displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280, and in the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, the triangular icon that was previously the second reserve icon h22 has shifted to become the first reserve icon h21, and the square icon that was previously the third reserve icon h23 and displayed as 1% has shifted to become the second reserve icon h22.

In Figure 56 (i), when presentation mode C is selected, one more hold is added to special chart 2. A third hold icon h23, a square with a 10% display, is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In Figure 56 (j), the player presses the up button on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode C to presentation mode A. As a result, as described above, all icons that had been displayed up to that point are uniformly redisplayed in the default display format of presentation mode A (round, normal color). Note that pending icons that began displaying in presentation mode C may remain displayed even if the presentation mode is changed.

In Figure 56 (j), the player presses the up button on the cross key of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 30 once, changing the presentation mode from presentation mode C to presentation mode A. As a result of step k, as described above, all icons that had been displayed up to that point are uniformly redisplayed in the default display format of presentation mode A (round, normal color).

After this, play continues in the time-saving c game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 56 (k) indicates that 34 minutes and 10.00 seconds have passed since the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) began, and that there is only one more symbol change display until the time-saving c game state ends. The selected presentation mode is presentation mode C, and the change icon h0 is a square icon displaying 30%, and the decorative symbol change display is in a reach state. Furthermore, the number of reserved positions for special symbol 2 is 2, and the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 displays a square first reserved icon h21 displaying 10% and a square second reserved icon h22 displaying 1%. Here, the reserved special symbol 2 represented by the second reserved icon h22 becomes a remaining reserved symbol that will be consumed after the time-saving c game state ends, since there is only one more symbol change display until the time-saving c game state ends, and as mentioned above, a 1% probability is displayed, rather than the actual probability of a jackpot. In other words, because the second reserved icon h22 is a reserved symbol that represents a remaining reserve, it is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode C.

In Figure 56 (l), the display of the decorative symbols that were in a reach state has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the decorative symbol combination that was not in a reach state is displayed as still.

In Figure 56 (m), one reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 is consumed, and the final change in time-saving game state c begins. As shown in Figure 56 (n), this final change increases the reserved symbol for Special Chart 2 by three, bringing the number of reserved symbols for Special Chart 2 to four, and the symbol is now fully reserved. Since the three additional reserved symbols are also remaining symbols, the second reserved symbol h22, third reserved symbol h23, and fourth reserved symbol h24 are all displayed in the default display mode of 1% display presentation mode C.

Next, we will explain the failure of the first sub-control unit 400 to receive a winning command. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command from the main control unit 300 each time a win occurs at the special chart 2 start port 232 and the number of reserved balls increases. This winning command contains the current number of reserved balls and pre-read result information that predicts the outcome of the winning ball. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a pattern change start command from the main control unit 300 each time the display of the special chart 2 changes begins. This pattern change start command also contains the current number of reserved balls and pre-read result information for each reserved ball. The first sub-control unit 400 may very rarely fail to receive a command that has been sent to it due to reasons such as a poor connection in the cable through which the command is transmitted.

Figure 57 shows a step-by-step example of what happens when a winning command is missed when presentation mode A is selected.

Figure 57(a) is the same state as Figure 56(a), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but it shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode A has been selected, the icon shape is round. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 57(a) displays variable icon h0 in the normal color (white).

In Figure 57 (b), one ball wins in the special chart 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning command, it updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, an additional reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. Here, a round, normal color (white) first reserved icon h21 is additionally displayed. Figure 57 (b) shows how the first reserved icon h21 is displayed by an increasing animation performed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. This increase animation is an animation in which the hold icon gradually becomes larger. In Figure 57(b), the increase animation begins, and the first hold icon h21 is displayed small, while in the following Figure 57(c), the increase animation ends, and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. Figure 57(b) also shows the speaker 120 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, and a hold increase sound (here, a "beep" sound) is output from this speaker 120.

In Figure 57(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, 1 remains displayed in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 57(d). In the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57(d), the second reserved icon h22 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

More than one second after Figure 57(d) has passed, one more ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The winning command here includes the current number of reserved balls being three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3." As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative pattern display device 208, via the second sub-control unit 500, to display the second reserved icon h22 and the third reserved icon h23. As shown in Figure 57(e), the third reserved icon h23 is displayed with an increasing animation, but the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is displayed at the specified size from the beginning without the increasing animation. By doing this, the second hold icon h22 is displayed before the third hold icon h23, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the hold icons that were not displayed are displayed in the default display mode, i.e., in their normal colors. Furthermore, in the hold number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 57(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the value of the hold number is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound indicating that the third hold has been increased, but does not output a hold increase sound indicating that the second hold has been increased. In other words, only a "beep" sound indicating an increase in one hold is output, and a "beep beep" sound indicating an increase in two hold numbers is not output.

In Figure 57 (f), the increasing animation of the third hold icon h23 has ended, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed in the normal color at the specified size.

In Figure 57 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 57 (h), one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 57 (h) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the display of the decorative symbol change for Special Symbol 2 begins. The icon that was previously the first reserved symbol h21 moves to the variable symbol display area 280 using a moving animation and is displayed as variable symbol h0. In addition, in the reserved symbol display area 282 for Special Symbol 2, the second reserved symbol h22, which was displayed without an increase animation due to a failed command reception upon winning, moves using a moving animation and is displayed as the first reserved symbol h21, and the third reserved symbol h23, which was displayed normally, moves using a moving animation and is displayed as the second reserved symbol h22. In Figure 57, the moving animation is indicated by arrows. During this moving animation, the icon that was the second reserved symbol h22 turns blue and is displayed as the blue first reserved symbol h21. As mentioned above, the symbol change start command contains pre-read result information for each reserved icon. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the icon represented by the second reserved icon h22 from its normal color to blue based on the pre-read result information for the reserved icon. The winning command only contains pre-read result information for the winning result, and does not include the pre-read result for the reserved icon that was not displayed due to a failed command reception. For this reason, the icon is displayed in the default normal color at the start of display in Figure 57(e). It is also possible to include pre-read result information for each reserved icon in the winning command, and display the reserved icon that was not displayed in a display mode that indicates the reliability of a jackpot from the start of display. However, the reserved icon that is suddenly displayed may stand out because it is not in its default display mode, which may create a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, changing the display mode during the movement animation is more natural, as it changes amidst the movement.

Figure 57 (h) also shows the speaker 120, which outputs the hold icon change sound (here, a "beep" sound).

In Figure 57(i), the icon movement animation has ended. In addition, one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 increases by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, here too, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, the number 2 is still displayed in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 57(i). In the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57(i), the third reserved icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 57 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 57(k), one reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. As described above, the symbol change start command indicates that the current reserved number is two. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and even though the display of the change for Special Symbol 2 has begun, the reserved number for Special Symbol 2 remains at two, so it displays the second reserved symbol h22. This second reserved symbol h22 is also displayed in the default display mode (normal color) at a predetermined size from the beginning without any increasing animation. Furthermore, a movement animation is also started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and during this movement animation, the icon that was the second reserved symbol h22 changes from normal color to green based on the advance reading result information included in the symbol change start command. Furthermore, in the reserved symbol number notification area for Special Symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in Figure 57(k), the number 1 is not displayed, and the number 2 remains displayed. In other words, the pending number remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 57 (l), the icon movement animation has finished, and the blue variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the first variable icon h21 in normal color and the second variable icon h22 in green are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2. In addition, a hold icon change sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that here, the sound for changing to a blue icon and the sound for changing to a green icon are the same sound, but the change sound may be different depending on the changing color or value (display mode).

Figure 58 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of what happens when a command is missed when a win occurs while presentation mode C is selected. Because the timing of the win and the missed command are the same as the example shown in Figure 57, the explanation will focus on the differences, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

Figure 58(a) shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode C has been selected, the icon shape is square. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 58(a) displays a square variable icon h0 with a 10% display.

In Figure 58(b), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, increasing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the winning command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, a reserved ball is additionally displayed in the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. Here, a square first reserved ball icon h21 is additionally displayed. In the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 shown in Figure 58(b), the first reserved ball icon h21 gradually becomes larger through an increasing animation. At first, the player cannot see the percentage value because the icon is too small, but gradually the percentage value becomes visible, which is more likely to pique the player's interest than a color-based reliability display. In addition, a reserved ball increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 58 (c), the increase animation has ended and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. The first hold icon h21 displays 1%.

In Figure 58(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, in the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 58(d), the second pending icon h22 that should be displayed is shown in dotted lines.

More than one second after Figure 58(d) has elapsed, another ball lands in the Special 2 starting hole 232, and the main control unit 300 sends a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for Special 2 is "3." In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58(e), the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is already displayed at the specified size, and the third reserved icon h23 is gradually becoming larger through an increasing animation. The second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode (round, normal color display mode) of presentation mode A, rather than the square display mode displaying the probability of a jackpot in presentation mode C. This is the same display mode as the icon displayed immediately after power is restored due to a power outage, as described below. Furthermore, the default display mode for this presentation mode A (a round, normal-color display mode) is a display mode for icons that would not normally be displayed in presentation mode C. Also, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 58(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the reserved number value is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, the speaker 120 only outputs a single reserved number increase sound, such as a "beep," indicating that the third reserved number has been added.

In Figure 58 (f), the increasing animation of the third hold icon h23 has ended, and a square third hold icon h23 is displayed at 5% of the specified size.

In Figure 58 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 58 (h), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command containing the prediction results for each reserved symbol is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the icon movement animation begins. Due to the failure to receive the winning command, the second reserved symbol h22, which was displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode), changes to the display mode of presentation mode C as it moves through the movement animation, and is displayed as the square first reserved symbol h21 with a 5% display. The first sub-control unit 400 changes the display mode of the reserved symbol, which changes from the second reserved symbol h22 to the first reserved symbol h21, based on the prediction results for the first reserved symbol contained in the received symbol change start command. Also, a change sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 58(i), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, even here, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. In the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 58(i), the third pending icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 58 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 58 (k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a symbol change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved symbols is two and including the results of the advance reading for each reserved symbol. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this symbol change start command, and although the display of the change for special symbol 2 has begun, the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 remains at two. Therefore, the second reserved symbol h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) at the specified size from the beginning without any increase animation. Furthermore, a movement animation is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and during this movement animation, the icon that was the third reserved symbol h23 changes to the display mode of presentation mode C based on the advance reading results included in the symbol change start command, and is displayed as the square second reserved symbol h22 with a 20% display. Furthermore, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 58(k), 2 remains displayed without displaying 1. In other words, the reserved number value remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 58 (l), the icon movement animation has finished, and the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0 with a 5% display, while the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 with a 5% display and the second hold icon h22 with a 20% display. Additionally, a change sound is being output from the speaker 120.

Next, we will explain what happens when power is momentarily interrupted in each performance mode and then immediately restored.

Figure 59 shows a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in each performance mode and then immediately restored.

Figures 59(a) to 59(d) show a step-by-step example of what happens when a temporary power outage occurs in rendering mode A and power is immediately restored.

Figure 59 (a) shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Since presentation mode A is selected, the icon is round. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 59 (a) displays variable icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A, and the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 and the second hold icon h22, both of which are in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A.

In this state, power is momentarily interrupted (Figure 59(b)), and then immediately restored. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the message "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 59(c).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59 (d) is the state after the "Preparing to return" display has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode remains in presentation mode A, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) and the first reserved icon h21 in the same default display mode (normal color) are displayed.

Figures 59 (A) to (D) show a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in performance mode B and then immediately restored.

Figure 59 (A), like before, shows the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Here, because presentation mode B has been selected, the icon is triangular in shape. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 59 (A) displays variable icon h0 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode B, and the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 and second hold icon h22, both of which are in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode B.

In this state, power is momentarily interrupted (Figure 59 (B)), and then immediately restored. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 59 (B).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59 (D) is the state after the display "Preparing to return" has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode has been changed from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, which is the default presentation mode. As a result, the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (round, normal color) of presentation mode A and the first reserved icon h21 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A are displayed.

Figures 59 (A) to (D) show a step-by-step example of what happens when power is interrupted momentarily in performance mode C and then immediately restored.

Figure 59 (A) shows, as before, the state in which the first variable display of special chart 2 is being performed after transitioning to time-saving play state c. Here, because presentation mode C has been selected, the icon is square and the percentage of the probability of a jackpot is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 59 (A) displays a square variable icon h0 displaying 30%, and the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2 displays a square first reserved icon h21 displaying 10% and a square second reserved icon h22 displaying 1%.

In this state, power is interrupted for a moment (Figure 59 (a)), and then restored immediately. Immediately after power is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "Preparing to restore," as shown in Figure 59 (c).

The state of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59 (E) is the state after the display "Preparing to return" has disappeared, the reserved special pattern 2 has been consumed, and the display of the changing decorative pattern of the new special pattern 2 has begun. The presentation mode has been changed from presentation mode C to presentation mode A, which is the default presentation mode. As a result, the changing icon h0 in the default display mode (round, normal color) of presentation mode A and the first reserved icon h21 in the default display mode (normal color) of presentation mode A are displayed.

As explained above, in any presentation mode, after power is restored, the display will return to the default presentation mode A, and the icon display will return to the default display mode for presentation mode A (round, normal color).

Next, we will explain a modified presentation mode. In this modified presentation mode, the default display mode of the hold icon in presentation mode A is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon in presentation mode B, and in presentation mode C, the default display mode in presentation mode A and presentation mode B is displayed with a percentage indication of the probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, while the icon shape was triangular in presentation mode B, it is round in this modified presentation, and there is no difference in the shape of the icon in either presentation mode. Also, in this modified presentation, the pattern change start command does not include advance reading result information for each hold.

Figure 60 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of what happens when a command is missed when a winning prize is awarded while the modified presentation mode C is selected. Because the timing of the winning prize and the timing of the missed command are the same as the example shown in Figure 58, the explanation will focus on the differences, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

Figure 60(a) shows the state in which the first change in special chart 2 is being displayed after transitioning to time-saving play mode c. The change icon display area 280 shown in Figure 60(a) displays a round change icon h0 with a 10% indication.

In Figure 60(b), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, increasing the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 by one, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning command, it updates the value in the reserved ball number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284. Here, the value is updated from 0 to 1. In addition, a reserved ball is additionally displayed in the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. Here, a round first reserved ball icon h21 is additionally displayed. In the reserved ball icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 shown in Figure 60(b), the first reserved ball icon h21 gradually becomes larger through an increasing animation. In addition, a reserved ball increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 60 (c), the increase animation has ended and the first hold icon h21 is displayed at the specified size. The first hold icon h21 displays 1%.

In Figure 60(d), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. As a result, in the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 60(d), the second pending icon h22 that should normally be displayed is shown in dotted lines.

More than one second after Figure 60(d) has elapsed, another ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and the main control unit 300 sends a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current number of reserved balls is three. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this winning command and determines that the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3." In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 60(e), the second reserved icon h22, which failed to display due to a failed command reception, is already displayed at the specified size, and the third reserved icon h23 is gradually becoming larger through an increasing animation. The second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). This is the same display mode as the icon displayed immediately after power is restored following the aforementioned power outage. Furthermore, this default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) is a display mode of an icon that would not normally be displayed in presentation mode C. Also, in the reserved number notification area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 60(e), 2 is not displayed, but 3 is displayed. In other words, the reserved number value is updated from 1 to 3 in one go, skipping 2. Furthermore, only one reserved increase sound, such as a "beep," is output from the speaker 120, indicating that the third reserved number has been increased. Note that if there is a reserved icon that was not displayed due to a command reception failure (if there is a reserved icon whose pre-read result is unknown), the display mode of the reserved icon that appeared after this reserved icon is not changed. For example, if a display mode showing "99%" is used on a reserved icon that appeared after a reserved icon that failed to display due to a command reception failure, and the pachinko machine is equipped with a special symbol high probability state and transitions to the special symbol high probability state by having the game ball enter a specific area during a jackpot, if the reserved icon that failed to receive the command is a jackpot and the game ball fails to pass through the specific area during that jackpot and transitions to normal game mode, the reserved icon displayed as "99%" will be consumed in normal game mode (special symbol low probability state), and may not result in a jackpot (or small jackpot). In other words, since unforeseen circumstances such as the above exist as long as there are reserved icons with unknown pre-read results, not displaying the jackpot probability percentage for reserved icons that appeared after the reserved icon with unknown pre-read results can prevent incorrect information from being reported, even if the command was received correctly.

In Figure 60 (f), the animation of the third hold icon h23 increasing has finished and the third hold icon h23 is displayed. In this variant, if a winning command is not received correctly, the hold icons after the hold icon that was not displayed will also be displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). In other words, even if the prediction result is known, it will only be displayed in the default display mode. Therefore, the third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode), without displaying the percentage of the probability of a jackpot.

In Figure 60 (g), the variable display of Special Chart 2 that had been running up until now has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a static display.

In Figure 60 (h), one reserved special pattern 2 is consumed, and a pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the icon movement animation has begun. After completing the movement animation shown in Figure 60 (h), the display mode of the first reserved icon h21 and the second reserved icon h22 remains in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode). Meanwhile, the change icon h0 displays 1%.

In Figure 60(i), one ball wins in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a winning command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. However, even here, the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive the winning command. In the special symbol 2 pending icon display area 282 on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 60(i), the third pending icon h23 that should normally be displayed is shown with a dotted line.

In Figure 60 (j), the variable display of special chart 2 has ended, the variable icon h0 has disappeared, and the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed frozen.

In Figure 60 (k), one reserved symbol for special symbol 2 is consumed, and a pattern change start command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the current reserved number is two. The first sub-control unit 400 successfully receives this pattern change start command, and although the display of the change in special symbol 2 has begun, the reserved number for special symbol 2 remains at two. Therefore, the second reserved icon h22 is displayed in the default display mode of presentation mode A (round, normal color display mode) at the specified size from the beginning without any increase animation. In addition, a movement animation has also begun in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this movement animation, the reserved icon that initially failed to display at the timing of Figure 60 (d) is displayed as the change icon h0. The change icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the currently occurring change display, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the result of the hit/miss judgment made by the main control unit 300 as a command at the start of the pattern change. The pending icon that was not displayed will have its jackpot reliability displayed as a percentage when it becomes the variable icon h0. Subsequent pending icons that were displayed in the default display mode even though the prediction result was known will also have their jackpot reliability displayed as a percentage at this time. If a pending icon that failed to receive a winning command results in a jackpot, it may not be possible to display an icon that reflects the change in the game status after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the display mode is changed after the pending icon that failed to receive a winning command is actually consumed and the result of the win/loss determination is announced. Even if the pending icon that was not displayed becomes the variable icon h0, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. The display mode of subsequent pending icons that were displayed in the default display mode even though the prediction result was known may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. The display modes of both the variable icon h0 and the subsequent pending icons may remain unchanged and remain in the default display mode. Alternatively, the display mode of this subsequent reserved icon can be changed at any time as long as the first sub-controller 400 stores the results of the look-ahead. For example, the display mode may be changed based on the look-ahead results when the first reserved icon h21 is reached. Furthermore, in the reserved number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 60(k), 1 is not displayed and 2 remains displayed. In other words, the reserved number value remains displayed as 2 without being reduced to 1.

In Figure 60 (l), the icon movement animation has ended, and the variable icon display area 280 displays a round variable icon h0 with a 5% indication, while the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2 displays the first hold icon h21 with a 5% indication. The second hold icon h22, which is the hold icon that failed to display for the second time at the timing of Figure 60 (i), is still in its default display mode, and will remain in its default display mode until it becomes variable icon h0. A changing sound is output from the speaker 120.

In addition, if a jackpot occurs in presentation mode C and the RUSH state is resumed in presentation mode C after the jackpot play, the percentage display of the jackpot reliability that was displayed before the jackpot play will be re-drawn and a new value will be displayed. Even in this case, the percentage display of the jackpot reliability will not be displayed for pending icons after the pending icon that was not displayed.

The number of reserved balls can be displayed by a lamp such as the special symbol 2 reserved lamp 220, which is displayed by the main control unit 300, or by a reserved icon display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a numerical display in the reserved number notification area of the fourth symbol display area 284, which is displayed by the first sub-control unit 400. Even in the case of a lamp display by the first sub-control unit 400, if the first sub-control unit 400 determines the correct current number of reserved balls after failing to receive a winning command, the lamps that light up according to the number of reserved balls will light up from one lamp lit, and then the second and third lamps will light up simultaneously, as shown in Figures 57(e), 58(e), and 60(e).

In addition, Figures 57 (e), 58 (e), and 60 (e) show examples where, while one reserve icon is displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command indicating that the number of reserves for special chart 2 is 3. However, if a winning command indicating that the number of reserves for special chart 2 is 4 is received, the second reserve icon h22 and the third reserve icon h23 are displayed without increasing animation in the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, and the fourth reserve icon h24 is displayed with increasing animation, and in the reserve number notification area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284, the number is updated from 1 to 4 in one go, skipping 2 and 3. Furthermore, when two reserve icons are displayed and the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning command indicating that the reserve number for special symbol 2 is 4, the third reserve icon h23 is displayed without increasing animation in the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2, and the fourth reserve icon h24 is displayed with increasing animation, and the reserve number notification area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 284 is updated from 2 to 4 in one go, skipping 3. Even in these cases, the manner in which the reserve icon that failed to be displayed due to a failed command reception is displayed once the correct current reserve number is known is the same as that described above.

Note that the first sub-control unit 400 in the above description may be a sub-control unit that combines the functions of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500.

According to the above description,
"A main control means [for example, the main control unit 300] capable of counting the increase in the number of reserved balls based on the ball entering the starting hole;
A sub-control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that receives an increase signal (e.g., a winning command) sent from the main control means when the reserved number increases;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) controlled by the sub-control means,
The production means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon in the first display area [for example, the hold icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2],
The production means is a means capable of displaying the reserved number display in the second display area [for example, the reserved number notification area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284],
The sub-control means is a means for displaying a hold icon in the first display area when the increase signal is received (e.g., Figures 57(b) to 57(c), 58(b) to 58(c), 60(b) to 60(c)),
The sub-control means is a means for updating and displaying the value of the hold number display when the increase signal is received [e.g., Figure 57(b), Figure 58(b), Figure 60(b)],
The presentation means is a means for, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the hold number is three [e.g., Figures 57(e), 58(e), and 60(e)], displaying a second hold icon [e.g., second hold icon h22] and a third hold icon [e.g., third hold icon h23] in the first display area, while updating the value of the hold number display to 3 without updating it to 2 in the second display area [e.g., skipping 2 and updating from 1 to 3 in one go].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes it possible to quickly inform players of the exact number of reserved balls, and can also notify players of any abnormalities by changing the display depending on the display area.

Note that the phrase "when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 3" here means "when the sub-control means does not receive an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 2, but receives an increase signal indicating that the reserved number is 3" (the same applies hereinafter).
Also,
"The presentation means is a means for, when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of reserved items is three while one reserved item is being displayed [for example, Figure 57(e), Figure 58(e), Figure 60(e)], displaying the second reserved item in the first display area without using an increasing animation [for example, an animation in which the reserved item gradually becomes larger toward a predetermined size] [for example, displaying it at a predetermined size from the beginning], and displaying the third reserved item using the increasing animation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By quickly displaying hold icons that should already be displayed, and using the aforementioned increasing animation for hold icons that are displayed at the correct time, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the exact number of holds and also to add excitement to the game.

Also,
"When the presentation means displays the hold icon in a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A, presentation mode B, or presentation mode C], it may display the icon in a manner suggesting the possibility that the player will be in an advantageous position (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestion manner") [for example, the reliability of a jackpot may be indicated by a color or by a number in a percentage],
The presentation means is a means for, in the first presentation mode, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three, not starting to display the second hold icon in the suggested mode, and not starting to display the third hold icon in the suggested mode either [for example, Figures 60(e) to 60(f)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

If the increase signal is not received properly, the hold icon will not be displayed in the suggested manner, preventing incorrect information from being provided.

The presentation means may be a means for displaying the second hold icon, which was not displayed in the suggested mode, in the suggested mode when the icon becomes a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0 in Figure 60(l)]. Furthermore, the presentation means may be a means for displaying the third hold icon, which was not displayed in the suggested mode, in the suggested mode when the second hold icon becomes a variable icon [for example, first hold icon h21 in Figure 60(l)].

Furthermore, in the first presentation mode, when one hold icon is displayed and the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three, the presentation means may not display the second hold icon [for example, the second hold icon h22 in Figure 58(e)] in the suggested manner, but display the third hold icon in the suggested manner [for example, the third hold icon h23 in Figures 58(e) to 58(f)].

Furthermore, not displaying in the suggested mode may mean displaying in the default display mode. The default display mode is a display mode that does not indicate the possibility of the player gaining an advantage, and may be the display mode that is displayed after power is restored after a power outage [for example, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in Figure 59 (d), (D), or (E)].

Furthermore, the presentation means may be means for displaying the second hold icon in the default display mode of the suggestion mode [for example, a display mode suggesting the lowest possibility] when the sub-control means receives an increase signal indicating that the number of holds is three while one hold icon is being displayed in the first presentation mode [for example, the second hold icon h22 in Figure 57 (e) is displayed in a normal color display mode indicating an 8% probability of winning].

Also,
"The suggestion mode is a mode in which a number indicating the reliability suggesting the possibility that the player will be in an advantageous state is displayed on the hold icon [for example, a mode in which the reliability of a jackpot is displayed by a number in % in presentation mode C].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By allowing players to directly grasp the reliability of the indication of the possibility of an advantageous situation, the presentation is easy to understand even for beginners, increasing the enjoyment of the game. It also makes it easier to understand the timing of the variable displays that should be noted.

Figure 61 is a diagram illustrating a modified version of the presentation mode.

In a modified example, regardless of the game state, the player can select one of multiple presentation modes and set the selected presentation mode by operating the up and down buttons on the directional pad of the operation key unit 190 shown in Figure 30. For example, presentation modes can be selected and set whether during a demo or while playing.

Figure 61(a) is a table showing the selectable rendering modes.

In this variant, four types of presentation modes are available. Presentation mode A is a normal mode, which is the default presentation mode in which the player has not performed any mode setting operations. Presentation mode B is a premium up mode, which is a presentation mode in which premium presentations are executed more frequently than presentation mode A. Presentation mode C is an advance notification mode, which is a type of advance notification presentation, which can be executed. Presentation mode D is an advance notification chance mode, which is a presentation mode in which the reliability (expectation) of advance notification presentations is increased.

Other predictive effects besides advance warning effects include reserve change effects that change the display mode of the reserve icon when a win is won or the reserve icon shifts, depending on the predictive results, to suggest the level of expectation; effects that stop and display chance eyes in decorative pattern change displays before the pattern change display that is the subject of the prediction; and effects in which movable parts perform a specified action in pattern change displays before the pattern change display that is the subject of the prediction. In addition to predictive effects, there are also cases where the display mode of the change icon is changed to give a warning of the currently occurring pattern change display.

Premium effects and hold change effects can be executed in normal mode, but advance notification effects cannot be executed in normal mode. In other words, effect mode C, which is the advance notification mode, is a mode in which advance notification effects that cannot be executed in other effect modes are executed. Also, as will be described in more detail below, the probability of false effects being executed is reduced in advance notification mode. For example, a miss may make it less likely for a hold change effect to occur, or a miss may make it less likely for a highly anticipated reach effect to be executed.

Execution of the hold change effect may be restricted. For example, if a hold occurs during a high-expectation reach such as an SP reach, SPSP reach, or full rotation reach, the display mode of the hold icon representing the hold that has occurred will not change, or the hold icon itself will not be displayed. Furthermore, if a hold occurs when there is a high-expectation hold in the preceding hold, or when the variable icon is displayed in a high-expectation display mode, the display mode of the hold icon representing the hold that has occurred will not change. Here, "high expectation" does not necessarily mean a hit or jackpot; for example, it refers to an expectation level of over 50%. Furthermore, even if the display mode indicates a low expectation level, the expectation level will be high if the pre-read result or hit/miss judgment result indicates a hit or jackpot. Furthermore, even if the first sub-control unit 400 misses a command from the main control unit 300, and as a result a hold occurs when there is a preceding hold for which the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet judged the pre-read result, the display mode of the hold icon representing the hold that has occurred will not change.

The look-ahead effects that are the target of effect mode D, which is the look-ahead chance mode, may be only the hold change effects, or may be all look-ahead effects that can be executed in the look-ahead chance mode, or may be any one type of look-ahead effect out of the multiple types of look-ahead effects that can be executed in the look-ahead chance mode, or may be multiple types of look-ahead effects.

Figure 61(b) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon and the winning reliability in presentation mode A or presentation mode B.

The normal color is white, and the display mode of this normal color is the default display mode for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B. The reliability of a win is 8%. When explaining the reliability of a win, this includes the reliability of a small win as well as the reliability of a big win in the case of a special symbol. This is because even a small win can be upgraded to a big win if it passes through the specific area 234v. However, the reliability of a small win may not be included. Additionally, rainbow colors indicate a guaranteed win (100% hit reliability). Other display modes include green, which has a 15% hit reliability, red, which has a 30% hit reliability, and gold, which has a 50% hit reliability.

Figure 61 (c) is a table showing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon and the probability of a jackpot in presentation mode C or presentation mode D.

There are no changes to the types of display modes between presentation modes A and B, but the reliability of winning is higher for display modes other than normal and rainbow colors. Presentation mode D is a mode that increases the reliability of winning to begin with, reducing the probability of a hold change effect occurring and increasing the expectation of a hold change effect when it occurs compared to normal mode. The same is true when set to presentation mode C, which is an advance notification mode. Presentation mode C is a mode that reduces the frequency of Gaze effects in preview effects other than advance notification effects, and the reliability of winning is also improved in preview effects using the display modes of the hold icon and variable icon. Note that the hit reliability for the normal color display mode can be set to 0% to make it exempt from preview effects, but even with normal colors, there is a very rare chance of a special jackpot or regular win, increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, we will discuss in detail the advance notification effects that can be executed in effect mode C. These advance notification effects are executed when a win is won (when a hold occurs), and there are two types: a first advance notification effect and a second advance notification effect. When the result of the pre-reading indicates a high expectation (such as a win or jackpot, or a long fluctuation time), the second advance notification effect is more likely to be executed. In this second advance notification effect, when a win is won, the light-emitting means (e.g., button lamp 136, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, etc.) emits light in a specific color (red in this case), and a specific sound is output from the sound output means (e.g., speaker 120). On the other hand, in the first advance notification effect, when a win is won, the light-emitting means emits light in a normal color (white in this case), and no specific sound is output from the sound output means. The second advance notice effect can be considered an advance notice effect that suggests a win or jackpot, and the first advance notice effect can be considered an advance notice effect that suggests a miss, but as will be explained in more detail below, the second advance notice effect may also be a Gaze effect, and the first advance notice effect may also be a win.

However, if the preceding reserved ball is a winning ball or if the current variation is a winning ball, and the game ball enters the ball and the result of the pre-reading judgment is determined to be a "win," the second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) will not be executed. On the other hand, even in these cases, the first pre-reading effect (with white light and no specific sound output) can be executed. Also, even if the preceding reserved ball is a winning ball or if the current variation is a winning ball, if the result of the pre-reading judgment for the subsequent winning ball is determined to be a "miss," the second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) can be executed. In this case, the second pre-reading effect will be a fake effect. Furthermore, if the fake second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) is executed when the preceding reserved ball wins (when it occurs), the second pre-reading effect (with red light and specific sound output) can be executed when the subsequent reserved ball wins (when it occurs), regardless of whether the result of the pre-reading judgment is a "win" or a "miss."

Furthermore, the advance notification effect will not be executed during jackpot play or if the ball is not awarded in a recommended winning slot (for example, if the ball is awarded in the special chart 2 starting slot 232 in a non-time-saving play mode). Even in this case, the second advance notification effect may not be executed, but the first advance notification effect may be executed.

Furthermore, the execution of the advance notification effect is not restricted during high-expectation reaches such as SP reach and SPSP reach, when the execution of the hold change effect is restricted, when there are high-expectation holds in the preceding holds, when the variable icon is displayed in a high-expectation display mode (all of these states are states in which false effects are being performed), or when the first sub-control unit 400 fails to receive a command from the main control unit 300, resulting in a state in which there is a preceding hold for which the first sub-control unit 400 has not yet determined the results of the advance reading.

Figure 61 (d) shows the determination table for advance notification effects.

The judgment table shown in Figure 61 (d) is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and when a winning command indicating a win at the normal starting port 228 or a winning command indicating a win at the special starting port 232 is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the CPU 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs lottery processing based on the judgment table shown in Figure 61 (d) for the type of advance notification effect.

The advance notification effect for a normal winning symbol is set to effect mode C, and is only performed when the game state is not in a time-saving game state. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a reach effect when the decorative symbol variation display for the normal symbol is performed, and the advance notification effect for the normal symbol is associated with the decorative symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed when the currently obtained reserved symbol is consumed and the resulting pattern variation is executed. If the decorative symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed is a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach, the first advance notification effect (white light emission, no specific sound output) is selected with a 100% probability. Note that in the case of a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach, there is no winning and the result is always a loss, but there may be cases where a win occurs. On the other hand, in the case of a loss resulting in an SP reach, the second advance notification effect (red light emission, specific sound output) is selected with a 40% probability, and the first advance notification effect is selected with the remaining 60% probability. In the case of a loss resulting in an SPSP reach, the second advance notice effect will be selected with a 100% probability, resulting in a 100% Gaze effect.

In the event of an SP Reach win, the first advance notification effect (white light emitted, no specific sound output) is selected with a 40% probability, and the second advance notification effect (red light emitted, specific sound output) is output with a remaining 60% probability. In the event of an SPSP Reach win, the first advance notification effect is selected with a 10% probability, and the second advance notification effect is selected with a remaining 90% probability. When a win is achieved, the light-emitting means emits white light, and if an SPSP Reach occurs with the pattern change display indicating that the reserved number has been consumed, a win is confirmed. In the event of a Full Rotation Reach win, when a win is achieved, the light-emitting means emits red light and a specific sound is output with a 100% probability. Therefore, although it cannot be determined from the advance notification effect, a win is confirmed if a Full Rotation Reach occurs.

The advance notification effect for a special jackpot is set to effect mode C and is only performed when the game is in the time-saving game mode. If the advance notification result is a miss in the time-saving game mode, the first advance notification effect (white light emitted, no specific sound output) is executed with a 100% probability, and the second advance notification effect (red light emitted, specific sound output) is not executed. On the other hand, if the advance notification result is a hit in the time-saving game mode, the first advance notification effect is not executed, and the second advance notification effect is executed with a 100% probability. Therefore, if the special 2 starting hole 232 is won in the time-saving game mode and the advance notification effect is executed, a miss is confirmed if white light is emitted or the specific sound is not output, and a jackpot is confirmed if red light is emitted or the specific sound is output. Note that while the above explanation uses white or red light, rainbow light, etc., may also be used. In this case, red light may indicate a jackpot, while rainbow light may indicate a 3000-shot jackpot or the jackpot most advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the special chart 2 start slot 232 is won during time-saving play and the advance notification effect is executed, if the light is white or a specific sound is not output, it is a confirmed miss, and if the light is red or a specific sound is output, it is a confirmed jackpot. However, even if the light is white, there is a low probability of a win. Even in this case, it is preferable that the red light is output to confirm a jackpot.

As described above, when presentation mode C is set, either the first advance notification presentation or the second advance notification presentation is executed when a game ball enters the game (when a hold occurs).

As described above, if there is a winning combination in the preceding reserved ball or if a winning combination occurs in the currently occurring variation, and the game ball enters the ball and the result of the pre-reading judgment is determined to be a "winning combination," the execution of the second pre-reading effect (with red light emitted and specific sound output) is restricted. However, if the first sub-control unit 400 has stored the pre-reading results, it may perform the lottery processing for the pre-reading effect that was restricted at the time of winning after the winning combination has occurred, either after the winning combination based on the preceding reserved ball or after the activation of a normal electric device, or after the winning combination based on the currently occurring variation or after the activation of a normal electric device. Alternatively, the lottery processing for the pre-reading effect may also be performed if the pre-reading results are sent again to the first sub-control unit 400 after the winning combination has occurred or after the activation of a normal electric device. The timing of this lottery process may be the end of the jackpot game, the closing time of the normal electric device, the end time of the win, or the timing of the start of the first symbol change after the jackpot game or the activation of the normal electric device, or the timing of the stop of the first symbol change, or the timing of the start of the next symbol change. In a pachinko machine in which the transition of the game state described using Figure 44 is performed, the lottery process for the advance notification effect regulated at the time of winning may be performed at a certain timing between the end of the jackpot game of the (5) 10R jackpot shown in Figure 44 and the start of the symbol change of the first special symbol 2 in the (9) RUSH state (for example, the start or stop of the symbol change of the first special symbol 2 after the end of the 10R jackpot game, or the start or stop of the symbol change of the next special symbol 2). During jackpot play, reserves for special chart 2 tend to accumulate, and when the 10R jackpot play ends, the pattern on special chart 2 immediately begins to change, resulting in a transition to a non-time-saving play state. However, since the a2 time-saving play state is in effect when the pattern on special chart 2 begins to change, it becomes easier to win the time-saving pattern on special chart E shown in Figure 38 (c), and a rush state (c time-saving play state) begins. Therefore, before this rush state begins, a lottery process is performed for the advance notification effect that is restricted when a prize is won.

Figure 62 shows two examples of how the reserve change effect and the advance notification effect are executed in stages. The example shown in Figure 62 is in the time-saving play state C, where it is easy to win the special symbol 2 starting slot 232, and the game progresses mainly based on the change in the symbol on special symbol 2.

The variable icon display area 280 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 62, and the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2 is displayed to the right of it. Furthermore, the RUSH TIME, which indicates the elapsed time since the start of the time-saving c game state (RUSH state) (0.01 seconds in Figure 62(a)), is displayed at the top. The number of symbol fluctuations until the time-saving c game state ends (143 times in Figure 62(a)) is also displayed at the bottom left. A mini symbol MIN is also displayed to indicate that special symbol 2 is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of prize balls won display TAL, and a small right-hand hit display U5 are also displayed. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the bottom area is the display area for special symbol 2, the left side of which indicates the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2, and the right side of that is the notification area for the symbol fluctuation of special symbol 2. Furthermore, below the remaining number of symbol changes until the end of the time-saving game state c, a display mode selection display DMS is displayed, and in the example shown in Figure 62, it is displayed that display mode C, which is an advance notification mode, has been set.

Also shown in each diagram in Figure 62 are a speaker 120, which is a sound output means, and a button lamp 138, which is a light-emitting means.

In Figure 62 (a), the decorative pattern is changing in accordance with the pattern change of special pattern 2 in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. Also, in the display area for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 284, a flashing "-" pattern begins to be displayed, indicating that the change display of special pattern 2 is being performed. Also, a green change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280. The speaker 120 is in a mute state, and the button lamp 138 is off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 62 (b), the SPSP reach effect has begun. In the following Figure 62 (c), while the SPSP reach effect continues, one ball enters the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, and one special pattern 2 reserve is accumulated. Hereinafter, the first reserve will be referred to as the first reserve. The pre-read result of this first reserve is a jackpot. In the fourth pattern display area 284, the number of reserves for special pattern 2 becomes 1, and the first reserve icon h21 representing the first reserve is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for special pattern 2. However, because a reach effect with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as the SPSP reach effect, is being executed, the execution of the reserve change effect is restricted, and the display mode of the first reserve icon h21 is the normal white color. Meanwhile, even if the currently active symbol change display is a reach effect with a high probability of winning, such as an SPSP reach effect, the execution of the advance notice effect is not restricted. Instead, the second advance notice effect is selected as a result of the lottery based on the determination table shown in FIG. 61(d), and the second advance notice effect is executed. In other words, in conjunction with the winning of the special symbol 2 start slot 232 (an increase in the special symbol 2 reserve), a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 62(c), and the button lamp 138 lights up red. This indicates that the newly acquired reserve (first reserve) is promising, greatly increasing the enjoyment of the game.

After that, the SPSP reach effect ends, the losing decorative pattern combination ("Decoration 4 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4") is displayed as a stopped combination, and after the confirmed stop, the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed. In Figure 62 (d), the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and the white first reserved symbol h21 shifts to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the red variable symbol h0. In other words, the reserve change effect is executed at the time of the shift, and a "beep" sound, which is the sound of the symbol changing to red, is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the display of the changing decorative symbols has begun. Note that when the display of the changing decorative symbols begins, each decorative symbol swings in the opposite direction for a moment before beginning to rotate in the forward direction.

In Figure 62 (e), one ball enters the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and one reserve for special symbol 2 is accumulated. The predictive result for the first reserve here is also a jackpot. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes 1, and the first reserve icon h21 representing the first reserve is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. However, since the variable icon h0 is displayed in red and the display mode is C, the expected probability of a jackpot is high at 60%, so the execution of the reserve change display is restricted, and the display mode of the first reserve icon h21 is the normal white color. Furthermore, since the currently occurring symbol change display is a jackpot and the first reserve is also a jackpot, the execution of the second advance notification display (with red light and specific sound output) is also restricted, and the first advance notification display is executed. That is, in conjunction with the winning of the special chart 2 starting hole 232 (an increase in the reserved special chart 2), the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 62 (c) lights up in white, and no sound is output from the speaker 120.

Next, we will explain another example. In Figure 62 (A), play progresses in the time-saving c game state, and 8 minutes 9.71 seconds have passed since the start of the time-saving c game state (RUSH state), with 43 plays remaining until the time-saving c game state ends. In Figure 62 (A), presentation mode C is also set, and the decorative pattern of special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner. The variable icon h0 is displayed in the normal color, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 is 0.

In the following Figure 62 (B), one ball lands in the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and one special symbol 2 reserve is accumulated. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 becomes 1, and the first reserve icon h21, which is displayed in green to indicate the first reserve, is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. The first reserve icon h21 is displayed in green with a reliability of 30%, but the first reserve is predicted to be a jackpot, and the second advance notification effect, which suggests a jackpot, is being executed. In other words, in conjunction with the winning of the special symbol 2 starting hole 232 (the increase in the reserved symbol 2), a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120 shown in Figure 62 (B), and the button lamp 138 lights up red. This indicates that the reserved symbol acquired this time (first reserve) is promising, greatly increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In Figure 62 (C), another ball enters the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a second reserve is accumulated as a reserve for special symbol 2. Hereinafter, the second reserve will be referred to as the second reserve. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes two, and the second reserve icon h22 in the normal color representing the second reserve is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2. The prediction result for this second reserve is a miss, and as a result of the lottery based on the judgment table shown in Figure 61 (d), the first advance notification effect is selected and the first advance notification effect is executed. In other words, the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 62 (C) emits white light, and no sound is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 62 (D), one more ball enters the special symbol 2 starting hole 232, and a third reserve is accumulated as a reserve for special symbol 2. Hereinafter, the third reserve will be referred to as the third reserve. Both this third reserve and the prediction result are jackpots. In the fourth symbol display area 284, the number of reserves for special symbol 2 becomes three, and the third reserve icon h23 representing the third reserve is displayed in the special symbol 2 reserve icon display area 282. However, since the prediction result for the first reserve is a jackpot, the execution of the reserve change effect is restricted, and the third reserve icon h23 is displayed in its normal color. Furthermore, since the prediction result for the first reserve is a jackpot and the prediction result for the third reserve is also a jackpot, the second advance notification effect is also restricted, the first advance notification effect is executed, the button lamp 138 lights up white, and no sound is output from the speaker 120. Also, in Figure 62 (D), the decorative pattern of Special Chart 2 is displayed fluctuating between "Decoration 5" - "Decoration 4" - "Decoration 7."

Eventually, the shaking display ends, and after the losing decorative pattern combination ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 7") is confirmed and stopped, the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed. In Figure 62 (E), the first reserved symbol for Special Symbol 2 is consumed, and the green first reserved symbol h21 shifts to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the gold variable symbol h0. In other words, the reserve change effect is executed at the time of the shift, and a "ping" sound, which is the sound of the symbol changing to gold, is output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the third reserved symbol representing the third reserved symbol, for which the execution of the second advance notification effect is restricted upon winning, has become the second reserved symbol h22. Furthermore, in Figure 62 (E), the variable display of decorative symbols has begun.

Next, in Figure 62 (F), the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing an SPSP reach effect, and in the same figure (G), the decorative symbol combination ("Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7" - "Decoration 7") representing a jackpot is confirmed and stopped.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 62 (H) executes the start effect of the jackpot game, after which the jackpot game is played, followed by the end effect of the jackpot game in Figure 62 (I). When the end effect of the jackpot game begins, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a lottery process for the second advance notification effect of the third hold (second hold at this point), whose execution is restricted upon winning in Figure 62 (D), and the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 62 (I) lights up red, and the speaker 120 outputs a specific sound, "pokyun." In addition, a lottery process is also performed to determine the display mode of the hold change effect of the third hold (second hold at this point), whose execution is restricted upon winning in Figure 62 (D).

Figure 62 (I) shows an example in which, at the end of a jackpot, lottery processing is executed for the advance notification effect, the execution of which was restricted when the hold occurred, but the timing at which lottery processing for the restricted advance notification effect is executed is not limited to this timing and may also be the timing shown in Figure 62 (I').

Specifically, as shown in Figure 62 (I'), when the first symbol change begins after the jackpot, a lottery process is performed for the advance notification effect, and as a result, the second advance notification effect is selected, the button lamp 138 shown in Figure 62 (I') lights up red, and a specific sound, "pokyun," is output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the third hold, whose execution was restricted upon winning in Figure 62 (D), is now the first hold, and a lottery process is also performed to determine the display mode of the hold icon for this first hold, and the first hold icon h21, displayed in green, is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2 in Figure 62 (I').

The timing at which the lottery process for the restricted advance notification effects is executed may be at the end of the jackpot, at the start of the first (first spin) fluctuation after the jackpot, at the end of the first (first spin) fluctuation after the jackpot, at the start of the second spin fluctuation, or at the start of the first fluctuation in the c-time-saving game state after the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is designed to change the normal symbol during normal play. When multiple winning normal symbols are reserved, after the special symbol jackpot game is played based on the first normal symbol, the normal electric device (electric chute) is activated for a long time by the normal electric gate trigger. In this so-called "time-saving play state" (A2 time-saving play state), in which winning is easy, the player can pass through the normal electric gate 228g and win another special symbol jackpot. However, if the remaining winning normal symbols are consumed, the normal electric device is activated, and the jackpot game begins before the game ball passes through the normal electric gate 228g, the special symbol jackpot triggered by the normal electric gate trigger cannot be obtained. In such cases, if an advance notification effect is executed every time a winning normal symbol is reserved, the player will be more likely to notice this phenomenon, which will make the player feel like they've lost out and reduce their motivation to play. Therefore, in such situations, restricting the execution of the advance notification effect in addition to the hold change effect can prevent a decline in motivation to play.

Furthermore, in the case of machines that determine whether or not a jackpot will occur or whether or not to transition to a special mode by passing through a specific area (V area), even if a jackpot occurs during the special mode, if the machine subsequently transitions to a normal mode without passing through the V area, it may no longer be a jackpot. In such cases, if advance warning effects are implemented, incorrect information will be given. Or, it may lead to excessive expectations. To prevent these things from happening, it is effective to restrict the implementation of advance warning effects in addition to hold change effects.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading effects,
A player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, presentation modes A to D shown in FIG. 61(a)) by operating the player.
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (normal mode)] and a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)],
The plurality of types of pre-reading effects include a first pre-reading effect [for example, a hold change effect] and a second pre-reading effect [for example, a second pre-announcement effect],
The first look-ahead effect [for example, a hold change effect] is a look-ahead effect that can be executed in the first effect mode and can also be executed in the second effect mode [for example, the example shown in FIG. 62],
The second pre-reading effect [for example, the second pre-announcement effect] is a pre-reading effect that cannot be executed in the first effect mode but is executable in the second effect mode,
In the second presentation mode, for a certain hold, the first pre-reading presentation may be executed, and the second pre-reading presentation may also be executed [for example, FIG. 62(B)].
The first pre-reading effect is an effect that may be executed at least at a first timing [for example, at the timing of a shift],
The second pre-reading effect is an effect to be executed at a second timing (for example, at the timing of winning),
the first timing is later than the second timing,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the second presentation mode is configured to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the first presentation mode,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the second presentation mode is configured not to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the first presentation mode,
In the case where a winning hold occurs in the second performance mode and the first look-ahead performance and the second look-ahead performance are executed for the hold, when a new hold occurs, the first look-ahead performance may not be executed at the first timing for the new hold, while the second look-ahead performance may be executed at the second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading effects,
A player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, presentation modes A to D shown in FIG. 61(a)) by operating the player.
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of reach effects,
A hold display (e.g., a hold icon) can be displayed in response to the hold;
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a first presentation mode [for example, presentation mode A (normal mode)] and a second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)],
The plurality of types of pre-reading effects include a first pre-reading effect [for example, a hold change effect] and a second pre-reading effect [for example, a second pre-announcement effect],
The plurality of types of reach effects include a first reach effect [for example, a normal reach effect] and a second reach effect [for example, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a full rotation reach effect] that indicates a higher possibility of a jackpot than the first reach effect,
The display mode of the reserved display includes a normal display mode [for example, a display mode in a normal color (white)] and a suggestive display mode that suggests a higher possibility of a jackpot than the normal display mode,
The suggestive display mode includes a plurality of display modes [for example, display modes using green, red, gold, and rainbow colors],
The first pre-reading effect is an effect in which the pending display is displayed in any one of the suggestion display modes,
During the execution of the second reach effect, if a new hold occurs, the first read-ahead effect may not be executed for the new hold, but the second read-ahead effect may be executed (for example, FIG. 62(c)).
The first look-ahead effect [for example, a hold change effect] is a look-ahead effect that can be executed in the first effect mode and can also be executed in the second effect mode [for example, the example shown in FIG. 62],
The second pre-reading effect [for example, the second pre-announcement effect] is a pre-reading effect that cannot be executed in the first effect mode but is executable in the second effect mode,
In the second presentation mode, the first pre-reading presentation may be executed for a certain hold, and the second pre-reading presentation may also be executed [for example, FIG. 62(B)].
The first pre-reading effect is an effect that may be executed at least at a first timing [for example, at the timing of a shift],
The second pre-reading effect is an effect to be executed at a second timing (for example, at the timing of winning),
the first timing is later than the second timing,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the second presentation mode is configured to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the first presentation mode,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the second presentation mode is configured not to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the first presentation mode,
In the case where a winning hold occurs in the second performance mode and the first look-ahead performance and the second look-ahead performance are executed for the hold, when a new hold occurs, the first look-ahead performance may not be executed at the first timing for the new hold, while the second look-ahead performance may be executed at the second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine features a pre-reading effect that can be set to execute at will, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is popular with a wide variety of players.

Also,
"When a new hold occurs during the execution of the first reach effect [for example, a normal reach effect], the first look-ahead effect [for example, a hold change effect] may be executed for the new hold, and the second look-ahead effect [for example, a second advance notice effect] may also be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"When a losing hold occurs in the second presentation mode [for example, presentation mode C (advance notification mode)] and the first pre-reading presentation [for example, a hold change presentation] and the second pre-reading presentation [for example, a second pre-notification presentation] are executed for that hold, if a new hold occurs, the first pre-reading presentation will not be executed at the first timing [for example, the timing at the time of shifting] for that new hold, but the second pre-reading presentation may be executed at the second timing [for example, the timing at the time of winning].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"The first pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect that cannot be newly started during the first period during the pattern change display [for example, FIG. 62 (c)],
The second pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect that can be newly started even during the first period [for example, FIG. 62(c)],
The first period is a period during which a predetermined reach effect (for example, a reach effect with a high expectation such as an SP reach, an SPSP reach, or a full rotation reach) is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the first look-ahead effect, which can be executed in any presentation mode, is not executed when the specified reach effect, which can lead to a win or jackpot, is being executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the specified reach effect and making the game more exciting. Furthermore, the second look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that can only be executed when the second presentation mode is set by the player's operation, and can be said to be a look-ahead effect that the player actively wishes to have executed. By making this second look-ahead effect executable even when the specified reach effect is being executed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is popular with players who desire the second look-ahead effect.

Also,
"When a winning hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. 62 (D)) occurs during the pattern change display, the first pre-reading effect (for example, the hold change effect) for that hold cannot be executed if a predetermined condition is met.
When a winning hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. 62 (D)) occurs during the pattern change display, the second pre-reading effect (for example, the second pre-announcement effect) for the hold cannot be executed if the predetermined condition is met.
The predetermined condition is that a matching reservation (e.g., a first reservation) is stored before the reservation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Winning the second or subsequent balls can make the player feel like they've lost out, and even if the ball was a win when the hold was created, it may no longer be a win when the hold is consumed due to changes in the situation. Because of these possibilities, it is effective to restrict the execution of the second look-ahead effect in addition to the first look-ahead effect when the specified condition is met.

Figure 63 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in Figure 63, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming machine. In other words, gaming media fired from the firing means 901 into the gaming area 902 can be ejected from the gaming area 902 and supplied to the firing means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 that displays information on the number of gaming media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the gaming area 902 on the front of the gaming machine, and the upper tray 126 and lower tray 128 shown in Figure 30 are not provided.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 30 may further include the display means 903 on the upper tray 126, and the display means 903 may further include a touch panel. That is, the touch panel on the display means 903 may function as an operation means. A single touch, rapid tap, or long press on the touch panel may execute an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, if the long press auto rapid tap function is enabled, a pseudo rapid tap operation may be performed on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. The long press auto rapid tap function may also be disabled. The long press auto rapid tap function may also be enabled for some effects. In other words, the long press auto rapid tap function may be enabled on the touch panel, or may not be enabled, and the touch panel may be configured to activate more or fewer effects. Additionally, there are multiple effects that can be achieved by repeatedly tapping the touch panel, and when using the touch panel, the long press auto-tap function may be configured to be inactive more often or less often.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in Figure 63 is a machine in which balls are enclosed and circulated within the machine for use, and the enclosed balls may be used as fired balls, with the payout of balls being carried out using credits.

Next, we will use Figure 64 to explain a slot machine (reel gaming machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention. Here, Figure 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 64 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, center reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown in Figure 64) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in approximately three columns through the symbol display window 1013, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each reel 1010-1012, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each reel 1010-1012 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 1010-1012 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable for the reel backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. The rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 1020 indicates which paylines 1014 are active. The active paylines are predetermined based on the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. Note that the number of paylines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five lines active may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Hereinafter, active paylines may be referred to as active lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

Medal insertion buttons 1030-1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. Hereinafter, medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. Note that game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, game start lamp 1021 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030-1032, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1041; the term "inserting" encompasses both. The stored medal count display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout medal count display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored medal count display 1025, game information display 1026, and payout medal count display 1027 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or when the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. The reel targeted by the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation being referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation being referred to as the third stop reel. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout outlet for dispensing medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032 is provided a chance button 1100, which serves as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010-1012, or operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment, the chance button 1100 can be in multiple states, and may be able to change states during the valid period for operation of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling up a user menu (e.g., a menu for setting a player's personal gaming history information), and is composed of multiple buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operation means.

Below the stop button unit 1036 is a title panel 1062 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed, and a title panel lamp 1064 lights up the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

Sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right sides of front door 1002 are decorative lamps to add excitement to the game. A performance device 1060 is installed above front door 1002, and sound hole 1043 is installed above performance device 1060. This performance device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two shutters, right shutter 1063a and left shutter 1063b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, performance image display device) installed behind this shutter 1063. When right shutter 1063a and left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of slot machine 1000.

Note that the device does not have to be an LCD display, as long as it is configured to display various presentation images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Furthermore, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the edges of the display screen, so that part of the edges of the display screen are hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

With the slot machine 1000 described above, for example, normal play can be made to correspond to a first play state (e.g., normal play state) in the pachinko machine 100, and the CZ (chance zone) or premonition effect that signals a transition to AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) can be made to correspond to a second play state (e.g., a special state) in the pachinko machine 100. AT or ART can be made to correspond to a third play state (e.g., a small win rush) in the pachinko machine 100, and bonuses such as BB (big bonus) and RB (regular bonus) can be made to correspond to jackpot play in the pachinko machine 100. By adapting these to the above-described embodiments, the present invention can also be realized in the slot machine 1000.

The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a casino machine 2000 as shown in Figure 65(a), which "inputs a bill into the bill slot 2002, conducts a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, displays the lottery results on the lottery result display device 2008, adds the number of bonus coins to the remaining credits when a win is made, and if cash out 2009 is selected, issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 bearing a code corresponding to the remaining credits."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1(b), the present invention may be applied to a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, as shown in Figure 1(c), a portable game console 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention, and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that implements the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in Figure (b) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory unit and operation of the operation unit.

The portable game console 4000 in Figure (c) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory and operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in Figure (d) comprises an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory and operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1(e), the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data embodying the present invention. Electronic data embodying the present invention may be downloaded from this data server 6000 via an internet line to a home video game console 5000 shown in Figure 1(d).

The present invention can also be applied to game programs that simulate the operation of real machines such as pachinko machines for home gaming machines. In such cases, the recording medium for recording the game program can be a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described using pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, it is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, as explained above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing such application, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, it will still constitute a single, cohesive technical idea even if it is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 138 Button lamp 208 Decorative pattern display device 210 Normal pattern display device 212 First special pattern display device 214 Second special pattern display device 228 Normal pattern start opening 228g Normal electric operation gate 231 First special pattern start opening 2311 Shutter member 232 Second special pattern start opening 234 First variable winning opening 235 Second variable winning opening 2351 Shutter member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM

Claims (3)

A gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of pre-reading effects,
A player can select one of a plurality of presentation modes through his/her operation;
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of reach effects,
A hold display can be displayed in response to a hold,
The plurality of types of presentation modes include a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode,
The plurality of types of pre-reading effects include a first pre-reading effect and a second pre-reading effect,
The plurality of types of reach effects include a first reach effect and a second reach effect that suggests a higher possibility of a jackpot than the first reach effect,
The display mode of the reserved display includes a normal display mode and a suggestive display mode that suggests a higher possibility of a jackpot than the normal display mode,
The suggestion display mode includes a plurality of display modes,
The first pre-reading effect is an effect in which the pending display is displayed in any one of the suggestion display modes,
During the execution of the second reach effect, if a new hold occurs, the first read-ahead effect may not be executed for the new hold, while the second read-ahead effect may be executed.
The first look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance that can be executed in the first performance mode and can also be executed in the second performance mode,
The second look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that cannot be executed in the first effect mode but is executable in the second effect mode,
In the second performance mode, the first pre-reading performance may be executed for a certain hold, and the second pre-reading performance may also be executed.
The first pre-reading effect is an effect that may be executed at least at a first timing,
The second pre-reading effect is an effect to be executed at a second timing,
the first timing is later than the second timing,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the second presentation mode is configured to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the reserve that will be a loss in the first presentation mode,
The execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the second presentation mode is configured not to be lower than the execution frequency of the first pre-reading effect for the winning reserve in the first presentation mode,
In the case where a winning hold occurs in the second performance mode and the first look-ahead performance and the second look-ahead performance are executed for the hold, when a new hold occurs, the first look-ahead performance may not be executed at the first timing for the new hold, while the second look-ahead performance may be executed at the second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
During the execution of the first reach effect, if a new hold occurs, the first read-ahead effect may be executed for the new hold, and the second read-ahead effect may also be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the case where a miss reservation occurs in the second display mode and the first pre-reading display and the second pre-reading display are executed for the reservation, when a new reservation occurs, the first pre-reading display is not executed at the first timing for the new reservation, but the second pre-reading display may be executed at the second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.